Home

BBEdit User Manual

1. 225 Glossary SUDSHIUNONS cies OR en eh hace ce ERE nee Rhone 226 Using OSA Scripts with the Glossary esee 227 Scripting BBEdit 229 ADDple5cHpE OVEIVICW on spes deae eres paro d Aog ears du d ea 229 About Macintosh Scripting 230 Scriptable Applications and Apple Events 230 Recordable Applications 231 e Saving Scripts 231 Using Scripts with Applications 232 Scripting Resources 232 BBEdit and AppleScript 2 ener eR bor lebe e ee E dta 234 Recording Scripts for BBEdit 234 Reading an AppleScript Dictionary 236 Sample Scripts 240 e AppleScript Pitfalls 240 Moving Scripts from Pre 6 0 Versions of BBEdit 241 Working wath SCHDIS e Leda hehe ierit eiohi sdeRerd Disi 247 Scripts Menu 247 e Scripts Window 248 Organizing Scripts 248 e Attaching Scripts to Menu Items 248 Working with Development Tools 251 Configuring BBEdit for Development Environments 252 Syntax Coloring 253 Working with Development Environments 253 Switching Between Source and Header Files 253 BBEdit and the Unix Command Line 2 005 253 Shell Worksheets 254 Invoking BBEdit from the Command Line 256 Perl Python and Shell Scripting 0 0 00 eee 256 Using MacPerl on Mac OS 9 256 Using Unix Scripts on Mac OS X 257 Language Resources 257 Line Endings and Perl Unix Scripts 258 MacPerl Shebang Men
2. Human Interface Notes 3 Many other BBEdit features can have keyboard shortcuts assigned as well Here s how to set them Feature Set Keys in Menu commands Set Menu Keys BBEdit menu on Mac OS X Edit menu on Mac OS 9 Plug ins Plug In Tools palette Glossary items Glossary palette Scripts Scripts palette Perl Unix filters and scripts Perl Unix Filters and Scripts palettes Stationery Stationery palette To display any of BBEdit s floating palette windows use the Palettes submenu in the Window menu Contextual Menus When you Control click on selected text or at the insertion point in a text window BBEdit s contextual menu provides quick access to a few relevant and frequently used commands so you do not have to hunt around in the menu bar for them Snappy Palettes When you move or resize palettes floating windows they will snap to the edges of the screen and the edges of other palettes You can override this behavior by holding down the Shift key while dragging or resizing Dialog Box Key Equivalents You can use keys to click buttons or select options in most of BBEdit s dialog boxes Certain keys have the same meaning in all dialogs Pressing either the Return or Enter key is the same as clicking the default button e Typing Command period or pressing the Escape key is the same as clicking the Cancel button e You can use the Cut Copy Paste Clear and Select All commands either from the Edi
3. Cmd Q see next column submenu Cmd O Cmd Shift O Cmd D Cmd D Cmd Opt D submenu Cmd W Cmd Opt W Cmd Opt Shift W Cmd Shift W Cmd S Cmd Opt S Opt Cmd Shift S Cmd Opt Shift S Opt Cmd P Cmd Opt P Cmd Shift P Cmd Q File gt New Text Document with selection with Clipboard HTML Document File Group Disk Browser FTP Browser Shell Worksheet OS X Shell Worksheet OS X Edit Undo Redo Cut Cut amp Append Copy Copy amp Append Paste Paste Previous Clipboard Clear Select All Select None Select Line Select Paragraph Insert Auto Complete Glossary Insert Glossary Entry Show Clipboard Previous Clipboard Next Clipboard Text Options Printing Options Preferences Mac OS 9 Set Menu Keys Mac OS 9 Edit gt Insert File Contents File Path Folder Listing Folder Path Toolbox Call Template Page Break Cmd N Cmd Shift N Cmd Opt Shift N Cmd Ctl N Cmd Opt N Cmd Z Cmd Shift Z Cmd X Cmd Shift X Cmd C Cmd Shift C Cmd V Cmd Shift V Cmd A Cmd Shift A Cmd L Cmd Opt L see below Ctl Ctl Cmd Opt Cmd Shift Cmd Listing by Menu and Command Name 291 Text Font amp Tabs Balance Exchange Characters Exchange Words Change Case Change Case Shift Left Shift Left One Space Shift Right Shift Right One Space Hard Wrap Hard Wrap Add Line Breaks Remove Line Breaks Rewrap Quoted Text
4. Non breaking spaces typed by pressing Option space will not be displayed with a placeholder Chapter 10 Preferences Note Note Syntax Coloring When this option is selected and the editing window contains a document in one of the languages that BBEdit knows how to parse BBEdit displays keywords and other language elements in color The languages that BBEdit knows about are those listed in the Languages panel of the Preferences window Remember that the document must be saved to a file and that the file must end with a suffix extension that maps to a language that BBEdit can parse You can select the colors that BBEdit uses for syntax coloring in the Text Colors panel of the Preferences window Soft Wrap Text When this option is selected BBEdit soft wraps the text in the file to the right margin that you choose the Philip bar the window width or a specific number of characters as selected by the options below the checkbox The Philip bar is the light gray line in the status bar that indicates the right edge of the usable viewing area on a 9 inch classic Mac monitor The Smart Editing option has been removed starting with BBEdit 6 5 It wasn t smart enough for us File Filters Preferences The File Filters preference panel lists all the file filters you have defined for multi file searching You can create edit rename or delete filters using the buttons on the right side of this panel For more information on c
5. Rewrap Quoted Text Increase Quote Level Decrease Quote Level Strip Quotes Zap Gremlins Zap Gremlins Entab Entab Detab Detab Resolve URL Check Spelling Font font sizes installed fonts Tools Installed plug ins Cmd B Cmd Cmd Opt Opt Cmd Cmd Shift Cmd Cmd Shift Cmd Cmd Opt Cmd Cmd Opt Cmd Opt Cmd Opt Opt Opt Opt none by default Appendix A Command Reference Search Find Quick Search Find Again Find Again reverse Find Selection Find Selection reverse Enter Search String Enter Replace String Replace Replace All Replace amp Find Again Find In Next File Open All Matches Find amp Replace All Matches Go to Line Go to Line Go to Center Line Go to Previous Error Go to Next Error Go to Previous Placeholder Go to Next Placeholder Find Differences Apply to New Apply to Old Compare Again Find in Reference Find Definition Markup see following pages Window Minimize Window OS X Cmd F Cmd Opt F Cmd G Cmd Shift G Cmd H or none Cmd Shift H Cmd E Cmd Opt E Cmd Cmd Opt Cmd T Cmd J Cmd Opt Cmd Shift J Cmd Opt up arrow Cmd Opt dn arrow Ctl Shift Ctu Cmd left arrow Cmd right arrow Cmd Cmd Opt Minimize All Windows OS X Opt Bring All to Front OS X Palettes Arrange Get In Arrange Get Info Super Get Info Mac OS X Reveal in Finder Se
6. The enclosed text is text to be entered on a computer keyboard used in instructions Sample Output The enclosed text is sample output from a computer program used in instructions Strong Emphasis The text should be displayed with strong emphasis most browsers interpret this as boldface Variable The text is a placeholder in an instruction or tutorial and should be replaced with an actual value of the appropriate type before actually performing the indicated operation Font Style Elements Like Phrase Elements Font Style Elements mark relatively short pieces of text within a block element However they are concerned more with the appearance of the text than its structural function in the document Big This displays the enclosed text in a larger font than usual Small This displays the enclosed text in a smaller font than usual Bold This displays the enclosed text in boldface type Italic This displays the enclosed text in italic type Strike Through This displays the enclosed text in a strike through style Teletype Text This displays the enclosed text in a monospaced font as on a computer terminal or teletype Underline This displays the enclosed text in an underlined style Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Frames The commands in the Frames submenu help you design documents that use frames The first document loaded by the browser contains at least one lt FRAMESET gt tag and one or more FRAM
7. Upgrading Upgrading Scripts The Scripts folder contains compiled OSA scripts that appear in the Scripts menu left Most OSA scripts are AppleScripts You can place scripts in this folder and use the Scripts menu to run the script Scripts may be placed within subfolders up to four levels deep to organize them A floating Scripts palette lets you activate scripts with a double click and assign keyboard shortcuts to any script Several basic scripts are supplied in this folder and more examples are available on the BBEdit CD Some scripts written for use with versions of BBEdit prior to 6 0 will not work with BBEdit 7 0 Please see Chapter 13 for more details and tips on converting your existing scripts Search Scripts The Search Scripts folder contains any compiled OSA scripts you prepare that return a list of files These scripts are listed in a pop up menu in the Find amp Replace dialog if a multi file search using a Script target is selected Please see Chapter 7 or a general scripting reference guide for more information on how to prepare such scripts This folder is installed empty by default Shutdown Items The items in this folder are opened when you quit BBEdit Usually this function will be used to run scripts of some sort This folder is installed empty by default Startup Items When launched BBEdit will look for a folder named Startup Items in the BBEdit Support folder If this folder is found BBEdit will op
8. bbinclude However this syntax made it difficult to mix BBEdit includes and Microsoft Active Server Page ASP directives so it is no longer supported If you have existing documents which use the older syntax simply change include to it bbinclude to use them with BBEdit 7 0 316 Appendix C Placeholders and Include Files APPENDIX Changes Since 7 0 This appendix summarizes the major changes that have been made in BBEdit 7 0 since its initial release As of this writing the current version is 7 0 4 In this appendix DDEGIEZZ0 aso Reed tia tre ode Sect teh mob dod dE QS ES 317 Close Current Tag 317 BRE CIE Z9 53 anes site que OU SQUE RUM aan dodo anie Gets o die 318 Link File s Encoding to HTML XHTML Character Set 318 DBEdIE 2 02 edem ssp aed O A piede he abe SE PES 318 Expanded Character Set Handling 318 Application Packaging Changes 319 Mac OS 9 1 Support 319 Insert Multiple Files 319 Save a Copy 319 New Menu Key Combinations 319 CVS Export Project 319 Unix Script Support for Include Files 319 BBE CIC 708 cain ie pem RII Gok Wd S RO uate S a Seb cS Mittel oS Oss 320 BBEdit 7 0 4 BBEdit 7 0 4 is a maintenance update released in July 2003 to correct various minor issues reported with previous releases It also includes a preferences option to control how the Close Current Tag command functions Close Current Tag This option in the HTML Mark
9. found object characters 1 thru 23 of text window BBEdit Scripting Notes of application BBEdit 7 0 found text BBEdit Scripting Notes Given the above and BBEdit s improved support for the text object model the single occurrence replace is now obsolete Instead to do a single find and replace via AppleScript you can write tell application BBEdit 7 0 set result to find BBEdit searching in window 17 with selecting match if found of result then set text of found object of result to Replacement end if end tell BBEdit and AppleScript 245 246 When performing a grep search you cannot just replace the matched pattern with a replacement string the grep subsystem needs to compute the substitutions The grep substitution event is provided for this purpose given a preceding successful Grep search it will return the appropriate replacement string So if you perform a grep search the script would look like tell application BBEdit 7 0 set result to find BBEdit searching in window 1 options search mode grep if found of result then set text of found object of result to grep substitution of 1 end if end tell Note that when using a backslash character in AppleScript it needs to be escaped by means of another backslash thus in the above example XA 1 used in the script will become the grep replacement string V1 when passed to BBEdit Scripting Multi File Searche
10. 1C_ORGANIZATION 1C_REALNAME Organization value returned by Internet control panel not available on Mac OS X Name value returned by Internet control panel Appendix C Placeholders and Include Files Placeholder LANGUAGE LINK LOCALPATH LONGDATE MACHINE META MODIFIEDDATE MODIFIEDTIME MONTHDAYNUM MONTHNUM PATH PREFIX REAL_URL RELATIVE ROOT ROOTPATH SERVER SHORTDATE SHORTUSERNAME TIME TITLE Replaced By The language specified in the New HTML Document command in format space lang en The LINK tag as entered using the New HTML Document command The full local path to the current file Long Date format e g Sunday October 27 2002 The machine name as specified in the Sharing Setup or File Sharing control panel In Mac OS X this returns localhost rather than the name specified in the Sharing panel in System Preferences This is a bug in the OS Any META tag entered using the New HTML Document command Modification date of the current file e g 27 Oct 02 Modification time of the current file in the format specified in the Date amp Time control panel Numeric value of the day of the month Numeric value of the current month Path to access your documents from the Web server as specified in your HTML Web Site preferences As DIRPATH but does not strip the leading slash of the path The real
11. If Mac OS X Developer Help is in use this command will be disabled since the developer help center does not support call templates Inserting a Page Break To insert a page break choose the Page Break command from the Insert submenu of the Edit menu This will place a form feed character ASCII 12 at the location of the insertion point BBEdit uses this character to indicate the start of a new page when printing You can also use the Page Break command in the Insert pop up menu in the status bar to insert a page break Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Comparing Text Files If you have ever had to reconcile changes between two different versions of a file or even larger numbers of documents you know how laborious this task can be BBEdit s Find Differences command is a powerful tool for doing such comparisons faster and more effectively Using Find Differences you can compare any two files or the contents of two folders You can also specify options to eliminate minor variations in document content such as different amounts of white space from being considered To compare two files 1 Choose the Find Differences command from the Search menu BBEdit opens the Find Differences dialog box Find Differences Compare Files Folders mg New other m f Other Old other m Other FUsers admin Desktop index html Library WebServer Documents index html Compare Options kal Case Sensitive U ignore Curly
12. One of the most common things you will use grep patterns for is to find and modify identifiers such as variables in computer source code or object names in HTML source documents To match an arbitrary identifier in most programming languages you might use this search pattern a z a zA 20 9 This pattern matches any sequence that begins with a lowercase letter and is followed by zero or more alphanumeric characters If other characters are allowed in the identifier add them to the pattern This pattern allows underscores in only the first character of the identifier a z_ a zA Z0 9 The following pattern allows underscores anywhere but the first character but allows identifiers to begin with an uppercase or lowercase letter a zA Z a zA Z0 9_ Matching White Space Often you will want to match two sequences of data that are separated by tabs or spaces whether to simply identify them or to rearrange them Chapter 8 Searching with Grep For example suppose you have a list of formatted label data pairs like this User name Bernard Rubble Occupation Actor Spouse Betty You can see that there are tabs or spaces between the labels on the left and the data on the right but you have no way of knowing how many spaces or tabs there will be on any given line Here is a character class that means match one or more white space characters t So if you wanted to transform the list above to look like this
13. To select Choose this from the Edit menu e a i A Line containing insertion Select Line point Paragraph containing Select Paragraph insertion point All text Select All You can then cut copy or perform any other action that affects the selected text BBEdit defines a paragraph as a block of text surrounded by blank lines lines containing no characters other than tabs or spaces The beginning and end of the document also mark the beginning and end of paragraphs Moving Text To move text from one place to another follow these steps 1 Select the text you want to move 2 Choose Cut from the Edit menu BBEdit removes the text from the window and stores it on the clipboard 3 Use the scroll bars to move to the new place for the text if necessary then click to set the insertion point where the text is to be inserted Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Tip new in 7 0 Note 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu You can paste the contents of the clipboard as many times as you want in any BBEdit window or in any other application Pasting inserts the text stored on the clipboard at the insertion point If there is a selection pasting replaces the selection with the contents of the clipboard To place text on the clipboard without deleting it choose Copy from the Edit menu To add selec
14. Using the Entire Matched Pattern The amp character is useful when you want to use the entire matched string as the basis of a replacement Suppose that in your text every instance of product names that begin with the company name ACME needs to end with a trademark symbol TV The following search pattern finds two word combinations that begin with ACME ACME A Za z The following replacement string adds the trademark symbol to the matched text gu For example if you start with ACME Magnets ACME Anvils and ACME TNT are all premium products and perform a replace operation with the above patterns you will get ACME Magnets ACME Anvils and ACME TNT are all premium products Using Parts of the Matched Pattern While using the entire matched pattern in a replacement string is useful it is often more useful to use only a portion of the matched pattern and to rearrange the parts in the replacement string For example suppose a source file contains C style declarations of this type define Util Menu 284 define Tool Menu 295 and you want to convert them so they look like this Pascal style const int Util Menu 284 const int Tool Menu 295 The pattern to find the original text is straightforward define t t d 0 9 S This pattern matches the word define followed by one or more tabs or spaces followed by one or more characters of any type followed by one or more tabs or spa
15. 135 Perl Style Pattern Extensions 136 Comments 137 Pattern Modifiers 137 Positional Assertions 139 e Conditional Subpatterns 141 Once Only Subpatterns 142 Recursive Patterns 144 Browsers 145 BrOWSel OVebVIO We ose deu dde RP Reit og epo see hee ee oa TRR 145 List Pane 145 Status Bar 146 e Text View Pane 146 Splitter 146 Disk DEOWSOES steer be b m E Ep On adeb EVE 146 Using Disk Browsers 147 Using the List Pane in Disk Browsers 148 Using the Text Pane in Disk Browsers 148 Table of Contents Chapter 10 Search Results Browsers seee e 149 Error Results BtOWSOfTS 1x DIVER EE PE i e 150 Preferences 151 The Preferences Command eee 152 Application Preferences s peste se pe CER 153 Optional Mac OS Services 153 Optional Application Services 153 Show Full Paths in Open Recent Menu 153 Remember Dialog Box Placement 154 When Dragging Show 154 Verify Open Files After 154 Remember the most recently used items 154 Browser Display Preferences 0 00 02 ce eee eee eee 154 Results Lists 154 e Show File Icons 154 Differences Preferences eee 155 Arrange Windows On 155 Differences Window Placement 155 Arrange Windows 155 Multi File Differences 155 Editor Defaults Preferences vvv terae ovp e YE RS 155 Auto Indent 155 Balance While Typing
16. 156 Smart Quotes 156 e Auto Expand Tabs 156 Show Invisibles 156 e Syntax Coloring 157 Soft Wrap Text 157 Pile Filters Preferences auolims Gee Rer Rr id edd Iu oe ee Red des 157 File Search Preferences 94 4 5 cnx ve aec EARN Ge meee aca US 157 Find All Matching Files 157 Skip Folders 157 Follow Folder Aliases 158 Default lt gt Directory 158 Unix Search Paths 158 Pile Dy pes PTelerences voces voro a em UE RS Aa Re E PLE 159 FONG ETOO up het beds sein ati ios tps oe a ad eed 159 PIE Set nes L TefeteliCes ooo inven Re taps das equ due 160 Remember Passwords 160 Store Passwords in Keychain 160 Include Passwords in Proxy URL Drags 160 List FTP Files on the Open Recent Menu 161 Passive FTP 161 Show Document Icons 161 Show Files Starting with 161 FTP Bookmarks 161 Function Popup Preferences suustos vi bd d rt RE RE E RES 161 Show Includes 161 e Sort Items by Name 162 Show Function Prototypes 162 Glossary Preferences oer e ret Eee SUR ERO 162 Ignore Trailing CR 162 Glossary Is Language Sensitive 162 HTML Colors Preferences i2 sek aise erm es ae 162 Color Palette Layout 162 Color Swatch Size 162 Color Picker 163 HTML Markup Preferences 3 voa eerte me Yet ac dus 163 HTML Tags 163 Quoting Tag Attributes 163 XML HTML Markup Rules 163 CSS Markup Formatting 163 Close Current Tag 16
17. 274 Check Out Folder 275 Find Lurkers 276 Make Obsolete 276 Remove Projector Info 276 e Open Log File 277 251 IMPORTANT 252 Configuring BBEdit for Development Environments Before you can use BBEdit with a development environment you need to let BBEdit know which development environments you plan to use Open the Preferences window by choosing Preferences from the BBEdit menu on Mac OS X or from the Edit menu on earlier Mac OS versions Select Tools from the list along the left side of the dialog Click the check boxes to select the development tools you plan to use Note that some tools are only available under specific versions of Mac OS More information can be found in Chapter 10 eo BBEdit Preferences These settings control how BBEdit interacts with third party toals Revert Save FTP Settings Script Editor Function Popup p Glossary Volumes Tharkoldu Collections AppleScriptDev Set HTML Colors HTML Markup HTML Palette HTML Preview HTML Tools HTML Web Sites Languages Software Update Spelling Startup State Status Bar Text Colors Text Editing Text Files Opening Text Files Saving Text Printing Text Search Coding Tools IV BBEdit HTML Tools wi CVS Integration External Editors M CodeWarrior Mac O5 API Reference Reference THINK Reference wi Use Mac Q5 X Developer Help Default Shell bin Jtcsh i Hd Windows Install bbedit Tool Script Debu
18. Find in Reference Looks up the selected text using your chosen Macintosh Toolbox reference program Find Definition Looks up the selected text from whatever project document is currently open in CodeWarrior Chapter 7 Searching CHAPTER Searching with Grep This chapter describes the Grep option in BBEdit s Find command which allows you to find and change text that matches a set of conditions you specify Combined with the multi file search and replace features described in Chapter 7 BBEdit s grep capabilities can make many editing tasks quicker and easier whether you are modifying Web pages extracting data from a file or just rearranging a phone list In a substantial change from versions prior to 6 5 BBEdit now incorporates a considerably more powerful grep engine based on the PCRE package Even if you were familiar with grep searching in previous versions of BBEdit you should read through this chapter if you are not already familiar with PCRE syntax In particular many new special characters and constructs are now available while the meaning of some previously used options has changed In this chapter What Is Grep or Pattern Searching os ose Siow e RRRERESESSSETI 116 Recommended Books and Resources leere 116 Wins Search Pattescooss datos et e vetu ed La iot ade tes ps 117 Most Characters Match Themselves 117 Escaping Special Characters 117 Wildcards Match Types of Characters
19. GoTo 4 EE site html A f Delete kal Show Document loons l Show Files Starting wath FTP Browsers enable you to maintain an open connection to an FTP server Enter your server address user name and password or choose a bookmark from the Bookmarks menu The buttons and pop up menus work the same as those in the Save to FTP Server and Open from FTP Server dialogs To open a file double click it or select it and click the Open button For editing purposes files opened from an FTP Browser behave exactly like those opened with the Open from FTP Server command To refresh the contents of the listing click the button in the lower right with the circular arrow icon You can double click a folder to change directories If you hold down the Option key when opening a folder it will open in a new FIP Browser window You can select a range of files and directories by Shift clicking and you can select and deselect multiple items one at a time by Command clicking Using Stationery Like most Macintosh applications BBEdit supports stationery pads A stationery pad is a template document that when opened results in a new untitled document with the content from the stationery file In other words you do not edit the stationery document itself you use it as a starting point for a new document To create a stationery pad click the Save As Stationery checkbox when saving the file from BBEdit Alternatively you can change any doc
20. Look for Templates and Include Files In Use the Set button to select the folder that contains your HTML document templates and include files You can also drag the folder s icon onto the box to the left of the Set button Languages Preferences The Languages preferences control how BBEdit associates filename extensions or suffixes for example html with the source language a file contains To add a new suffix mapping 1 Click Add The Add Suffix dialog appears 2 Enter the suffix choose the language from the pop up menu and click a radio button to tell BBEdit whether this type of file is a source file an include file or neither 3 Click Add to save the new mapping You can use wildcards in the suffix to indicate single characters any number of characters or a single digit For example page html could map to a different language from html To change a suffix mapping 1 Select an item from the list 2 Click Change The Change Suffix dialog appears 3 Fill in the Change Suffix dialog with the appropriate suffix choose a language from the pop up menu and select a radio button to indicate whether this type of file is a source file an include file or neither To delete a suffix mapping 1 Select an item from the list 2 Click Remove Chapter 10 Preferences To reset all suffix mappings to default settings 1 Click Reset All Language for Untitled Windows Choose a language from the p
21. Menu Remember Dialog Box Placement When Dragging Show Outline Only HTML Markup HTML Palette f Translucent Image i nen Verify Open Files After HTML Web Sites IV Activating BBEdit Running a BBEdit Plug In Languages Software Update Spelling Startup Remember the 12 most recently used items 5tate Status Bar Text Colors SS eee C Running an OSA Script Running a Unix Script The small text area at the top left of the Preferences window next to the Revert and Save buttons gives you a brief description of the contents of the currently displayed preference panel The list along the left side of the window lets you select the preference panel to use To save your preferences click Save To have BBEdit back out any unsaved changes you make while in the Preferences window click Revert Please note that Revert will only return settings that you have changed since the last Save operation to their saved condition it does not restore default settings To completely reset all preference settings to their default values you must quit BBEdit remove the existing BBEdit Prefs Data file from the BBEdit Preferences folder and relaunch BBEdit to have it generate a fresh set of preferences Chapter 2 contains details about the organization of BBEdit s preference files BBEdit s Preferences window is non modal you can leave it open as you work It do
22. User Manual BBEdit 7 Professional HTML and Text Editor for the Macintosh Bare Bones Software Inc Product Design Product Engineering Engineers Emeritus Documentation Additional Engineering Packaging amp Mac OS X Icon PCRE Library Package PopupFuncs Technology Installer VISE M Visibone color arrangements SpellWright Spelling System BBEdit and the BBEdit User s Guide are copyright 1992 2003 Bare Bones BBEdit 7 0 4 Rich Siegel Patrick Woolsey Jim Correia Steve Kalkwarf Jim Correia Jon Hueras Steve Kalkwarf Rich Siegel Chris Borton Tom Emerson Pete Gontier Jamie McCarthy John Norstad Jon Pugh Mark Romano Rob Vaterlaus Stephen Chernicoff Caroline Rose Jerry Kindall John Gruber Philip Borenstein Simon Jester Rich Siegel Patrick Woolsey Jeff Mattson Polaschek Computing lt http www polaschek computing com gt Ultra Maroon Design written by Philip Hazel and 1997 2000 University of Cambridge England Eric Slosser courtesy of Mind Vision Software lt http www mindvision com gt 1999 2000 VisiBone lt http www visibone com gt 1994 Lex Tek International lt http www lextek com gt Software Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA Bare Bones Software Inc P O Box 1048 Bedford MA 01730 01048 781 687 0700 781 687 0711 fax http www barebones com Sales information sales barebones com Technical suppor
23. eo BBEdit Preferences These settings establish the defaults for spell checking Revert Save Application 9 Built in Browser Display us Diffareneas Dictionaries Editor Defaults American Dictionary Enable File Filters British Dictionary 34 File Search Biblical Dictionary File Types Dutch Dictionary Fonts French Dictionary FTP Settings dn Function Popup Legal Dictionary Glossary Legal Secretary Dictionary HTML Colors Medical Dictionary HTML Markup Name Dictionary HTML Palette Pharmaceutical Dictionary HTML Preview HTML Tools Word Services HTML Web Sites O EE Languages none selected Choose Software Update Spelling Startup State Status Bar Text Colors 1 2 Make sure the Built In option is selected 3 Select a dictionary and click the Enable button To stop using a dictionary select it in the list and click Disable Editing the User Dictionary When you use the Add button in the Check Spelling dialog box to add the questioned word to your personal dictionary the spelling checker adds it to the User Dictionary file in the BBEdit Preferences folder While the Add button is adequate for adding a few words it would be tedious to use this option to add dozens or hundreds of words to the User Dictionary Thus the User Dictionary is stored as a BBEdit text file that you can edit yourself The file begins with a magic number that lets the spelling checker verify that th
24. grep search and replace multi file search sophisticated text transformations intelligent text coloring and other features not usually found or missed in word processors BBEdit also has features that make it easier to edit specific kinds of text such as source files for programming languages and HTML Hypertext Markup Language files for the World Wide Web In fact since the rise of the Web BBEdit has become the tool of choice for Macintosh Web designers who need more flexibility than visual Web authoring tools can provide How Can I Use BBEdit Use BBEdit any time you need to create or edit Web pages source files or text documents of any kind Whether you need to find or change all the occurrences of some text in a set of files or modify or reformat large text files of any sort or quickly tweak a Web page BBEdit is the right tool for the job Working with Development Environments BBEdit found its initial following among the Macintosh programming community with its core development oriented tools Although we have added many features to BBEdit since its first incarnation this source editing functionality is as strong now as ever The Function pop up menu can parse many programming languages to give you quick access to functions defined in your files You can even integrate BBEdit with popular development environments including CodeWarrior MPW Projector and Perl or any other Unix scripting language on Mac OS X Chapter
25. out process Verify Contents Check this box to make sure the file you are checking out is the same file displayed in the document window Projector does this by checking out another copy comparing the two files and then deleting the copy Delete Obsolete Files Check this box to have files marked as obsolete in the Projector database deleted from the folder Put History in CKID Check this box to store the revision data in the document s ckid resource If this is done the Revision list will display a list of all revisions without having to check in the Projector database Don t Touch Mod Date Check this box to prevent Projector from updating the files modification date to today s date Checking Out Choose which files to check out e Latest Revisions fetches a copy of every file in the project which is newer than the corresponding local project Any new files which were added to the project since the last checkout will also be checked out Update Existing fetches a copy of every file in the project which is newer than the corresponding local project Any new files added to the project since the last checkout are not checked out Everything fetches a copy of the latest revision of every file in the project Find Lurkers Choose this command and BBEdit will ask you to select a folder BBEdit will produce a list of all the files which are currently checked out as writable MRO d or new in that folder recursively
26. Editor 54 253 Editor Defaults 155 File Filters 157 File Search 157 File Types 24 159 326 Index FTP Settings 160 Function Popup 161 253 Glossary 161 HTML Colors 162 HTML Markup 163 HTML Palette 164 HTML Preview 164 HTML Tools 165 HTML Web Site 166 Languages 168 Printing 40 Spelling 169 Startup 170 State 171 Status Bar 172 Text Colors 174 Text Editing 174 Text Encodings 176 Text Files Opening 177 Saving 179 Text Printing 179 Text Search 181 Tools 182 Windows 58 183 Prefix Suffix Lines plug in 282 preformatted text 203 Preprocess command 268 Print One Copy command 40 printing 40 Printing Options command 42 Process Lines Containing plug in 284 Project Builder 182 269 Projector 269 Projector button 50 pull down menus 3 Python scripts 256 Q QUOTATION tag 209 recording scripts 234 rectangular selection 52 Redo command 48 reflowing paragraphs 67 reformatting HTML 214 regular expressions see grep RELATIVE placeholder 310 Remove Line Breaks command 66 removing comments 215 repetition metacharacters 122 Replace 97 Replace amp Find Again command 97 102 113 Replace All 97 101 102 110 113 Replace command 112 replacing text 46 see also searching Return key 4 Reveal in Finder command 92 Reverse Lines plug in 286 Revision History command 273 Rewrap Quoted Text 62 Rez 64 rubber stamp 43 S SAMP tag 210 Save a Copy command 23 319 Save a Copy to FTP Server command 3
27. If you want to use a LINK tag to specify a relationship between this document and other documents an email address style sheet or other information about the document enter the desired information in this field If you use a template to create the HTML document the template must include the META and LINK placeholders to indicate the location at which this information should be inserted into the generated document Web Site This pop up menu displays the web sites defined in your HTML Web Sites preference panel allowing you to switch between them for the purpose of choosing a template to base the new document on The initial selection on opening the dialog is the default site designated in the HTML Web Sites preferences Template This pop up menu displays the templates specified in the Templates amp Includes folder associated with the selected web site in the HTML Web Sites preferences The names of template files must end with tmpl to be displayed in this menu Selecting a template other than Default will use the specified template to create a new document potentially ignoring some or all of the settings specified in this dialog File Addressing Many of the HTML tools require you to provide the pathname or URL of a file or folder such as to identify a base address style sheet or hypertext link Typically this is done with a File button for locating the desired file via an Open dialog together with a text field for di
28. Make Obsolete Marks the current document as obsolete in the Projector database BBEdit will close the document s editing window and move the associated file to the Trash Hold down the Shift key to choose a file instead of obsoleting the frontmost window s file Remove Projector Info Removes the CKID resource from the current file losing all embedded Projector state information and comments Hold the Shift key to choose a file instead of operating on the frontmost window Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Open Log File Opens the SourceServer log file or brings it to the front if it is already open Working with Projector SourceServer 277 278 Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools CHAPTER new in 7 0 new in 7 0 2 BBEdit Plug Ins BBEdit plug ins are code modules that enhance BBEdit s features and which appear within BBEdit itself in the Tools menu This chapter describes the basic plug ins that ship with BBEdit Other developers have also written many BBEdit plug ins some of which are included on the BBEdit CD ROM and many more are available from various web sites including our own If you would like to write your own plug ins for BBEdit please refer to the BBEdit Plug in Developer s Kit available from the Bare Bones Software web site In this chapter Usine BBEdIUPIupsIns 44 casi pes POE arre bue SERA ce rueda 279 Installing Plug Ins 280 e The Tools Menu and Floating Window
29. Options dialog box and the default name is the standard backup name as described at the beginning of this section Making Backups 39 40 Printing To print a document choose the Print command from the File menu BBEdit opens the standard system print dialog box for your currently selected printer Print Printer HP LaserJet 55i m Saved Settings Standard m Copies amp Pages m Copies If Collated Pages All O From 1 to 9999 If you are using Mac OS 9 the print dialog might look like this EPSON sasse 9 MAAE Prine _ Copies iss Pages amp All Q m ini r Current Settings n i Media Type eor G portrai No Watermark Mode tx Print Layout None amp Automatic Quality d BK Normal 360dpi O Custom x MicroWeave On d amp High Speed On Dust es By Color Adjustment 1 Courier 10 4 spaces per tab O Use Document s Font Monaco 9 4 spaces per tab O Fractional Widths C Print Selection Only Note that the exact appearance and layout of options in the print dialog will vary depending on what printer you are using With current versions of the LaserWriter driver or in the Mac OS X print dialog for instance the BBEdit specific printing options are on a page of their own where they can be selected by a pop up menu at the top of the dialog The result
30. Projector does this by checking out another copy comparing the two files and then deleting the copy Check In Folder Allows you to check in an entire folder of files at once You are first prompted for the folder that contains the files you want to check in Then a folder browser like the one below appears showing all the files in that folder and its subfolders Check In Folder Select Files or Folders to Check In Y T Simple Text E AboutBax c AboutBax h CI AGFile h AGFileLib xcaff AppleGusde lue xcoff BuidFile D c template E CarbonLibPrefix h E CarbonPrefix h E ChangeLog E Chpboard c Chipboard h Customlnfa plist E DumpCompile c GxFile c 274 Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Select the file or files to be checked in you can select multiple files by holding Shift or Command while you click or press Command A to select all listed files Then click the Check In button If you have selected one file the Check In dialog discussed on page 270 appears to allow you to set the check in options If more than one file is selected the Batch Check In Options dialog next page appears The bottom part of the Batch Check In Options dialog offers essentially the same functionality as is found in the Check In dialog The top of the Batch Check In Options dialog controls how the check in comments for these files are set You can choose to use the comment in the file s ckid res
31. Show Status Bar 172 Show Philip Bar 172 Show Tab Stops 172 Show Line Numbers 172 Show Cursor Position 172 Show Current Function 172 Function Popup 172 Text Options 172 Markers 173 File Options 173 Insert Menu 173 File Path 173 Get Info Icon 173 Super Get Info Icon 173 Document Icon 173 Show All Hide All 173 Button Puffiness 173 Text Colors Prefereriees aes ves eH bp tire sera Mrs 174 Text Editirie Preferences 2o eU eating aes Pedes 174 Enable Shift Delete for Forward Delete 174 Use Numeric Keypad for Cursor Movement 174 Allow Single Click Line Selection 175 Double Click to Balance 175 Confirm Non Undoable Editing Actions 175 Use Hard Line Numbering in Soft Wrapped Views 175 Use Emacs Key Bindings 175 Exchange Command and Option Key Behavior 176 Extra Space in Text Views 176 Allow Text Smoothing 176 Enable Unicode Input 176 Text Encodes Preferences 12er n rte bane e oo mod seta 176 Text Files Opening Preferences 5s te ERR a Rees 177 Translate Line Breaks 177 If a File s Type Is Unknown 177 Link File s Encoding to HTML XHTML Character Set 178 If the File s Encoding Can t Be Guessed use 178 Warn of Malformed UTF 8 Files 178 Table of Contents Chapter 11 Text Files baving Preferences 2c mcer RR pe eh 179 Force New Line at End 179 Default Line Breaks 179 Make Back
32. The following table explains what each of the buttons does This button Does this Find Finds the first occurrence of the text in the active window Shortcut Cmd F Find All Finds all the occurrences of the search string and displays the results in a search results window Shortcut Cmd Opt F Replace If there is a selection replaces the current selection with the replace string Otherwise finds the first occurrence of the text in the active window after the current insertion point and replaces it with the replace string Shortcut Cmd R Replace All Replaces every occurrence of the search string in the active window with the replace string Shortcut Cmd Opt R Don t Find Saves the settings of the Find amp Replace dialog without doing a search Shortcut Cmd D Cancel Does not do the search and restores the settings of the dialog box to their previous state Shortcut Cmd BBEdit closes the Find amp Replace dialog and then selects the search string in the active window if the search was successful Once BBEdit finds your text you can use the commands in the Search menu see Search Menu Reference later in this chapter The table below summarizes the most common commands you can use at this point This command Does this Find Again Finds the next occurrence of the search string without displaying the Find amp Replace dialog again To reverse the search direction hold down Shift Replace Replaces the s
33. Using Unix Scripts on Mac OS X When running on Mac OS X BBEdit works with the native Unix Perl tool Starting with version 6 5 BBEdit supports similar integration with Python shell scripts and any other Unix scripting language The default Mac OS X installation includes Perl and several Unix shells including tcsh and zsh If you are running Mac OS X 10 2 or later Python is now provided as part of the default installation However if you are running Mac OS X 10 1 5 you will need to install Python separately see the Python web site for download links and installation instructions Note that for integration with BBEdit you will need the Unix flavored version of Python for Mac OS X not the Carbonized version of MacPython http www python org BBEdit s Unix shell scripting features which encompass Perl Python shell and any other Unix scripting language are accessed via the new Shebang menu 1 Why Shebang Because executable Unix scripts traditionally start with the two character sequence 1 Some people pronounce these two characters hash bang others say sharp bang but the most common pronunciation is simply shebang The shebang line is the first line of the script and includes a Unix style path to the interpreter for the language for example usr bin perl or usr local bin python In particular BBEdit expects to find Python in usr bin usr local bin or sw bin If you have i
34. You can turn it back on again if you are willing to pay the price of slower performance on non accelerated displays or Mac OS X 10 1 x Enable Unicode Input In general you should leave this option on or else you will not be able to use the Mac OS X character palette nor will you be able to use Unicode keyboard layouts However some input methods most notably Japanese may generate the wrong character unless you turn off this option Text Encodings Preferences When opening documents BBEdit can now automatically recognize and appropriately handle files that use character set encodings other than Mac Roman even multi byte character sets The Text Encodings preferences let you choose which character set encodings appear in the pop up menus that list encodings These pop up menus are e The Read As pop up menu in the Open dialog e The Encoding pop up menu in the Options dialog within the Save dialog e The Encoding submenu of the status bar s File Options pop up menu 176 Chapter 10 Preferences Tip e The character set pop up menus in various HTML tools dialogs including the New HTML Document dialog e The encoding pop up menu in the Text Files Opening and Text Files Saving preferences panels To include an encoding in those menus select it and click Enable To remove it from those menus select it and click Disable To add all the encodings or remove all the encodings from the menus use the Enable All and Disable All b
35. any number of letters That is what this chapter is all about Grep is the name of a frequently used Unix command that searches using regular expressions the same type of search pattern used by BBEdit For this reason you will often see regular expressions called grep patterns as BBEdit does They re the same thing Recommended Books and Resources Mastering Regular Expressions 2nd Edition by Jeffrey E F Friedl O Reilly amp Associates 2002 ISBN 0 596 00289 0 Although it does not cover BBEdit s grep features specifically Mastering Regular Expressions is an outstanding resource for learning the how to of writing useful grep patterns and the new second edition is even better than the original BBEdit Talk The BBEdit Talk online mailing list covers a wide range of topics and questions about using BBEdit which frequently include searching and the use of grep patterns To subscribe to this list please visit the support section of our web site which offers the option to sign up http www barebones com support lists html BBEdit s grep engine is based on the PCRE library package which is open source software written by Philip Hazel and copyright 1997 2000 by the University of Cambridge England For details see ftp ftp csx cam ac uk pub software programming pcre 116 Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Note Writing Search Patterns This section explains how to create search patterns using BBEdit s grep syntax F
36. elements or none at all if the SPAN attribute is used You can specify the span of the column or group its desired width and its vertical and horizontal alignment Cells within this column group may inherit some or all of these attributes depending on the attributes of the individual lt TD gt or lt TH gt elements THead TFoot TBody These tags defines an optional table section element They are new in HTML 4 and can be used independently of the TH tag the latter indicates that particular cells should be displayed in a heading style usually displayed by browsers as boldface lt TH gt may be used anywhere in a table that a heading look is desired In contrast these three related tags define the logical divisions of a table Browsers might hold the table s header or footer fixed on the screen while scrolling a lengthy body up and down for instance All three tags allow you to select vertical and horizontal alignment which may be inherited by cells inside the element depending on the attributes of lt TR gt lt TD gt and TH tags Convert to Table This command provides a quick way to convert tab delimited or comma delimited lines of text to tables You must specify the delimiter to be used either tabs or commas and you can optionally have the entire first row of the table or the first cell of each row converted to TH rather than lt TD gt elements If One Cell Per Line is marked each cell will be placed on its
37. line in hard wrapped documents and these semantics now apply in soft wrapped documents as well The new display line element refers to a line of text as displayed on screen bounded by soft and or hard line breaks The startLine and endLine properties of a text object now always refer to the hard start and end of lines In other words if a text object crosses multiple soft wrapped lines the startLine and endLine properties will be the same The new startDisplayLine and endDisplayLine properties have been added to the text object class and they provide the startLine and endLine semantics for soft wrapped views from previous versions of BBEdit Documents vs Windows In versions of BBEdit prior to 6 0 the object classes document and window could be used interchangeably and generally had the same properties listed in the scripting dictionary This is no longer the case and this constitutes one of the biggest differences between the current version and pre 6 0 versions of BBEdit The class window now corresponds to a window on screen and thus the properties of the window class now refer strictly to properties of a window on screen If a document is associated with a window the document is accessed as the document property of the window document of window 1 The class document now refers to a document and as with a window the document s properties pertain strictly to the condition of a document that is something th
38. mm ih O I Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Note On Mac OS 9 the status bar display is toggled by the key icon in the top right corner of the window dh Status Bar um m b Last Saved 1 o SET EAM If the window contains a document that has been saved to disk the status bar contains the full path to the file and the last time the file was changed If the file has not been saved to disk the status bar displays New Document instead of the file name Windows in which the text view status bar is not adjacent to the window title bar for example disk browsers and search results no longer have a status bar control on Mac OS 9 or Mac OS X but do honor the global status bar preference and you can use the Text Options dialog to show and hide the status bar on a per window basis The icons on the status bar are indicators buttons and pop up menus that give you quick access to commonly used functions The following table explains each icon Icon Meaning A solid diamond indicates that the document has been modified A hollow diamond means only the state of the document window pa l yd position selection range scrolling position and so on has changed j The pencil icon indicates that the document can be modified If the yu pencil has a slash across it the document cannot be modified because the file is read only the disk is locked or the file is part of a source control system project
39. on the following page Many other BBEdit features can have keyboard shortcuts assigned as well Here s how to set them Feature Set Keys in Menu commands Set Menu Keys BBEdit menu on Mac OS X Edit menu on Mac OS 9 Plug ins Plug In Tools palette Glossary items Glossary palette Scripts Scripts palette Perl Unix filters and scripts Perl Unix Filters and Scripts palettes Stationery Stationery palette To display any of BBEdit s floating palette windows use the Palettes submenu in the Window menu 289 new in 7 0 2 Assigning Keys to Menu Commands You can assign your own keyboard shortcuts key equivalents to any of BBEdit s menu commands by choosing Set Menu Keys from the Edit menu on Mac OS 9 or the BBEdit Application menu on Mac OS X The Set Menu Keys dialog below appears Set Menu Keys BBEdit File Edit Text search Find Quick Search Find Again Find Again reverse Find Selection Find Selection reversa Enter Search String Enter Replace String Replace Replace All Replace amp Find Again Find in Next File Open All Matches Find amp Replace All Matches l Reset All Clear Set U eee To set the key equivalent for a menu command find it in the Set Menu Keys dialog click the Set button and type the desired keystroke To remove the key equivalent from the selected menu command click the Clear button Click the Reset All button to restore all key equivalent
40. option in the Status Bar preference panel you can click in the line number as well You can click and drag to select multiple lines double click to select an entire paragraph or double click and drag to select a range of paragraphs A checkbox in the Text Editing preferences labeled Allow Single Click Line Selection controls this behavior If the checkbox is turned off clicking in the left margin simply moves the insertion point to the beginning of the clicked line Rectangular Selection By holding down the Option key as you drag or holding down the Shift and Option keys while clicking you can select all text lying within a specified rectangular area You can then perform all of the normal editing operations on this rectangular selection such as Cut Copy Paste or drag and drop as well as text transformations such as Change Case Shift Left Shift Right Entab Detab Increase Quote Level Decrease Quote Level Strip Quotes and Zap Gremlins Rectangular selection and soft wrapping are mutually incompatible When soft wrapping is enabled dragging the mouse performs normal non rectangular selection even if the Option key is held down when there is a rectangular selection the Soft Wrap Text option is unavailable in the Text Options pop up menu and dialog box Arrow Keys You can use the arrow keys to move the insertion point right left up and down and augment these movements with the Command Option and Control keys
41. such as AppleScript editors development environments and Toolbox references Script Editor To set the script editor for use with the Open Script Editor command in the Script menu do one of the following e Click the Set button and select the script editor from the dialog box Drag the icon of the script editor to the path box The script editor setting is stored separately for Mac OS X and for Mac OS 9 This makes it easier to share one set of preferences on both operating systems without having to reset the script editor when switch booting Coding Tools These options let you select which development environments you plan to use with BBEdit They include BBEdit s built in HTML tools and a variety of programming packages including Project Builder Metrowerks CodeWarrior and Absoft Fortran as well as the Dreamweaver visual HTML editor from Macromedia On Mac OS 9 BBEdit can integrate with MacPerl on Mac OS X it can integrate with any Unix scripting tool such as Perl Python Ruby or shells MPW s SourceServer Projector is also supported as is CVS Concurrent Versions System on Mac OS X Turning off the tools you do not plan to use will allow BBEdit to start up faster In order to use BBEdit as an external editor for Project Builder you must have version 2 1 or later of Project Builder installed earlier versions of Project Builder do not incorporate external editor support The December 2002 Developer Tools CD ROM contai
42. 0 9 d M dollars and 2 3 5 6 4 dollars cents and 00000 cents Case Transformations Replace patterns can also change the case of the original text when using subpattern replacements The syntax is similar to Perl s specifically Modifier Effect Nu Make the next character uppercase NU Make all following characters uppercase until reaching another case specifier Nu NL X1 or NE l Make the next character lowercase NL Make all following characters lowercase until reaching another case specifier Nu NU NM or NE NE End case transformation opened by U or L Writing Replacement Patterns 129 130 Here are some examples to illustrate how case transformations can be used Given some text mumbo jumbo and the search pattern wt NW wt the following replace patterns will produce the following output U 1 E 2 3 MUMBO jumbo u 1 2 u 3 Mumbo Jumbo Note that case transformations also affect literal strings in the replace pattern U 1 2fred MUMBO FRED LMUMBLE 2 3 mUMBLE jumbo Finally note that VE is not necessary to close off a modifier if another modifier appears before an VE is encountered that modifier will take effect immediately NUfred Nuwilma FRED Wilma Examples The example patterns in this section describe some common character classes and shortcuts used for constructing grep patterns and addresses some common tasks that you might find useful in your work Matching Identifiers
43. 14 provides more information on how to set up BBEdit for this type of work Writing HTML Documents BBEdit is an ideal tool for preparing and editing HTML documents web pages In addition to many options for preparing text content such as wrapping case changes and searching BBEdit offers a powerful set of tools to make editing web pages easier The Tag Maker command speeds the creation of HTML tags while the Edit Tag option allows quick changes to existing markup and the HTML Tools palette makes dragging and dropping tags simple or lets you access commands with just a click Using BBEdit you can easily preview your work in most Macintosh Web browsers including iCab Internet Explorer Netscape Mozilla OmniWeb and Opera For more information on using the HTML Tools to create edit and preview Web pages see Chapter 11 Chapter 1 Welcome to BBEdit IMPORTANT Human Interface Notes BBEdit enhances the behavior of its menus and dialogs as described in this section Dynamic Menus Many of BBEdit s pull down menus are dynamic if you hold down the Shift or Option key while a menu is open you can see some of the items change The illustration below shows what the File menu looks like normally left and when you hold down the Option key right File File New P New Pp Open 360 Open 360 Open Hidden Open Hidden Open from FTP Server 0 Open from FTP Server 0 Open Selection 36D Reveal Selection C86
44. 280 The Set Key Button 280 Supplied PIupgesIne3 3 55 3 59 0 ERR Yet on gane Rear a OE e e b ae 3 281 Add Remove Line Numbers 281 Configure TeX Coloring 281 Convert to ASCII 281 Educate Quotes 282 Hex Dump 282 Prefix Suffix Lines 282 Process Duplicate Lines 283 Process Lines Containing 284 Salary Adjust 285 Sort Lines 285 Un Comment 286 Obsolete Plu Ins cc ao n IER eee t qo HC b fed dee 286 Third Party Plue isens i e cere dere eras e Sumit bead 286 Finding More Plug Ins 286 e Plug In Compatibility 286 Mac OS X Plug Ins 287 Using BBEdit Plug Ins To use a BBEdit plug in choose its name from the Tools menu All installed plug ins appear in that menu Some plug ins require that there be an active window or a selection range These tools may be dimmed when this condition is not met The Plug In Info command in the Apple menu on Mac OS 9 or the BBEdit menu on Mac OS X displays a window listing all installed plug ins and their version numbers The Help and Web Site buttons at the bottom of the window are enabled when there is online help or a Web page available respectively about the selected plug in The factory supplied plug ins are now contained within the BBEdit application Third party BBEdit plug ins are still stored in the Plug ins folder of the BBEdit Support folder See Plug Ins on page 13 279 Note new in 7 0 Installing Plug Ins To in
45. Additionally if the Use Unicode Line Breaks option is selected BBEdit will use Unicode line breaks by default for newly created or converted Unicode documents instead of the chosen platform specific line breaks Since many programs on Mac OS X use Unix line break conventions BBEdit now maintains separate settings for the two platforms The factory default settings are Macintosh for OS 9 and Unix for OS X Make Backups Before Saving Select this checkbox to tell BBEdit to make automatic backup copies of every file as you save it This preference setting establishes the defaults for newly created documents and for documents in which there are no saved backup settings If you prefer that BBEdit create backup files in the same folders that your documents are already saved in choose the option for Use Document s Folder This is the default setting If you prefer to save backups in a different folder choose the Use Folder setting instead You can click the Choose button to select the desired backup folder using a dialog or just drag the folder to the box Even if you do not set BBEdit to perform general backups here you can still set backup options for individual files by using the Backup Options command in the File menu Text Printing Preferences The Text Printing preferences control how BBEdit prints your documents Default for Page Setup The Page Setup button lets you set the default options for the Page Setup dialog box T
46. BBEdit for the development environments you plan to use the development tools communicate with BBEdit to report errors and changes in files You use the commands in the appropriate menu the Compiler menu or the MacPerl Shebang menu to send instructions to the development environment To switch to a development environment or to launch it if it is not running choose it from the appropriate menu When you choose the Compile command or any other command that causes files in the project to be recompiled the development environment temporarily becomes the active application If there are any compilation errors BBEdit creates a Compile Errors browser that you can use to examine the errors Switching Between Source and Header Files When you edit a C or C source file you can press Control Tab to switch to the corresponding header file and vice versa BBEdit uses the information in the Languages section of the Preferences window to determine whether a file is a source or header file The Application Switcher control panel on Mac OS 9 or the Dock on Mac OS X will intercept Command Tab keystrokes by default so the factory default mapping is now Control Tab In BBEdit 7 0 you can change this mapping using the Set Menu Keys command if you so desire Previous versions did not allow customization of this key equivalent BBEdit and the Unix Command Line This section describes BBEdit s facilities for interacting with the Unix command line
47. C C programming language 64 Cancel button 4 Cancel Check Out command 272 capitalize lines 62 sentences 61 words 61 CAPTION tag 204 Cascading Style Sheets 196 case sensitivity 98 case transformations 129 CENTER tag 202 changing case 61 character classes 120 character set encoding 25 27 85 176 178 318 321 Check In command 270 Check In Folder 274 Check Out command 271 Check Out Folder command 275 Check Spelling command 76 Check submenu 211 Check Syntax command 267 checking links 212 checking spelling 76 external spell checker 79 user dictionary 78 CITE tag 209 Clear command 4 46 Clear key 46 clearing a marker 70 client pull 201 client side image maps 208 client side scripts 201 202 208 Clipboard 47 clipboard 47 clipboard placeholder 226 clipboards multiple 47 Close Current Tag command 195 CODE tag 209 CodeWarrior 267 COL tag 204 COLGROUP tag 204 colored text 59 in HTML documents 200 Columnize plug in obsolete 286 Command and Option keys in document windows 53 Command key 5 command keys assigning to menu items 289 in dialogs 4 188 in menus 3 listing by default key 298 listing by menu 291 shortcuts 303 Command Period 4 comments removing 215 Compare Again command 114 Compare Revisions command 273 comparing files 73 multiple files 75 Compile command 253 267 compile errors Compile Errors browser 253 complex patterns 123 Concatenate plug in obsolete 286 Configure TeX Coloring plug in 281 c
48. Canceling Perl Operations While waiting for a MacPerl task to complete BBEdit will display a progress dialog If you need to cancel the operation you can switch to MacPerl and do so there the Perl task is canceled and the BBEdit task is then canceled as well BBEdit cannot cancel the task directly because there is no way to signal MacPerl to do so On Mac OS X the progress dialog for Unix scripting tasks has an enabled Cancel button and you can cancel the task directly from within BBEdit Since BBEdit must kill the spawned Perl or Python or shell process with a SIGINT any unflushed data in open filehandles including STDOUT and STDERR will be lost unless the script takes measures to prevent this Out of memory Conditions in MacPerl MacPerl will inconveniently run out of memory at times Sometimes it outputs a string to STDERR saying so and sometimes it does not What it does always do is report an error back via an Apple Event When this happens BBEdit will report a MacPerl error of type n wheren is the error number usually 2 This is not useful for performing specific diagnostics but at least you will know that something went wrong In the case of Perl filters the selection is not cleared when this happens Instead you receive an error message telling you that something went wrong in MacPerl Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Working with CVS BBEdit now has integrated support for CVS the Concurrent Versions Sy
49. Document Skeleton A hierarchical view with all non tag content removed e Don t Reorganize Allows normalizing of case quote and entity settings as well as encoding entities within attributes without otherwise changing the existing structure You can also have the Format command operate on the whole document or only the selection normalize the tags to uppercase or lowercase according to your settings in the HTML Tools preferences normalize quote marks around attributes and encode special characters or entities found in attributes If you choose the Format command with the ellipsis BBEdit displays a dialog allowing you to choose the formatting options If you choose the Format command without the ellipsis BBEdit uses the previous options Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Optimize This command reformats the document to use the absolute minimum of characters while remaining syntactically valid You will have difficulty editing your document in this format in fact if you do not have Soft Wrap turned on in the text options you might think most of your document has vanished because the command strips out all line breaks but rest assured that your document will appear the same in your browser as it always has Use one of the Format commands discussed above to put your page back into an editable format if you need to make changes This command also applies the various Cleaner tools automatically Translate This command allo
50. EFBBBF e byte swapped Since UTF 16 uses two bytes to represent each character this leaves the question of which of the two bytes comes first whether it is little endian or big endian By default BBEdit writes UTF 16 big endian the standard By choosing one of the byte swapped options you can write little endian files instead which some Windows software requires Files saved as Unicode from BBEdit are given a type of utxt the standard for Unicode text files on the Mac UTF 8 files are given a type of TEXT for compatibility with other applications however BBEdit will also recognize such files with type UTFS Opening Unicode Files When opening files BBEdit will ordinarily determine the format of a file based on its file type and content and automatically process Macintosh text Unicode and UTF 8 However some files are structured such that BBEdit is unable to correctly determine their format based on their type or contents The cases that we know of are e UTF 8 files whose type is TEXT and which lack a byte order mark If a UTF 8 file is of type TEXT but has a byte order mark it will be correctly interpreted as UTF 8 e Byte swapped Unicode files which were written without a byte order mark usually by broken Windows software Unicode files whose type is TEXT instead of the Macintosh standard utxt and which lack a byte order mark If a UTF 16 file lacks a BOM but is of
51. EU D Ee em TER bae a RS 8 Getting Started Thank you for selecting BBEdit the premier HTML and text editor for the Macintosh If you are new to BBEdit we recommend that you read at least Chapters 1 through 4 of this manual to familiarize yourself with the installation and basic operation of BBEdit You may also wish to read or preview any other chapters that cover features you frequently use After you have installed BBEdit the best way to learn it is to use it Complete online assistance is available from the Help menu If you have used earlier versions of BBEdit we recommend that you read at least Chapter 1 for an overview of significant changes in this version and Chapter 2 for information relevant to installation and upgrading If you are have been using BBEdit 7 0 and want to see what s new in the latest update please refer to Appendix D for an overview of recently added features 2 What Is BBEdit BBEdit is a high performance HTML and text editor Unlike a word processor which is designed for preparing printed pages a text editor focuses on providing a means of producing and changing content Thus BBEdit does not offer fancy formatting capabilities headers and footers graphics tools a thesaurus and other staples of feature laden office software Instead it focuses on helping you manipulate text in ways that word processors generally cannot In service of this goal BBEdit offers powerful regular expression based
52. English plenty even for many other languages but unworkable for ideographic languages with thousands of distinct characters So to support these languages one needs to use two bytes to store each character This means that all text display and manipulation features of all software have to be revised to support text in which characters are stored as more than one byte It also means that the computer has to provide some way for users to type text without requiring a keyboard with thousands of keys Starting with Mac OS 8 5 Apple included the ability to view text in all these different languages with the operating system this package was called Multilingual Internet Access and had to be custom installed With Mac OS 9 Apple began including all the available language kits with the OS as custom installations and Mac OS X installs international text support by default so now every Macintosh user either already has or can add this capability if they want it This only works in applications that support international text of course If your text editor assumes that every character fits in a single byte simple tasks like exchanging two adjacent characters can actually wreak havoc on two byte text BBEdit now fully supports editing and processing of left to right international text Right to left systems such as Hebrew and Arabic are not currently supported How Script Systems Work Apple uses the term script systems or just scripts to
53. Enter Search Replace String 112 Replace 112 Replace All 113 Replace amp Find Again 113 Find in Next File 113 Open All Matches 113 Find amp Replace All Matches 113 Go to Line 113 Go to Center Line 113 Go to Previous Next Error 113 Go to Previous Next Placeholder 113 Find Differences 114 Apply to New 114 Apply to Old 114 Compare Again 114 Find in Reference 114 Find Definition 114 95 96 Basic Searching and Replacing This section describes the basic steps for searching and replacing text in a window Later sections in this chapter cover more advanced techniques To search and replace text in the active window follow these steps 1 Choose Find from the Search menu BBEdit opens the Find amp Replace dialog box Find amp Replace Search For m 8 U Use Grep Patterns a PF a 531 Replace Start at Top Search Selection Only 4 Replace All C Wrap Around C Extend Selection n L5 h Back d mo R U Search Backwards E C Case Sensitive C Match Entire Words jqA Cancel Replace With a Multi File Search W Batch Find Exclude Matches pr A Tl un Folder m none selected Other Other m Options F DL m y lj Use File Filter current criteria zi l Edit For now disregard the bottom part of the dialog the Multi File
54. FTP Browser window see the next section for more information about FTP Browsers Alternatively you can double click an FTP clipping in a disk browser or drop one on BBEdit s icon in the Finder with the same results as just described Dragging the window proxy icon from an editing window corresponding to a file opened from an FTP server will create a clipping containing that file s URL Once you have selected a file and opened it BBEdit displays the file in a text editing window The status bar displays the URL of the FTP file not the pathname of the file on your hard drive as it does for local files The window path pop up menu in editing windows for files opened via FTP displays the file s path on the FTP server rather than the local path to the temporary file Choosing one of the items from the pop up menu will open a new FTP Browser window to the chosen directory When you open a file from an FTP server BBEdit downloads it raw in binary mode and then performs a standard line ending conversion on the downloaded file Opening from and Saving to FTP Servers 33 34 Note After you have edited a file opened from an FTP server pressing Command S or choosing Save from the File menu saves the new version back to the FTP server If you want to save the file in a different directory or under another name choose Save to FTP Server to open a dialog shown below that works much like the Open from FTP Server dialog Like a standard Sav
55. Includes Simple includes are appropriate for use situations where you want the inclusion to happen only once Once the file has been included however it cannot be changed in any automated fashion Since the bbinclude directive is replaced by the included text the Update tool cannot tell the included text is any different from any other text Includes become even more powerful however when you can update existing files to incorporate revised include text at a later date For example suppose you generate several dozen HTML documents using a template that uses an bbinclude directive to insert a standard footer containing your email address Later you change your email address After you change it in the footer document only new HTML files you create from the template will include your new address What you would really like to be able to do is update all the files you have already created to include the revised footer Include Files 311 IMPORTANT 312 Note Since this capability is needed primarily in web site maintenance BBEdit lets you embed the include directive in an HTML comment An end bbinclude comment is also required The included text is inserted between the two comment markers but the comments themselves remain in place The comments are not shown in the browser This is known as a persistent include A persistent include looks like this lt bbinclude footer html lt end bbinclude gt The fir
56. Line Breaks inserts a hard line break at the end of each line of text as displayed If there is any text selected only that text will have line breaks added otherwise line breaks will be added to the entire document See How BBEdit Wraps Text later in this chapter for more information Remove Line Breaks This command once named Unwrap removes carriage returns and spaces between groups of text Use this command to turn text that has hard line breaks into text that can be soft wrapped See How BBEdit Wraps Text later in this chapter for more information Rewrap Quoted Text This command rewraps hard wrapped text with Internet style quoting while retaining the quoting characters In Internet messages it is common to use the gt symbol to indicate that part of a message is quoted from a message that is being replied to As a message gets batted back and forth in a discussion the oldest bits of text will end up having several gt symbols in front of them Each line of text in the message has a carriage return at the end making rewrapping the text to a different width somewhat problematic This command causes BBEdit to first extract each chunk of quoted text that is successive lines of text with the same number of markers The markers are temporarily removed and BBEdit removes the hard line breaks in the text forming it into a soft wrapped paragraph The text is then hard wrapped according to the settings in the d
57. MacPerl Shebang menu or from the Scripts list palette The same options as for filters apply when running scripts hold down the Command key while double clicking a script in the list or selecting it from the menu to open the Run Options dialog hold down the Option key while double clicking on a script or selecting it from the menu to open the file for editing instead of running it Additional Notes In addition to the features detailed above there are some additional considerations about BBEdit s Perl integration which it may help you to be aware of Setting Menu Keys for Filters and Scripts The Filters and Scripts lists both have a Set Key button at the top of their palettes Select a filter or script from the list and click this button to set a keyboard shortcut for the selected item Manually Sorting the Filter and Script Lists By default items in the Perl Filters List are displayed in alphabetical order However you can force them to appear in any desired order by including any two characters followed by a right parenthesis at the beginning of their name For example 00 Foo would sort before 01 Bar For such files the first three characters are not displayed in BBEdit You can also insert a divider by including an empty folder whose name ends with the string The folder can be named anything so it sorts where you want it These conventions are the same as those used by the utilities FinderPop and OtherMenu
58. Main HTML Tools Palette This list allows you to select which buttons are displayed on the palette You can select a series of buttons by Shift clicking their names in the display area or a discontinuous group of buttons by Command clicking each button name After you make a selection click Show or Hide to mark or unmark the selected buttons HTML Preview Preferences The HTML Preview preferences tell BBEdit how you prefer to preview HTML documents Chapter 10 Preferences Note IMPORTANT new in 7 0 When Previewing Files with Unsaved Changes Choose to preview files with unsaved changes by saving the changes to a temporary file by saving the current file just before previewing it or by asking whether to save the file If you have set the Ask option and choose Save when prompted the file will be saved and then previewed if you choose Don t Save the file will be previewed from disk without any unsaved changes Web Browsers Available for Preview This list displays all Web browsers known to BBEdit Browsers are shown by name and version number in the same form in which they will appear in the Preview With submenu of the Markup menu On Mac OS X browsers that will invoke the Classic environment when launched are further labeled Classic Unlike previous versions of BBEdit which specified groups of web browsers based on their creator signatures for example MSIE to include all versions of Internet Explorer the
59. Microsoft User Data gt T Mail p im Movies p amp Music I gt myData m T D New Folder Add to Favorites T NS C Save as Stationery Options f Cancel xl On Mac OS 9 Save BBEdit Examples Date Modified i Ch CompositeClassDriver 9 26 1999 Ch KeyboardModule 5 10 2000 Ch Mouselodule 107471999 Ch PrinterClassDriver 107471999 Ch Universal Module 972071999 Ch USBRey pad 107471999 Ch USB Modem 107571999 M Mame untitled O Save as Stationery fe sme i 2 Give the file a name 3 Change any desired options see below 4 Click Save to save the file 22 Chapter 3 Working with Files new in 7 0 2 You can also create a new document from the selected text in any open window with BBEdit s contextual menu Simply Control click the selected text and choose New with selection or Save Selection from the menu that appears Depending on which command you choose BBEdit will either create a new editing window containing the selected text or display the Save dialog and allow you to create a new file containing the selected text The new file will use the same options see File Saving Options below as those of the original parent document If you want to save a copy of a file using the currently selected text as the file name hold down the Option key and choose Save As Selection from the File menu BBEdit displays the Save dialog with the selected t
60. Musciano Bill Kennedy O Reilly and Associates 2000 ISBN 0 59600 026 X HTML Stylesheet Sourcebook Ian Graham Wiley and Sons 1997 ISBN 0 47119 664 9 Recommended Online Resources HTML Help by The Web Design Group http www htmlhelp com Apple Internet Developer info http developer apple com internet The Yale C AIM WWW Style Manual http info med yale edu caim manual contents html The Bare Bones Guide to HTML by Kevin Werbach no relation to Bare Bones Software http werbach com barebones The W3 Consortium site http www w3 org evolt org Browser Archive http browsers evolt org WebReference com by Mecklermedia http www webreference com WebMonkey by Wired Digital http www webmonkey com DevEdge by Netscape http developer netscape com Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools SGML Resources HTML is an application of SGML and shares many concepts and characteristics with it You do not need to know SGML to create Web pages but you may find that studying it improves your understanding of some HTML issues What is SGML and why should I use it by the SGML Project http www oasis open org cover exetwhat html SGML on the Web by Softquad Inc http www ncsa uiuc edu SDG Software Mosaic WebSGML html What You Need Before you start make sure you have the following available e A modern Web browser for previewing your pages We suggest having at least one version each of Microsoft Internet Exp
61. OSA script can be saved in what s called a compiled script file A compiled script file contains the actual Apple Events by generating these events when you save the file the OSA language does not have to convert your English like commands into events each time you run the script which means it loads faster When double clicked in the Finder a compiled script file automatically opens in the Script Editor where it can be run A AppleScript Overview 231 232 script can also be saved as a stand alone application or applet in which case double clicking the script s Finder icon automatically runs the script Both types of files can be saved with or without the English like source code if you save it without the source code other users you give the script to will not be able to make any changes to it of course you should also keep a copy of the script with the source for yourself Using Scripts with Applications Although you can place a script applet in your Apple menu or on your Finder desktop and use it any time you need it many applications including BBEdit provide a special menu that lets you launch compiled scripts intended specifically for use with that one application Since you do not have to save them as applets they take up less disk space and launch more quickly They also show up only in the application you use them with rather than cluttering your Apple menu Some applications go even further allowing you to define sc
62. Page cleaner BBEdit Dictionary Class text window A text editing window Plural form a text windows Propertes lt inheritance gt window fumer ae ae Saeed Sao fhe daa bout display font string 2 42 eae fee gig display font size small integer naf acm nb impe fax display font style alistof plain bald italic autline shadow underline canden fa ofa areimmape fart tab width small integer 2525 ob mum une dab auto indent boolean sse asset asas auto balance boolean 4 gsfo Aa ayx eae smart quotes boolean 3 9 X0 Ea mam show invisibles boolean 3 9 r CA Ug expand tabs boolean ss siiRSGGgm n4 dud md soft wrap text boolean c adha GE fee saa OG soft wrap mode Philip bar window width character width Ace oe eee i AAE A NT soft wrap width small integer Aant gA OAR NT der rer sever Pre asa CAS ner nag show spaces boolean ae apaces spas peur fou Sine forse Ug noe show status bar boolean cm 5 mme imu E3649 FW Lye show philip bar boolean cu DE Am fae A MG iege show tab stops boolean Jawap fe ia 40 59 Scag SIS gs show cursor position boolean Jmm DOE CUSA ARX g Pn ier mens show function position boolean savage Poe aue or Fg Fiet a casts Saag show line numbers boolean umi 5m Aaa si fe fee se fee ym T a calar syntar boolean Bog m guy em vw um Fr Sev mes Y 4 L You can see that a text window inherits all the properties of the window class And since the window clas
63. Quotes Ignore Spaces U Leading U Trailing H Runs Multi File Compare List Identical Files vl On y List Text Files AIO 1 Folders Lun Flatten Hierarchies v Compare Prajector states f Edit Use File Filter current criteria 2 Click the Files radio button 3 Use the New and Old pop up menus to select the files you want to compare If the files you want to compare are already open they will appear in the pop up menus otherwise you can select them by clicking the Other button next to one of the pop up menus or by dragging the files icons from the Finder into the New and Old boxes in the Find Differences dialog You can also select recently opened files from the Recent Files item on the pop up menu The terms new and old are used for convenience since most often you will want to compare the changes in the same file across time However the Find Differences command can be used to compare any two files 4 Select the Compare options that apply When the Case Sensitive option is selected BBEdit distinguishes uppercase from lowercase letters deselect this option if you want BBEdit to consider uppercase and lowercase letters the same Comparing Text Files 73 74 Tip Note When Ignore Curly Quotes is selected BBEdit treats typographers quotes the same as straight quotes When one of the Ignore Spaces options is selected BBEdit ignores any tabs and spaces at the beginning or end of lines Le
64. Search results File and line number of each match Error results or File line number and status message for each general results condition You can open both files and folders from the list pane When you double click a folder name BBEdit replaces the file list pane with the contents of the folder When you double click a file name BBEdit opens the file in an editing window If the file list pane also included a line number BBEdit scrolls to that line 145 146 Controls above the list may allow you to determine what kinds of items are displayed in the list For example in disk browsers there is a pop up menu that lets you choose to display text files all files or other types of files and another that lets you return the browser to a parent directory of the current folder In error browsers checkboxes allow you to hide or show all errors warnings or notes For results browsers BBEdit can either show an error hierarchy where all the errors associated with a particular file are grouped under that file using disclosure triangles similar to those in the Finder s list views to reveal or hide the error list or a flat listing showing each individual error encountered on a separate line You can choose which of these display methods to use by default in the Browser Display preferences To remove items from the display list select them and press the Delete key or choose Clear from the Edit menu Status Bar The browser status bar
65. The Set Key button in the Glossary window lets you assign key equivalents for easy access to frequently used glossary items To assign a key to a glossary item 1 Select the item in the Glossary window 2 Click the Set Key button to display the Set Key dialog Set Key Keystroke for Current Date amp Time Reset no keystroke defined 3 Type the key equivalent You can use any combination of the Command Shift Option and Control keys in the key equivalent provided that it must use at least the Command or Control key to be valid You can also use function keys with or without additional modifiers 4 Click OK Note If you try to assign a key equivalent that is already used elsewhere BBEdit warns you that there is a conflict and asks you whether you want to reassign that key equivalent to the new item Assigning Key Equivalents to Glossary Items 225 226 To remove a key equivalent from a glossary item 1 Select the item in the Glossary window 2 Click the Set Key button to display the Set Key dialog 3 Click Reset then OK Glossary Substitutions When you insert a glossary item containing a placeholder into an editing window BBEdit replaces the placeholder with appropriate substitution text This is similar to the operation of BBEdit s HTML Templates and Update features The following table shows the placeholders you can use in a glossary item Placeholder Replaced by BASENAME The name of the file strippe
66. The two Above Beneath Compared Files radio buttons let you choose whether the differences window should be above or below the windows of the items you are comparing Arrange Windows You can specify whether differences windows are arranged left to right or top to bottom using the Arrange Windows radio buttons Previously BBEdit always arranged differences windows left to right Multi File Differences When comparing multiple files the Show File Icons checkbox determines whether the files Finder icons are shown in the Differences window Editor Defaults Preferences The Editor Defaults preferences control the behavior of newly created document windows and documents without saved state information Many of the preferences in this panel are the same as those in the Text Options dialog and in the Text Options pop up menu left in the status bar The difference is that the text options control the behavior of the active window while the Editor Defaults preferences control the behavior of new windows Many of the keyboard behavior settings formerly located in this panel have moved to the Text Editing panel Auto Indent When this option is selected pressing the Return key in new windows automatically inserts spaces or tabs to indent the new line to the same level as the previous line Differences Preferences 155 156 Tip Tip Note Note To temporarily invert the sense of the Auto Indent option while typing hold down th
67. align line height text transform word spacing letter spacing and white space Text Selector BODY Text Indent Line Height 1 5em Alignment Default m Word Spacing 3 39 39 Vertical Align a Letter Spacing Transformation Default m White Space Default m Decoration 1 None H Strike C Underline 1 Blink 1 Overline Cancel E Apply 3 Body Properties This submenu allows you to edit attributes of the BODY tag in the current document including the background image background color text color link color active link color and visited link color You can specify the background image by typing or by clicking the File button Link background and text colors are chosen from the 216 color Web safe palette that appears when you click one of the color swatches Option clicking a color swatch will bring up the system color picker so you can select colors that are not in the Web safe palette Head Elements This submenu allows you to add tags that are valid in the document s head The tag is inserted at the current insertion point even if the insertion point is not a contextually valid location for the tag Base The BASE tag determines the default location of documents referenced in the current document You will be prompted to enter the Href the document or folder that all relative links in the document should be considered relative to You can enter the Href by typing it into the supplied field
68. also supports multiple Redos If you have not made any changes after performing an Undo you can redo each action in order by choosing that Redo command from the Edit menu or typing Command Shift Z However once you perform a new action you cannot redo any actions that you undid before you made that change Window Anatomy BBEdit windows have the same controls you are familiar with from other Macintosh applications for example windows are resizable and zoomable and have both vertical and horizontal scroll bars Two additional features which may be less familiar are the status bar and the split bar As described later in the section Text Options BBEdit windows may have additional elements if you choose the Show Line Numbers and Show Cursor Position options The Status Bar The status bar is a panel at the top of editing windows containing buttons and pop up menus that let you work with the text in the window On Mac OS X the status bar display is toggled by the button in the top right corner of the window as shown below eos E index html Fre 3 Last Saved 10 06 01 08 19 28 PM L1 File Path 7 esrezsdmiDasetog nda Noni IDOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC WSEZZDTD HTML 4 HL ENM http www ws Jorge TR 1999 REC htm L461 19991224 strict dtd Artin l lt head gt tit les BBEdit Secretae tit le lt meta name generator content BBEdit 5 5 lt style type text css gt lt l import additional css
69. and setting the Lock option BBEdit will not preserve clipboard contents across runs File Filters BBEdit stores user defined file filter patterns in this file which is located in your active BBEdit Preferences folder BBEdit Grep Patterns BBEdit stores user defined search patterns in this text file which is located in your active BBEdit Preferences folder If you have added any custom grep patterns to a previous version of BBEdit you can replace the default file created by BBEdit with your customized version Also if you use a substantial number of custom patterns we recommend that you maintain a backup copy of this file 16 Chapter 2 Installing BBEdit Note Note Recent Files amp Favorites This folder contains aliases to the most recent local files that you have opened or FTP clippings for any files opened from FTP servers The items stored in this folder are used to create the Open Recent list in BBEdit s File menu or in the Find Differences file lists To set the number of items shown in the Open Recent list use the Remember the most recently used items option on the Application panel of the Preferences window You may lock items in this folder to have them persist as Favorites To do this open the Recent File amp Favorites folder and use the Finder s Get Info command to open an info window for each item alias you wish to lock then turn on the Locked option Locked items will be displayed at the bottom of th
70. are explained in the next section Other Positional Assertions BBEdit s grep engine supports additional positional assertions very similar to and Escape Matches NA only at the beginning of the document as opposed to which matches at the beginning of the document and also at the beginning of each line b any word boundary defined as any position between a w character and a W character in either order B any position that is not a word boundary Z at the end of the document as opposed to which matches at the end of the document and also at the end of each line Z at the end of the document or before a trailing return at the end of the doc if there is one Examples the text matched by the pattern is underlined bfoo b bar foo bar foo bar Will not match foobar Search for Will match Will match Search for Will match Will match Search for Will match bJane b Jane s Tell Jane about the monkey NAfoo foobar Will not match This is good foo Writing Search Patterns 119 120 Character Classes Match Sets or Ranges of Characters The character class construct lets you specify a set or a range of characters to match or to ignore A character class is constructed by placing a pair of square brackets around the group or range of characters you wish to include To exclude or ignore all characters specified by a character class add a caret character just after the open
71. are provided by the AREA tags inserted between the MAP and lt MAP gt tags Area This tag defines a clickable area within a client side image map Each clickable area requires a separate lt AREA gt tag You will need to specify the document to be loaded when the area is clicked or mark the No HREF checkbox to cause clicks in the area to be ignored along with its Target frame if the page is being used in a frameset You can choose the desired map shape rectangular circular polygonal or the default URL using the Shape pop up menu and enter the desired coordinates of the shape in a comma separated list in the Coords field For rectangles this is in the order left top right bottom for circles it is in the order X Y radius For polygons this should be a comma separated list of coordinates in X Y form You can also set the tab index of the field for keyboard control on browsers that support it JavaScript onFocus and onBlur handlers are also supported Convert to Client Side Map This command converts the selected text which should be a server side image map file in NCSA server format to a client side image map You must specify a name for the converted imagemap Break This command enters a line break tag BR into the document If multiple lines are selected a line break tag will be inserted after each Font This tag selects the font size and or color for the selected text This tag is deprecated and should
72. at the class itself each individual window object has all these properties After a tag line that tells you about the class an open window comes the plural form AppleScript lets you refer to windows either singly or as a group so it needs to know what the plural of every term is For example try this little script tell application BBEdit 7 0 to count windows The result of this script is the total number of window objects currently displayed by BBEdit After the plural form comes a list of properties Some objects do not have properties for example a string but many applications do An object s properties are merely a collection of data that describes that particular object For example as you look down the list of window properties you will see that every window has a name every window has a position every window has bounds the area of the screen it covers and so on Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit The first item on the list though is inheritance item This tells you that a window is a kind of item and that it therefore has all the properties of an item Take a quick look at item s class definition shown below 808 BBEdit Dictionary BBEdit Suite add line breaks change case compare decrement quote level detab entab find grep substitution hard wrap increment quote level insert glossary entry remove line breaks replace rewrap quoted text shift strip quotes mi inum application abou
73. available on the December 2002 Developer Tools CD ROM Working with Projector SourceServer MPW is the Macintosh Programmer s Workshop Apple s development environment for use with Mac OS 9 or earlier system versions The complete MPW package can be downloaded at no cost from Apple s developer web site MPW ToolZone http developer apple com tools mpw tools You can use BBEdit to edit source files that are being managed by Projector the database backed source control system integrated into the MPW Shell To get the most out of this capability you should already be familiar with MPW s source management functions Projector is also available in a stand alone MPW application called SourceServer for those who do not want to run the whole MPW Shell for this functionality Either method works seamlessly with BBEdit via the Projector pull down menu identified by the icon shown at left Before you start make sure SourceServer support is enabled in the Tools preference panel In versions of BBEdit prior to 5 1 you had to mark a checkbox when opening a file or in the Preferences to have BBEdit recognize Projector information attached to a file BBEdit now always recognizes Projector state information and this feature cannot be disabled Since Projector is only available for Mac OS 9 you can run it on Mac OS X only under the Classic environment BBEdit no longer supports ToolServer the MPW back end that runs scripts and MPW tools Wor
74. browser list now includes all individual browser applications available For example if you have both Netscape 4 7 5 and 6 2 1 on your hard disk both applications will be listed in the preferences and available for previewing You can use the Add Remove and Change buttons respectively to add or delete a browser from the list or update an entry by choosing a different version of the application The Remove button does not delete a browser from your hard disk but only removes its entry from the preview list The Find All button finds all available Web browsers that BBEdit recognizes and adds them to the list if they are not already there If using this button does not add a browser which you know is available you can add it directly with the Add button Sometimes the system may not properly advise BBEdit of every browser which is present HTML Tools Preferences The HTML Tools preferences set options for the HTML Tools HTML Updater Mark the Preserve File Dates checkbox to have modification dates remain unchanged when updating HTML files using the Update Tool Syntax Checker Warnings You can have the HTML Syntax Checker warn you when an HTML element is implicitly closed Examples of these sorts of tags are lt P gt and lt LI gt The closing tags for these elements are optional in some HTML specifications If this checkbox is marked BBEdit will warn you if it detects that you omitted the closing tag Link Checker Warnings
75. byte text It is unlikely that you will crash the program but your text may be corrupted or scrambled 286 Chapter 15 BBEdit Plug Ins IMPORTANT Mac OS X Plug Ins When running on Mac OS X you will not be able to use any third party plug ins which have not been specifically updated for Mac OS X compatibility Contact the developers of your plug ins or visit the Bare Bones Software web site see below for more information on the availability of updated plug ins http www barebones com support bbedit plugin library shtml Third Party Plug Ins 287 288 Chapter 15 BBEdit Plug Ins APPENDIX Command Reference This appendix provides a quick reference for key assignments and a comprehensive list of the commands that are available from BBEdit s user interface In this appendix Keyboard Shortcuts for Commands ost tse bod dE EI PEE 289 Assigning Keys to Menu Commands xa 4 s RISE ORE UC ER oe es 290 Available Key Combinations 290 Listing by Menu and Command NaMe ois vy RE oo eae ads 291 Listing by Default Key Equivalents 49 LER EO EE RS ER LENS 298 Keyboard Shortcuts for Commands Many of BBEdit s commands have pre defined keyboard shortcuts BBEdit also lets you reassign the shortcuts for any menu command glossary entry plug in or script to suit your own way of working To change the keyboard shortcut for any menu command you can use the Set Menu Keys command See Assigning Keys to Menu Commands
76. choose a BBEdit 5 0 or 5 1 preferences file if one is in the Preferences folder of your active system BBEdit will automatically select that directory BBEdit will read in the FTP bookmarks from the indicated file add them to your current bookmark list and sort the list again If you have the Preferences window open you will not be able to add bookmarks in the Open From Save To FTP Server dialogs To work around this close the Preferences window before using the FTP dialogs to add new bookmarks Function Popup Preferences The Function Popup preferences control how the Function pop up menu left in the status bar behaves Show Includes When this option is selected the Function pop up menu includes the files named in include directives Function Popup Preferences 161 162 Sort Items by Name When this option is selected the items in the Function pop up menu are sorted by name Otherwise items in the pop up menu appear in the same order as they appear in the file Show Function Prototypes When this option is selected the Function pop up menu includes the names of function prototypes as well as the function definitions Otherwise the pop up menu does not include entries for function prototypes Glossary Preferences The Glossary preferences determine how BBEdit handles glossary entries Ignore Trailing CR Click Ignore Trailing CR to have BBEdit strip off all white space from the end of a glossary entry when insert
77. continue to work with the original file See Saving a Copy of a File on page 23 for more details New Menu Key Combinations The Help Home End Page Up and Page Down keys can now be used in menu key combinations as well The Help key can be assigned without modifiers the others must be used in combination with at least either the Command or Control key See Available Key Combinations on page 290 for details on setting menu keys CVS Export Project The new Export Project command allows you to create a copy of any CVS project at the selected location See Export Project on page 267 for additional details Unix Script Support for Include Files You can now use scripts written in any Unix scripting language that can be run from the Shebang menu with BBEdit s include file mechanism Appendix C covers the use of include files BBEdit 7 0 2 319 BBEdit 7 0 1 BBEdit 7 0 1 was a maintenance update released in November 2002 to resolve issues reported with the initial 7 0 release This update did not incorporate any additional features For details on other changes made please refer to the archived BBEdit release notes on our web site http www barebones com support bbedit archived notes shtml 320 Appendix D Changes Since 7 0 Index A A anchor tag 206 ABBR tag 209 Absoft Fortran 182 active windows 46 ActiveX controls 207 Add amp Compile command 268 Add command 268 Add Remove Line Numbers plug
78. document 1 repeat with i in theLines do stuff here end repeat More Memory When running scripts that work with large chunks of data you may need to increase BBEdit s memory allocation When BBEdit runs a script the script and its data are held in BBEdit s application memory partition Moving Scripts from Pre 6 0 Versions of BBEdit As mentioned earlier BBEdit s scripting model changed significantly as of version 6 0 Consequently some of your older scripts may need to be revised in order to work properly This section provides a high level overview of BBEdit s scripting model that will where appropriate contrast the current scripting framework against older versions of BBEdit This will suggest how you can modify your existing scripts for compatibility Because the scripting dictionary is always changing it should be considered the definitive reference in situations where it and this document differ We have found Script Debugger from Late Night Software to be an excellent tool for browsing and navigating BBEdit s scripting dictionary You can find out more at http www latenightsw com BBEdit and AppleScript 241 242 Lines and Display lines Starting with BBEdit 6 1 the line element refers to a hard line that is a stream of characters that begins at the start of file or after a line break and which ends at the end of file or immediately before a line break This is consistent with the previous semantics of
79. files are downloaded from remote hosts and often do not have correct file types but you know that they are always text you can select Assume It s Text Link File s Encoding to HTML XHTML Character Set When this option is selected BBEdit will use the character set specified in the appropriate HTML meta tag or XML declaration to determine a file s encoding when opening the file Also when this option is on changing an HTML or XML document s character set with the Character Set markup command will adjust the file s encoding to match as indicated on the Encoding submenu of the File Options popup in the status bar and changing the file s encoding will adjust the character set declaration if one exists This option is on by default When this option is off then BBEdit does not attempt to use the character set specified in the HTML meta tag or XML declaration but will follow the usual procedure for determining the file s character set See Choosing the Encoding for a Document on page 27 The only reason you might want to turn this option off is if you routinely put characters into your document that cannot be represented in the declared character set e g if you will be post processing the file by some other means which modifies these characters If the File s Encoding Can t Be Guessed use When opening documents BBEdit can now automatically recognize and appropriately handle files that use character set encodings other than Mac Ro
80. folder which have changed and any comment that you enter in the Message field will be applied to each file that is committed Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools You can select any recently accessed folder from the pop up menu or choose the Other entry to bring up an Open dialog allowing you to navigate to and choose any desired folder to commit You can also drag a folder from the Finder directly into the path box Commit Folder none selected Other B Message T t Cancel j OK Commit Parent Folder When you choose this command BBEdit will prompt you for a comment using the Commit Folder dialog and then commit all of the files contained in the parent folder of the current document just as if you had selected that folder and chosen the Commit Folder command If you do not need to enter a comment hold down the Shift key as you choose this command and BBEdit will commit the folder s files without displaying a dialog box Find Lurkers When you choose this command and select a folder in the Find Lurkers dialog BBEdit will check whether any files contained within that folder have uncommitted changes If there are any such files BBEdit will display a results browser containing a list of them You can select any recently accessed folder from the pop up menu or choose the Other entry to bring up an Open dialog allowing you to navigate to and choose any desired folder to commit You can also drag a folder from
81. gt lt a href oss CarbonEventManager carboneventmanager h tm L gt Carbon Event Manager lt a gt lt br gt 0 lt a href oss ErrorHandler errorhandler html gt Error Handler lt a gt lt br gt lt a href oss EventManager eventmanager htmL Event Manager lt a gt lt br gt lt a href oss Gestal tManager gestal tmanager htmL Gestalt Manager lt a gt lt br gt lt a href oss LowMemoryAccessors lLowmemoryaccessors html gt Low Memory Accessors lt a gt lt br gt lt a href oss MemoryManUti Li ties memorymanagementuti Lities html gt Memory Management Uti Lities lt a gt lt br gt Multi File Searching 101 The items at the top of the window tells you how many matches BBEdit found in the set of files you specified as well as specifying whether there were any error conditions or warnings generated during the search You can display or hide any combination of errors warnings and matches by checking the appropriate options The middle panel lists each line that contains the matched text Depending on how you have configured BBEdit this list may be a Finder style hierarchical list where each match in a file is listed under the file s name or a flat list where each occurrence is simply displayed in order Every match is identified by file name and line number To see the contents of a file click a line in the list of matched searches The part of the file that contains the search string appears in the lower pane Yo
82. hold down the Option key while pulling down the Window menu the Get Info command becomes Super Get Info This command provides integration with Super Get Info Bare Bones Software s Mac OS X file info utility If you choose it BBEdit will ask Super Get Info to open an info window on the file associated with the current editing window If the frontmost window is not an editing window or does not have an associated file on disk this command will be disabled The Super Get Info command is only available if e you are running on Mac OS X e you have Super Get Info installed on your computer Super Get Info is a utility designed to serve as a supplement for the Mac OS X Finder s Show Info command Super Get Info allows you to open more than one info window at a time view and edit the Macintosh type and creator codes associated with a file view and edit the Unix owner group and permission settings associated with a file or folder and much more For more information or to download a free demo version visit our web site http www barebones com products supergetinfo html Reveal in Finder If the active window is a document that is saved in a file the Reveal in Finder command opens the Finder window that contains this file Using this command is the same as clicking without dragging the document icon button in the status bar The actual icon in the icon bar is the same as the document s icon in the Finder Chapter 6 Working with Wi
83. in 281 ADDRESS tag 202 alternation 125 Anchor command 206 AppleScript 14 20 and searching 104 attaching scripts to menu items 248 in HTML documents 221 313 pitfalls 240 reading dictionary 236 recording 234 scripts menu 247 updating to BBEdit 6 241 APPLET tag 207 Application Preferences 153 Application Services 153 Apply to New command 114 Apply to Old command 114 AREA tag 208 Arrange command 91 arranging windows 91 arrow keys 304 ASCII conversion 281 ASCII table 88 attaching scripts to menu items 248 Auto Complete Glossary command 225 auto indent 57 automatic backups 39 B bold tag 210 backgrounds in HTML documents 200 backups 38 automatic 39 manual 39 backward searching 98 Balance Tags command 212 balancing parentheses 57 60 BASE tag 190 200 BASEFONT tag 208 basename placeholder 226 batch find 98 100 bbedit command line tool 31 256 BBEdit Glossary folder 12 BBEdit Scripts folder 14 BBEdit Startup Items folder 12 BBEdit state information 24 BBEdit Talk mailing list 116 BDO tag 209 bi directional override 209 BIG tag 210 Block Elements submenu 201 BLOCKQUOTE tag 202 BODY tag 200 bookmarks 32 BR tag 208 breakpoints 268 Bring Up To Date command 268 broken links 212 Browser Display Preferences 154 browser plug ins 207 browsers 145 differences 74 disk browser 146 errors 253 file list panel 148 search results 101 149 splitter 146 status bar 146 147 text panel 146 148 BUTTON tag 205
84. in file groups You can drag a URL text or clipping file to a file group window and the URL will be saved in the group If you subsequently open the item BBEdit will hand off the URL to designated helper or open it directly if it is an FTP URL To add folders to a file group drag them from the Finder into the file group window or click the Add Folder button BBEdit displays the following dialog Add Folder to Group nane selected IT h l Choose Rf Add Folder s Contents Folders amp Files Folders Only d Cancel D W Scan Nested Folders IB aai U Skip Folders Add You can click Choose to choose a folder using an Open dialog or just drag the desired folder to the white area from the Finder You can add both folders and files just files or just folders and you can choose to also add all nested folders and optionally to skip folders whose names are enclosed in parentheses When adding a folder to a file group with the Add button you can choose whether to add all of the folder s contents By choosing rot to add a folder s contents you can create a file group that consists only of folders which can be handy for navigating and searching project roots without worrying about keeping in sync with the folders contents Once you have added items to a file group you can save it to disk for later use Using File Groups To open a item in a file group double click it or select it and click the Open button If t
85. into their muscle memory See Appendix B Editing Shortcuts for a list of the Emacs commands BBEdit supports Text Editing Preferences Note new in 7 0 2 If you turn on the Display Status Window option a small floating window will appear when you type an Emacs shortcut indicating which command you have applied Exchange Command and Option Key Behavior These two checkboxes let you swap the meaning of the Option and Command keys when used with cursor navigation keys to move through a window s contents You can set this separately for horizontal and vertical cursor movement For details on using cursor navigation keys see Chapter 4 and Appendix B Extra Space in Text Views To have BBEdit leave extra empty space when you scroll to the end of a text view choose Half Window or Full Window here Allow Text Smoothing This option is available only on Mac OS X If turned on it allows the system to draw smoothed anti aliased text in text editing views otherwise text smoothing is suppressed which may make certain fonts and sizes more readable Prior to OS X 10 1 5 the text smoothing is done by QuickDraw in 10 1 5 or later it is done by Quartz Note that Quartz text smoothing may have no visible effect on some specific fonts and sizes for example Monaco 9 During initial configuration if you are running on Mac OS X and Quartz Extreme is not supported on all displays the Allow Text Smoothing preference will be turned off
86. is a gray line in the status bar that indicates the right edge of the usable viewing area on a 9 inch original Mac monitor and also corresponds to a width of 80 characters in the 9 point Monaco font See How BBEdit Wraps Text later in this chapter to learn how wrapping works in BBEdit Text Options 57 58 Language The Language menu lets you specify which source code language the file uses The file s language setting affects how BBEdit performs syntax coloring and parses function names for the function pop up menu BBEdit generally determines the file s language from its filename extension using the mapping table in the Languages panel of the Preferences window For example c files are C and m files are Objective C You can use this menu to override those settings for a specific file To quickly check the language for a file click the Text Options pop up menu in the status bar and look at the Languages item Display Options These options control the way BBEdit displays the text in the active document window Changes you make here affect only that window To change display characteristics for windows that you open in the future use the settings available in the Preferences window The Show Invisibles and Syntax coloring options are in the Editor Defaults panel The rest of the options are in the Status Bar panel Status Bar This option shows or hides the status bar in the active window When this option is selected two subop
87. is like the status bar in editing windows Some browsers have additional buttons and controls in the status area as well These standard items the pencil icon the Function Text Options Mark Path pop up menus and the Projector and Info buttons should already be familiar to you since they appear on BBEdit document windows by default See Window Anatomy in Chapter 4 for an explanation of these standard BBEdit functions Text View Pane When you click an item in the list pane BBEdit displays its contents in the text view pane If you click a folder BBEdit lists the names of the files in the folder If you click a file name BBEdit displays the contents of the file When the current focus is in the bottom pane the space bar acts like the Page Down key and Shift space acts as Page Up Splitter You can change the size of the file list pane or the text view pane by dragging the double line that separates them Double clicking on the splitter bar will collapse the text view pane completely and double clicking on it again in the bottom of the browser window will restore the text pane to its previous proportions Disk Browsers Use a disk browser to explore the contents of a disk or a folder without opening each file one at a time Chapter 9 Browsers Note To open a disk browser pull down the File menu and choose Disk Browser from the New submenu BBEdit opens a new disk browser that starts at the desktop eos Disk Bro
88. last two parameters default to true if you do not specify them as false To do that you would use add to recent list false or without add to recent list Whichever way you write it you will notice that when you compile the script AppleScript rewrites it using with or without Since that is the syntax AppleScript seems to like best that is probably the one you should get used to thinking in BBEdit and AppleScript 237 238 Let s take a look at another one the prosaic get Select get from BBEdit s dictionary listing and take a quick look at its class definition You use get to retrieve information from an application You must specify a reference to the object you want to retrieve and you can specify a coercion a condition that tells AppleScript to treat one type of data as if it were another by adding the as clause However after that is the Result line which we have not seen before This line tells you what type of value the command returns This value is placed in the AppleScript system variable called the result Get can retrieve any kind of object so it can return anything as indicated here Other events might return a specific type of result or none at all Save did not have a Result line in its dictionary entry which means it does not return a result Classes and the Class Hierarchy Let s look now at a typical class definition window will do nicely It is in the BBEdit Suite toward the bottom eos BBEdi
89. lines within a body of text and operates on them in some way as specified in the Process Duplicate Lines dialog Process Duplicate Lines Leaving One Matching All Mi Kill Matches Options f Matches on Clipboard Mi Selected Lines Only Remainder on Clipboard Ignore Leading White Space C Matches in New Window Case Sensitive f Remainder in New Window C Numbers Match by Value Mi Match Using Pattern Searching Pattern Match Using Entire Search Pattern 5 All Sub Patterns 1X2 AN Specific Sub Patterns P cement The Matching All option processes all duplicate lines Leaving One ignores the first of each set of duplicate lines and processes only the additional ones If Selected Lines Only is checked the operation will be limited to the contents of the current selection if not it will be applied to the entire document The options at the bottom of the dialog beginning with Match Using Pattern allow you to use a grep pattern to further filter the lines to be processed Additional options specify that white space at the beginning of lines is to be ignored that case distinctions are to be taken into account and that strings of digits are to be evaluated numerically rather than treated simply as lexical strings When you use a grep pattern with this plug in matches are not automatically anchored to line boundaries so ambiguous patterns may produce unpredictable results To avoid this problem you should u
90. lookahead assertions begin with and negative lookahead assertions begin with For example wt will match any word followed by a semicolon but the semicolon is not included as part of the match foo bar matches any occurrence of foo that is not followed by bar Note that the apparently similar pattern f00 bar does not find an occurrence of bar that is preceded by something other than foo it finds any occurrence of bar whatsoever because the assertion foo is always true when the next three characters are bar A lookbehind assertion is needed to achieve this effect Positive lookbehind assertions start with and negative lookbehind assertions start with For example foo bar does find an occurrence of bar that is not preceded by foo The contents of a lookbehind assertion are restricted such that all the strings it matches must have a fixed length However if there are several alternatives they do not all have to have the same fixed length Thus Martin Lewis Advanced Grep Topics 139 140 is permitted but dogs cats causes an error Branches that match different length strings are permitted only at the top level of a lookbehind assertion This is different compared with Perl 5 005 which requires all branches to match the same length of string An assertion such as lt ab c de is not permitted because its single
91. lt body gt lt bbinclude foo script x 3 author JEK gt lt end bbinclude gt lt body gt lt html gt The following script inserts three lines the first containing the file s path the second containing the parameter x passed to it in the bbinclude directive and the third containing the parameter author on include f vars set s to f as text set s to File Path amp S amp return amp return as text set s tos amp x amp x of vars amp return amp return as text set s to s amp Name amp author of vars amp return as text return s end include Include Files 313 new in 7 0 2 The resulting document might look like this html head lt title gt Include Test lt title gt lt meta name generator content BBEdit 7 0 gt lt head gt lt body gt lt bbinclude foo script x 3 author JEK gt File Path Boot Desktop Folder incl_test html x 3 Name JEK lt end bbinclude gt lt body gt lt html gt Including Perl or Python Scripts BBEdit lets you include scripts written in most popular Unix scripting languages If you are running Mac OS 9 and have MacPerl installed on your computer you can write include scripts in Perl If you are running Mac OS X you can write include scripts in Perl Python or any other Unix scripting language The complete path name of the file being processed is passed to the script as its f
92. match possible to a given pattern so if your pattern is E one or more E s and your text contains EEEE the pattern matches all the E s at once not just the first one This is usually what you want but not always Suppose for instance that you want to match an HTML tag At first you may think that a good way to do this would be to search for the pattern T consisting of a less than sign followed by one or more occurrences of a single character followed by a greater than sign To understand why this may not work the way you think it should consider the following sample text to be searched lt B gt This text is in boldface lt B gt The intent was to write a pattern that would match both of the HTML tags separately Let s see what actually happens The lt character at the beginning of this line matches the beginning of the pattern The next character in the pattern is which matches any character except a line break modified with the quantifier taken together this combination means one or more repetitions of any character That of course takes care of the B The problem is that the next gt is also any character and that it also qualifies as one or more repetitions In fact all of the text up to the end of the line qualifies as one or more repetitions of any character the line break does not qualify so grep stops there After grep has reached the line break it has exhausted the operato
93. number you can dismiss the dialog by clicking the Demo button BBEdit will then operate with full functionality for a limited period of time after which you must purchase the product and receive a serial number in order to continue using it The BBEdit 7 0 application is installed as a fat bundle that can run on either Mac OS X or Mac OS 9 On Mac OS 9 the application file s name is BBEdit app on Mac OS X the app extension is hidden and the file name appears simply as BBEdit Updating an Existing Copy Beginning with the release of BBEdit 7 0 2 the factory supplied plug ins and spelling dictionaries are now part of the application package In addition keyboard equivalents for plug ins are no longer tracked using the plug in file as a mechanism Thus future updates to plug ins will no longer require that you re apply any customized key equivalents for plug ins For this release you will need to do so one last time This also means that factory plug ins and spelling dictionaries remain available when the application is launched without a BBEdit Support folder Updating from BBEdit 7 0 x If you are updating from an earlier release of BBEdit 7 0 then you need only replace your existing BBEdit application file with the version supplied on the update disk image Upgrading from a Previous Version If you are upgrading from a version of BBEdit prior to 7 0 the easiest course of action is to copy the supplied BBEdit 7 0
94. perform a literal search for any character including a null using this option Malformed escapes are treated as literal strings In older versions of BBEdit you could not perform a grep search for a null character ASCII 0 even if it was escaped This limitation was removed starting with BBEdit 6 5 Multi File Searching The only difference between single file searching and multi file searching is that in multi file searching you need to specify the files to be searched BBEdit gives you a great deal of flexibility in how to do this You can search all the files in a given directory in a file group in open editing windows or in a BBEdit results window For finer control you can use BBEdit s advanced multi criteria filtering options or even identify a set of files to search via an OSA script Multi File Searching 99 To look for a string in several files do the following steps 1 Choose Find from the Search menu to open the Find amp Replace dialog box if it is not already open 2 Mark the Multi File Search checkbox Find amp Replace Search For a 5 O Use Grep Patterns i Cte m Replace Vi Start at 1 op Search Selection Only a areas a F Replace All Wrap Around Extend Selection Search Backwards m Don t Find C Match Entire Words mnr Cancel Replace With Rl Multi File Search kal Batch Find Exclude Matches Folder m Appi alion F
95. performing a multi file search BBEdit displays every occurrence of the search string in the searched files in a search results browser e o e Search Results 2 Er Warnin Rf 24 Notes Open 4 24 occurrences of html found in 4 filas Page Template 5 occurrences found Include Example tmpl 8 occurrences found Simple Page tmpl 6 occurrences found Table Of Contents tmnl 5 occurrences found 4 Last Saved 08 21 00 04 29 18 PM X L3 File Path Application Examgple tmpl il This example illustrates the use of the include directive You can include HTAL source code by reference into another file rather than having to copy and paste and deal with the headaches of keeping all af your HTML code in syne lt 00CTYPE HTML PUBLIC W3C DTO HTML 4 81 Transitional EH http ui wd arg TR 12999 REC htmL481 198981224 Looze dtd html gt head gt 4 a Pez The items at the top of the window tell you how many matches BBEdit found in the set of files you specified as well as whether any error conditions or warnings were generated during the search The list pane lists each line that contains the matched text Depending on how you have configured BBEdit the list may be arranged hierarchically with every match attached to the file that contains it in a Finder like list view or they may be listed one after the other in a simple flat list Every match is identified by file and line number To choose whether to display the sea
96. pop up menu the factory default and consistent with previous versions or whether clicking the swatch brings up the standard Mac OS color picker dialog Holding down the Option key on your keyboard while clicking the swatch reverses the sense of the preference HTML Markup Preferences The HTML Markup preferences let you choose the format of tags generated by BBEdit s HTML tools HTML Tags You can choose to generate uppercase or lowercase HTML tags or to obtain this setting from a Dreamweaver HTML Source Profile You can choose a Dreamweaver HTML Source Profile to use by clicking the Choose button or by dragging a profile to the gray area from the Finder Quoting Tag Attributes You may choose to always enclose tag attributes in quote marks or only to enclose attributes when the HTML standard would require it XML HTML Markup Rules If you are working with a document that does not contain a DOCTYPE specification or an XML declaration you can specify whether BBEdit s HTML Tools should insert HTML or XML style tags by selecting the appropriate radio button CSS Markup Formatting The New Line Before Block Start checkbox controls how the CSS markup and formatting tools place the opening braces for block markup If the checkbox is on you get this style H1 color green If it is off you get H1 color green The Put Simple Rules on One Line checkbox will format a single line of CSS like this H1 colo
97. project and then displays a Save dialog that lets you choose the location in which to create a copy of it Open Log File Opens the CVS log file or brings it to the front if it is already open This file is stored in the Log files folder within the BBEdit Preferences folder Working with Metrowerks CodeWarrior The following sections describe the range of commands which you can send to Metrowerks CodeWarrior For complete information on setting up and using BBEdit as an external editor with the CodeWarrior IDE please refer to the appropriate section of your CodeWarrior user manual Due to the continual change in CodeWarrior project format BBEdit does not currently offer support for browsing or performing Find Differences on such files Using the CodeWarrior Menu This section describes each of the commands in the CodeWarrior menu left CodeWarrior IDE Choose this item to switch to CodeWarrior If CodeWarrior is not running BBEdit launches it Compile This command tells CodeWarrior to compile the source file in the active window The active window must belong to a project that is open in the development environment Check Syntax This command tells the target development environment to check the syntax of the source file in the active window The active window must belong to a project that is open in the development environment Working with Metrowerks CodeWarrior 267 Show in Debugger This command makes the sele
98. search for the pattern From Patrick and you will find every occurrence of these lines in your file or set of files if you do a multi file search instead It is important to note that and do not actually match return characters They match zero width positions after and before returns respectively So if you are looking for foo at the end of a line the pattern foo will match the three characters f o and o If you search for foo r you will match the same text but the match will contain four characters f o o and a return In soft wrapped files and will also match after and before soft line breaks respectively You can combine and within a pattern to force a match to constitute an entire line For example fooS will only match foo on a line by itself with no other characters Try it against these three lines to see for yourself foobar foo fighting foo The pattern will only match the second line Chapter 8 Searching with Grep WARNING In previous versions of BBEdit the character was a wildcard that matched any digit 0 9 Beginning with BBEdit 6 5 this is no longer true If you have grep patterns written with a previous version of BBEdit that use for this purpose you will need to change these patterns The easiest way to do this is to use the Nd character class which has the exact same meaning that used to it matches any character from 0 9 Character classes
99. shell worksheets for issuing commands to the Unix shell and the bbedit command line tool for invoking BBEdit from the command line Working with Development Environments 253 Note new in 7 0 Shell Worksheets When running on Mac OS X BBEdit allows you to store and execute Unix command lines by means of a shell worksheet The New submenu of the File menu contains two commands for opening a shell worksheet The first Shell Worksheet path opens a worksheet for the default Unix shell that you have designated in the Tools preference panel where path is the pathname of that shell The second simply called Shell Worksheet displays a dialog box for choosing the desired shell Either command will open a worksheet window for typing commands to the specified shell Using Worksheets You can type delete and edit text in a worksheet window just as in an ordinary BBEdit document window To invoke a Unix command type the command then press the Enter key or Command Return or click in the status area at the bottom left of the worksheet window Keep in mind that Enter and Return are different keys pressing Return by itself inserts a carriage return instead of executing a command You can execute more than one command at a time by selecting multiple lines and pressing Enter or Command Return The output will appear in the worksheet window below the line or lines containing the commands executed Unlike a terminal this does not have
100. so it can be modified When you open a file which contains Projector information you are not permitted to edit it until you formally check it out using this command The Check Out dialog box appears Check Out none selected M l p File Task Description Ooo O Revision Options C New Branch U Put History in CKID I Touch Modification Date S Verify Contents A n p k m gF List All Revisions l Cancel OK File This field defaults to the frontmost window s file Click the File button to choose a different file or drag a file from the Finder to the rectangle displaying the file path Task Description A notes field that can be used to record the reason the file was checked out Revision Lists the available revisions of the document By default the current local version is selected Click List Previous Revisions to retrieve a list of all revisions from the database New Branch Check this box to start a new branch on the source tree for this file Put History in CKID Check this box to store the revision data in the document s ckid resource If this is done the Revision list will display a list of all revisions without having to check in the Projector database Touch Modification Date Check this box to set the source file s modification date and time to the current date and time Verify Contents Check this box to make sure the file you are checking out is actually the same file as the one in the Projector dat
101. state information in files Window Zooming Always Zoom Windows Mark this checkbox to always expand windows to their maximum size when opening them regardless of their saved window size state Move As Little As Possible When this option is selected BBEdit keeps windows as close to their original location as possible when you zoom them Unix Scripting Preferences 183 new in 7 0 Maximum Width This pop up menu lets you specify the maximum width of a zoomed window The default setting is 13 inch Display Zoom Windows To On systems with multiple monitors this pop up menu lets you choose which screen BBEdit should use when zooming You can choose the main screen the one containing the menu bar the nearest screen the one containing most of the active window the largest screen or the smallest screen Window Menu Show Full Paths Mark this checkbox to show the complete pathname of open documents rather than just their names in BBEdit s Window menu If two or more files have identical filenames their complete pathnames will always be shown to prevent ambiguity regardless of this setting Group by Window Kind Mark this checkbox to group windows of the same kind together in the Window menu For example text editing windows disk browsers and search results browsers are all different kinds of windows Within each group windows will be sorted as determined by the Sort Windows By radio buttons see below Sort Windows
102. submenu of the File menu If this box is not checked the Open Recent submenu lists only local files Passive FTP Mark this checkbox to make passive FTP mode where the server determines the port number for the FTP connection the default Use Passive FTP whenever possible Show Document Icons Mark this checkbox to display icons for the files in the Open from FTP Server and Save to FTP Server dialogs Since FTP servers do not provide Macintosh type and creator information BBEdit determines the displayed icon based on the file s name suffix html sit and so on You may configure these suffix to type mappings via the Internet control panel on Mac OS 9 Mac OS X does not currently provide any direct interface to do so however you can use Internet Explorer s File Helper preferences for this purpose Show Files Starting with The Unix convention for creating invisible or hidden files is to begin their names with a period Often configuration files and scripts such as newsrc or login begin with periods so that they do not clutter most directory listings This setting is off by default so that you will not see such files in FTP listings To display them mark this checkbox FTP Bookmarks This list displays the bookmarks you have defined for FTP servers you use frequently with BBEdit Click Add to create a new bookmark Click Change to edit the selected bookmark or Remove to delete it The Convert button allows you to
103. such as Projector or CVS and is checked out If the file is not on a locked disk you can click the pencil icon to toggle the document s editability The Function pop up menu gives quick access to routines and functions in languages that BBEdit can parse In HTML documents this menu lists the contents of the TITLE tag if any all named anchors in your document that is those defined with A NAME gt all level 1 6 headings any tags that have ID attributes and any BBmark indicators as well as all BBEdit include files referenced by the document The Text Options pop up menu contains commands such as Soft Wrap Text and Show Invisibles that let you control how the text appears in the window The Mark pop up menu contains commands such as Set Marker and Find amp Mark that let you set or mark specific locations in the file when present these marked locations will be listed on the pop up menu below the commands The File pop up menu contains commands that let you set line break options specify what state information is saved and set Unicode file options if applicable Window Anatomy 49 50 Icon Meaning The Insert pop up menu contains commands that let you insert the contents of files folder listings and page breaks The Path pop up menu displays the list of folders that contain the document You can use this menu to open any of the folders along the path in the Finder For files that contain Pro
104. the Finder directly into the path box Find Lurkers none selected Other Hd d uu a t Cancel OK Working with CVS 265 266 Compare Revisions When working with a file that is in a CVS repository you can use this command to access a dialog listing all available revisions of the file When you choose a revision from the list BBEdit will check that revision out into a temporary file and automatically perform a Find Differences between it and the current file Compare Arbitrary Revisions When working with a file that is in a CVS repository hold down the Shift key and Compare Revisions becomes Compare Arbitrary Revisions You can use this command to bring up a dialog which contains two lists each of which shows all available revisions of the file Choose a revision from each list to have BBEdit check them out into temporary files and automatically perform a Find Differences between them Get Revision History When working with a file that is in a CVS repository choosing this command will write out a complete revision history for the file in text form to the CVS log file Get CVS Status When working with a file that is in a CVS repository choosing this command will bring up the CVS Info dialog which displays the local path to the file and its current status and revision information CV5 Info myData Projects Webs5ites www barebones com index html Status Up to date Working Revision 1 79 Reposit
105. the replace operation being done is what you want Show Results Opens a results browser listing each of the files which was changed and the number of changes in each file Replacing in Files with Projector CKIDs In order to track the modification status of files and determine whether a given file is editable at any point in time MPW s Projector source control system places a resource of type ckid in each file Many other Macintosh applications including BBEdit also honor these ckid resources This allows Projector or similar systems like Mac CVS to work by preventing files from being changed accidentally 110 Chapter 7 Searching During a multi file replace whenever BBEdit attempts to modify a file which is designated Read Only it will display the following dialog asking you how to handle the file A Xavier Users admin Desktop Files 6 5 Notes is checked out as Read Only Do you want to Modify Read Only the file and do the replace or skip this file Don t Ask Again Cancel Skip MRO amp Replace Choosing the Cancel button will stop the multi file replace operation and leave the current file untouched Choosing the Skip button will cause BBEdit to skip this file only leaving it untouched and continue the multi file replace operation Choosing the MRO amp Update button will cause BBEdit to mark the file Modify Read Only change the file and continue the multi file replace operation If you select th
106. the two files and then deleting the copy Cancel Check Out If the front window is checked out this command discards any changes made to it and retrieves the latest version Hold down the Shift key to choose a file to be canceled instead of canceling the front window Edit Task Comment Choose this command to edit the checkout comment for this file Hold down the Shift key to choose a file instead of editing the comment for the front window Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Compare Revisions This command compares the contents of the frontmost window with another revision of the file You will be prompted to choose the desired revision the current version you have on disk is highlighted when the dialog opens The results will appear in the same format used by the Compare Files command see page 73 Get Revision History This command retrieves a complete version history of the frontmost window and displays it in a new BBEdit document window New Project Creates a new project database from an existing folder of source files If any of the files are already in a project they will be orphaned before the new project is created The New Project dialog appears New Project Source Folder none selected 27 Choose Save Project As none selected W Scan Nested Folders v Use Old Format W Skip Folders Checking in Check In Options W Text Files M Keep Modifiable W Resource Files F Touch
107. this option is selected Zap Gremlins converts the file s contents as if it were opened with LF Translation turned on Zap Non ASCII Characters When this option is selected Zap Gremlins zaps all characters in the file that do not fall in the 7 bit or ASCII range Examples of such characters include special Macintosh characters such as bullets and typographer s quotes and and as well as all multi byte characters In general such special characters are those that you type by holding down the Option key Text Transformation 63 64 Note Zap Control Characters When this option is selected Zap Gremlins zaps a specific group of invisible ASCII characters also known as control characters Control characters can cause compilers and other text processing utilities to malfunction and are therefore undesirable in many files Zap Null ASCII 0 Characters When this option is selected Zap Gremlins zaps all instances of the null character ASCII 0 If Zap Control Characters is selected this option will be enabled automatically It is included separately in case you want to remove only nulls without affecting other control characters that may be present in a file Older versions of BBEdit were unable to perform grep searches on files that contained nulls this limitation has been removed starting with BBEdit 6 5 but nulls may cause malfunctions in other external text processing programs The radio buttons in the botto
108. to be at the end of the document you can type commands anywhere in the worksheet window or place the insertion point back on a previously executed command to run it again i untitled shell This i a Worksheet If you are familiar with HPH z Worksheet metaphor you should be very happy here If you are not here s g quick overview of the things you can do from within a Worksheet Select the Line below and hit either Enter or Command Re turn staff 364 Oct 15 41 Desktop staff 264 Oct 15 55 Documents staff Te4 Oct 15 85 Library staff zb4 Oct 15 55 Movies staff 264 Oct 15 55 Music staff 1486 Oct 1 18 Pictures dewr rE 3 admin staff 264 Hug 21 13 34 Public peers 4 admin staff 264 Hug 21 13 34 Sites 3 If the selection range is non empty only the exact text selected will be executed if there is just an insertion point the entire line containing it will be executed even if it is not at the end of the line The status area at the bottom left of the worksheet window shows the name of the Unix process currently executing or the name of the shell itself when no process is running This can be useful for seeing what is going on when a process hangs or takes a long time to complete You can kill the currently running process by typing Control C or Command Period in the worksheet window Also clicking in the status area sends the currently selected text or the line containing the insertion point as a command
109. to specify a real backslash you must write V Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit IMPORTANT Note That s not all that confusing until you start writing AppleScripts that call on BBEdit s powerful grep searching capability BBEdit also uses the backslash as an escape character If you want to search for an actual backslash in a document you have to tell BBEdit to search for V V However if you do that in AppleScript you must keep in mind that AppleScript will first interpret the backslashes before passing them to BBEdit To pass one backslash to BBEdit from AppleScript you must write two in AppleScript So to tell BBEdit to search for a single literal backslash from an AppleScript you must write no fewer than four backslashes in the script Each pair of backslashes is interpreted as a single backslash by AppleScript which then passes two backslashes to BBEdit And BBEdit interprets those two backslashes as a single one for search purposes This proliferation of backslashes can make your scripts look a bit like a blown over picket fence The Every Item Issue When writing a script that loops through every item of a BBEdit object for example every line of a document do not do it like this repeat with i in every line of document 1 do stuff here end repeat This forces BBEdit to evaluate every line of document 1 every time through the loop which will slow your script significantly Instead write set theLines to every line of
110. to stack windows down and to the left straight down atop and down and to the right These are the top four choices in the dialog BBEdit tiles the windows in two or three rows or columns If you have more than three windows open BBEdit stacks additional windows behind the three front windows BBEdit figures out how many rows and columns it needs to tile windows The larger your screen the more rows and columns BBEdit uses The windows are never narrower than half of a classic Macintosh screen BBEdit tiles the front two window horizontally or vertically and stacks any additional windows behind the two front windows Note To arrange the windows using the same settings as the last time you used this command hold down the Option key as you choose Arrange from the Window menu Window Menu 91 92 Get Info The Get Info command displays a dialog box that lists the number of characters words line and pages in the selected text and in the document Using this command is the same as clicking the info button in the status bar Info index html Library WebServer Documents index html Selection Document Chars 165 621 Words 20 88 Lines l 34 Pages mm pe Paginate l Copy Path E OK 3 To find out how many pages the document will take to print click the Paginate button To put the full path to the file on the clipboard click the Copy Path button Super Get Info If you
111. to the Unix shell 254 Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools new in 7 0 new in 7 0 WARNING Keep in mind that shell worksheets are not terminal windows If you have ever used MPW you will probably feel right at home using shell worksheets If you are only familiar with terminal emulators however you will find that shell worksheets work quite differently Command line editing gestures do not work nor will any Unix commands that expect to be dealing with terminals For example try running emacs in a shell worksheet When you drag files or folders into a worksheet window the behavior is different than when dragging these items into an ordinary document window An unmodified drag of a single file or folder will insert the POSIX style path of that item at the drop location Additionally rather than selecting the inserted text as in a normal editing window the insertion point will be left at the end of the current line so you can easily continue entering additional information or execute the line as a command Dragging multiple files and folders will now produce a set of paths for those items with spaces for separators rather than carriage returns This makes it easier to add arguments to a line for immediate execution as part of a command If you hold down the Command key while dragging it will cause the file s contents to be inserted or a folder listing if the item you are dragging is a folder The default working di
112. top level branch can match two different lengths but it is acceptable if rewritten to use two top level branches lt abc abde The implementation of lookbehind assertions is for each alternative to temporarily move the current position back by the fixed width and then try to match If there are insufficient characters before the current position the match is deemed to fail Lookbehinds in conjunction with non backtracking a k a once only subpatterns can be particularly useful for matching at the ends of strings an example is given in the section on once only subpatterns below Several assertions of any sort may occur in succession For example 2 lt d 3 lt 999 foo matches foo preceded by three digits that are not 999 Notice that each of the assertions is applied independently at the same point in the subject string First there is a check that the previous three characters are all digits and then there is a check that the same three characters are not 999 This pattern does not match foo preceded by six characters the first of which are digits and the last three of which are not 999 For example it does not match 123abcfoo A pattern to do that is 2Nd 3 1999 foo This time the first assertion looks at the preceding six characters checking that the first three are digits and then the second assertion checks that the preceding three characters are not 99
113. typing you can use the commands in the Insert submenu of the Edit menu to insert text into the active window These commands which are also available in the Insert pop up menu left in the document status bar let you insert the contents of other files folder listings Macintosh Toolbox templates and page break characters Inserting Files The Insert File Contents command inserts the contents of one or more files into the document you are editing When you use this command BBEdit displays the Open dialog box and lets you select the files to insert To insert more than one file hold down the Shift key or Control key as you click the files BBEdit then inserts the files at the insertion point or replaces the selected text If you select more than one file the files are inserted in alphabetical order according to file name When you use the Insert File Contents command you can now select more than one file from the dialog box The Insert Submenu 71 72 Tip Tip Tip Tip Note Tip You can also use the File Contents command in the Insert pop up menu in the status bar or you can drag a file s icon from the Finder into a BBEdit editing window to insert the contents of that file Inserting a Folder Listing The Insert Folder Listing command inserts a textual listing of a folder hierarchy When you use this command BBEdit displays a directory dialog box that lets you select a folder to insert BBEdit inserts the folder l
114. usually be the Desktop folder that is the invisible folder in which all items that appear on the desktop are stored If you have opened any volume or folder within a volume the current folder will be shown here instead On Mac OS X new disk browsers will open with a view of the current user s home folder You can use this menu to back out of any folder you are currently in to a higher level folder as you can in the Finder You can also choose the Other option to get a folder selection dialog from which you can choose any folder on any currently mounted volume Disk Browsers Tip new in 7 0 Open Button Clicking the Open button in the status bar opens the selected item or you can double click on the item If you open a folder BBEdit displays the contents of that folder in the file list pane If you click one or more files BBEdit opens those files into editing windows Hold down the Option key as you Open or double click on a file name to open the file with the application that created it Using the List Pane in Disk Browsers The list pane of a disk browser displays disks files and folders When you are at the desktop level the list shows all mounted volumes and the files and folders on the Desktop When you click a folder or disk BBEdit displays the names of all the files it can open in the text pane The names listed in the text pane cannot be double clicked to open them You can however select a name a
115. visibility Projector status or the programming or markup language it is written in You can also test the content of a file using the Contents criterion The middle column lets you choose the test to be applied to the selected attribute The available options here change depending on what attribute you selected If you choose Visibility in the first column for instance your only choices are whether the file is or is not visible However if you choose File Name in the first column the middle column lets you test to see if the name does or does not exactly match contain begin with or end with a particular string You can also test file names to see if they match wildcard or Grep patterns In wildcard patterns the asterisk and question mark characters have special meanings The asterisk matches any number of characters such that c matches any file whose name ends with c The question mark matches a single character so that foo matches food fool foot and many other words Both the asterisk and the question mark can be used anywhere in a wildcard pattern and any number of either can be used in a single pattern Grep patterns also known as regular expressions are a powerful method of selecting file names based on classes of text or repeating text They are covered in great detail in the next chapter The right column specifies the match criterion For example when filtering by File Name you type the text you
116. want the name to match contain begin with or end with or not When filtering by Language you choose a supported language from a pop up menu When filtering by Projector status you choose a valid status from a pop up menu or missing to indicate that you want documents that do not have Projector status information To quickly set a match criterion drag a file from the Finder to a field in the Define File Filter dialog BBEdit inserts the appropriate attribute from the dragged file if possible Chapter 7 Searching Note When using a time or date criterion you can use the special words below to specify dates and times relative to the current date and time Word Means now current date and time today midnight on the current date yesterday current date and time minus 24 hours tomorrow current date and time plus 24 hours You can add any number of criteria using the More Criteria button To delete the last criterion click the Fewer Criteria button To select any single criterion for deletion press the Option key and click on the desired item To select multiple continuous criteria press Option Shift and drag across the items or to select discontinuous criteria press Command Option and click on the desired items Click Save to save the file filter and use it for this search BBEdit will ask you to name the filter and it will then appear in the Filters pop up menu in the Find amp Replace dialog and in the Define
117. will update all of the files contained in the folder to the latest available revisions You can select any recently accessed folder from the pop up menu or choose the Other entry to bring up an Open dialog allowing you to navigate to and choose any desired folder to update You can also drag a folder from the Finder directly into the path box Update Folder none selected Other a a t Cancel OK Working with CVS 263 264 Note Note Commit File Choosing this command displays a dialog that lets you select a file to commit into the repository If the document has unsaved changes it will be saved first By default this command commits the file corresponding to the front window To choose a different file use the File button To enter comments use the Commit Message field Commit File Fi File none selected Commit Message Cancel X OK Although BBEdit lets you commit a file without a comment it s considered good form to supply a comment that summarizes the changes you made to the file To commit the file corresponding to the frontmost window without displaying a dialog box hold down the Option key as you choose this command from the CVS menu You cannot commit a file without having first added it to the repository using the Add command Commit Folder When you choose this command and select a folder in the Commit Folder dialog BBEdit will commit all of the files contained in that
118. window but this window will be untitled and must be given a name and saved 14 Chapter 2 Installing BBEdit Upgrading Unix Support This folder contains the Unix Scripts and Unix Filters folders which are used to build the Shebang menu and the floating Unix Scripts and Unix Filters palettes when running on Mac OS X These folders are analogous to those in the MacPerl Support folder except that on Mac OS X BBEdit supports any Unix scripting language including Perl Python and shell scripts You can place scripts and filters within subfolders up to four levels deep of their respective folders to organize them Some example Perl Python and shell scripts and filters are supplied with the standard installation The Unix Script Output file stores output from scripts and the Unix Script Logs folder stores output logs for specific source files See Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools for more information on this folder You can move or copy over any Perl scripts or filters that you wish from previous versions of BBEdit See Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools for information on how to share Perl scripts and filters between Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X BBEdit Support Folder 15 Note Upgrading Upgrading Note Upgrading Other BBEdit Files and Folders When you start up BBEdit it may create the files and folders noted in this section BBEdit Preferences Folder BBEdit stores various settings files in a fol
119. work within the limits of visual editing tools Among the improvements made over time to the HTML Tools are that all of the tools support entry and editing of double byte text and they will also automatically recognize and insert tags in the correct format when used in XHTML documents 185 186 Note Anyone preparing HTML files in UTF 8 format may want to save them without the byte order mark due to a bug in Microsoft Internet Explorer for the Macintosh This issue may be addressed in a future version of Internet Explorer The BBEdit HTML Tools and their documentation are written with the assumption that you already understand HTML If you do not we suggest one or more of the references listed below None are published by or otherwise affiliated with Bare Bones Software Inc but other BBEdit users have found them useful for HTML usage and design issues Recommended Books Learning Web Design Jennifer Niederst O Reilly and Associates 2001 ISBN 0 59600 036 7 HTML for the World Wide Web with XHTML and CSS Visual QuickStart Guide 5th Edition Elizabeth Castro Peachpit Press 2002 ISBN 0 32113 007 3 Teach Yourself Web Publishing with HTML and XHTML in 21 Days 3rd Edition Laura Lemay Denise Tyler Rafe Colburn Sams 2001 ISBN 0 67232 077 0 Cascading Style Sheets The Definitive Guide Eric A Meyer O Reilly and Associates 2000 ISBN 1 56592 622 6 HTML amp XHTML The Definitive Guide 4th Edition Chuck
120. 03 moving text 46 moving the cursor 51 using the arrow keys 52 MPW state information 24 multi byte text 25 27 81 85 176 178 318 multi file comparisons 75 multi file search 98 99 multiple clipboards 47 multiple Undo 48 name placeholder 226 New Project command 273 NOFRAMES tag 211 Non Greedy Quantifiers 126 non printing characters 58 99 NOSCRIPT tag 201 202 numeric keypad 54 O OBJECT tag 207 OL tag 203 Open command 24 26 Index 325 options 29 Open File by Name command 31 Open Hidden 29 Open Recent command 26 29 Open Selection command 26 30 Opening 26 Opening Existing Documents 26 optimizing HTML 215 OPTION tag 206 OPTIONGROUP tag 206 ordered lists 203 outdenting 62 p P paragraph tag 201 page breaks 72 Page Down key 56 Page Up key 56 paragraph definition 46 Paragraph Fill option 68 PARAM tag 207 passive FTP 33 Paste command 4 47 Paste Previous Clipboard 306 Paste Previous Clipboard command 47 Path pop up menu 50 pattern matching see grep pencil icon 49 Perl 256 Perl scripts 256 Perl Unix Filters palette 4 289 Perl Unix Scripts palette 4 289 persistent includes 311 Philip Bar 57 58 Phrase Elements submenu 209 placeholders 307 RELATIVE 310 AppleScript 227 in glossaries 226 Plug In Info command 279 Plug In Tools palette 4 289 plug ins 279 POSIX Style Character Classes 135 PRE tag 203 Precompile command 268 Preferences 152 Application 153 Browser Display 154 Differences 155
121. 1 BBEdit HTML Tools Note Most of the HTML Tools commands apply to the document which you currently have in the foreground either at the current insertion point or on the current range as appropriate Some of the utility functions however can operate on many documents The Tool Descriptions section provides more details on how each function works Creating a New Document You can create an HTML document simply by taking any text file and adding HTML markup to it but there s a better way BBEdit includes a New Document command to create the basic skeleton of an HTML document for you To create a new HTML document you can do either of the following e Chose New from the File menu and then choose HTML Document from the New submenu o Click the New Document button in the HTML Tools palette In either case the following dialog appears New HTML Document M insert DOCTYPE HTML 4 01 Transitional 3 Mi HTML M Head Mi Body wi Give BBEdit Credit Lang Charset S 4 Base Meta Link Web Site www barebones com Template Default KH vi Create New Window If the frontmost window in BBEdit is editable you can deselect the Create New Window option in the dialog This will insert the document template around the current text contents of the window In many cases you can simply specify a title for the document and click OK ignoring the other options However we suggest t
122. 1 Choose Open from the File menu BBEdit displays the Open dialog box On Mac OS X Open BBEdit Show All Available m From Documents m I CGI Executables P E index html T Documents MW Translate Line Breaks Read As auto detect m Go to Add to Favorites Cancel Open gt On Mac OS 9 PODER BEENI 3 BBEdit Support Date Modified p LI PEE rrelTere 40 eu E gt Cj Dictionaries 10 12 00 b i FTF Temp Yesterday p a mM 4 4 01 b Sh Help 10712700 b 3 HTML Templates 10 12 00 n a Language Modules z z8 01 Show All Available kf Translate Line Breaks Read As auto detect 1 Select the file you want to open When using BBEdit on Mac OS X you can select or deselect multiple files by holding down the Command key or the Shift key as you click the files 28 Chapter 3 Working with Files IMPORTANT 2 Change any desired options see below 3 Click Open to open the file You can use the options described below when you open a file Show or File Types Pop Up Menu This pop up menu lets you choose what kinds of files can be selected from the Open dialog If you know a file contains text but it does not appear in the Open dialog this means that the Macintosh type of the file is not set to TEXT This is sometimes the case with files received from other computers or downloaded from the Internet Choose All Files from the File Types pop up menu
123. 118 Character Classes Match Sets or Ranges of Characters 120 Matching Non Printing Characters 121 Other Special Character Classes 122 Quantifiers Repeat Subpatterns 122 Combining Patterns to Make Complex Patterns 123 Creating Subpatterns 124 Using Alternation 125 The Longest Match Issue 126 e Non Greedy Quantifiers 126 Writing Replacement Patterns esae ex Re EN ae RR RE RE s 127 Subpatterns Make Replacement Powerful 127 Using the Entire Matched Pattern 128 Using Parts of the Matched Pattern 128 Case Transformations 129 Examples 4 429546 dona d aea aa a ou Du d doen tace Dro ups ah aod b cer d 130 Matching Identifiers 130 Matching White Space 130 Matching Delimited Strings 131 Marking Structured Text 131 Marking a Mail Digest 132 Rearranging Name Lists 132 Advanced GreP TODICS oda ou rue imd b Rene Pedo beatos 133 Matching Nulls 133 Backreferences 133 POSIX Style Character Classes 135 Non Capturing Parentheses 135 Perl Style Pattern Extensions 136 Comments 137 Pattern Modifiers 137 Positional Assertions 139 Conditional Subpatterns 141 Once Only Subpatterns 142 Recursive Patterns 144 115 Note Tech Note What Is Grep or Pattern Searching Grep patterns offer a powerful way to make changes to your data that plain text searches simply cannot For example suppose you have a list of people s names
124. 227 19 and or subdivision c 1 ii of Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause in Department of Defense FAR 252 227 7013 Acknowledgment You acknowledge that you have read this agreement understand it and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions You further agree that it is the complete and exclusive statement of the agreement between you and Bare Bones Software Inc which supersedes all proposals or prior agreements oral or written and all other communications between you and Bare Bones Software Inc relating to the subject matter of this agreement Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Contents Welcome to BBEdit 1 Geine Slatted 34 04 2554953 PA AE rE A AEA 1 What Is BBEdit 25 xc Skee red psd ots RERO ago A ANGE au 2 How Can I Use BBEdit 2 s leg b aie bos Go RE EOS Res 2 Working with Development Environments 2 Writing HIML Documents 2 Human Interface Notes 22 i23 dan prt canada tinci Eg ces 3 Dynamic Menus 3 Bypassing Options Dialogs 3 Keyboard Shortcuts for Commands 3 Contextual Menus 4 Snappy Palettes 4 Dialog Box Key Equivalents 4 Changes from Previous Versions 00 ee eee eee eee eee 6 Info on New Features 7 OUD POL SERVICES anc aquistis bite Cep aware teen dass ad 8 Installing BBEdit 9 Basic installanOnc3 sens sh tagh E Ue suse hes oe ean Ed E 9 System Requirements 9 e Installing BBEdit 9 Updating an Existing Copy 10 BBEdit oUp DOCU POlGE
125. 253 Switching Between Source and Header Files 253 BBEdit and the Unix Command Line 0 eee ee eee 253 Shell Worksheets 254 Invoking BBEdit from the Command Line 256 Perl Python and Shell Scripting uo saco ORE GREC EEIERAQ aud ees 256 Using MacPerl on Mac OS 9 256 Using Unix Scripts on Mac OS X 257 Language Resources 257 Line Endings and Perl Unix Scripts 258 MacPerl Shebang Menu 259 Filters and Scripts 261 Filters 261 Scripts 262 Additional Notes 262 Working WithG Vo o Saba du toddbu ede etus Sys peo tek Mid epe duas 263 Get Revision 263 Update File 263 Update Folder 263 Commit File 264 Commit Folder 264 Commit Parent Folder 265 Find Lurkers 265 Compare Revisions 266 Compare Arbitrary Revisions 266 Get Revision History 266 Get CVS Status 266 Add 266 Remove 266 Go to Previous Next Conflict 267 Export Project 267 Open Log File 267 Working with Metrowerks CodeWarrior eee ee eee eee 267 Using the CodeWarrior Menu 267 Workine with Project Builder n u 00 iGs5enc ged cdsia oh thawed eee 269 Working with Projector SourceServer 6 cee cece ee eee eee 269 Check In 270 Check Out 271 Get Revision 272 Cancel Check Out 272 Edit Task Comment 272 Compare Revisions 273 Get Revision History 273 New Project 273 Check In Folder
126. 2Nd N 2Nd t a z and this pattern to make the file marks 1 2 The before the first search group ensures that BBEdit matches the numeric string at the beginning of a line The pattern d matches a possible decimal point and a digit sequence The other groups use the white space idiom and the identifier idiom You can use a similar technique to mark any section that has a section mark that can be described with grep Marking a Mail Digest You can elaborate the structured text technique to create markers for mail digests Assume that each digest is separated by the following lines From Sadie Burke lt sadie burke com gt Date Sun 16 Jul 1995 13 17 45 0700 Subject Fishing with the judge Suppose you want the marker text to list the subject and the sender You would use the following search string From t r rSubject t And mark the text with this replacement string N27 Note that for the sequence Vr Ar in the middle of the search string the Vr before Subject is necessary because as previously discussed the special character does not match carriage returns At least not by default See Advanced Topics below for details on how to make dot match any character including carriage returns Rearranging Name Lists You can use grep patterns to transform a list of names in first name first form to last name first order for a later sorting for instance Assume that the names are in t
127. 3 Find Differences 114 Apply to New 114 Apply to Old 114 Compare Again 114 Find in Reference 114 Find Definition 114 Chapter 8 Searching with Grep 115 Chapter 9 What Is Grep or Pattern Searching 0 eee eee 116 Recommended Books and Resources 00 0000 00 008 116 Writing Search Patterns 5 o5edos repose tae EU SENE 117 Most Characters Match Themselves 117 Escaping Special Characters 117 Wildcards Match Types of Characters 118 Character Classes Match Sets or Ranges of Characters 120 Matching Non Printing Characters 121 Other Special Character Classes 122 Quantifiers Repeat Subpatterns 122 Combining Patterns to Make Complex Patterns 123 Creating Subpatterns 124 Using Alternation 125 The Longest Match Issue 126 Non Greedy Quantifiers 126 Writing Replacement Patterns leeleleeeeeesn 127 Subpatterns Make Replacement Powerful 127 Using the Entire Matched Pattern 128 Using Parts of the Matched Pattern 128 Case Transformations 129 Ics I ETT 130 Matching Identifiers 130 Matching White Space 130 Matching Delimited Strings 131 Marking Structured Text 131 Marking a Mail Digest 132 Rearranging Name Lists 132 Advanced GIOP TOPICS ccs sont Rad x P RS PEU pdt ans 133 Matching Nulls 133 e Backreferences 133 POSIX Style Character Classes 135 Non Capturing Parentheses
128. 4 Table of Contents ix x HTML Palette Preferences axeused er ECCE ORT CREE eed 164 Palette Width 164 Button Height 164 Buttons on Main HTML Tools Palette 164 HIML Preview Preferences 2 cosekr eru ERE EPA MEETS 164 When Previewing Files with Unsaved Changes 165 Web Browsers Available for Preview 165 HIME Tools Preferences ia dues CR ab buen IEEE eR 165 HTML Updater 165 Syntax Checker Warnings 165 Link Checker Warnings 165 HTML Web Sites Preferences sss ovo e RE REDE EE Ried 166 Site Name 167 Web Server Name 167 Site Path on Server 167 Default Page Name 168 Local Site Root 168 Look for Templates and Include Files In 168 Languages Preferences esce doute une tka n ATA UNA e date 168 Language for Untitled Windows 169 Default Language 169 Software Update Preferences 53 22 Ea hue teed ted e utes 169 Spelling Pfeferenoe S uucus ce uque es c b epee De dados 169 Built In 169 Use Dictionaries 169 e Word Services 170 Startu pP DEefereD tes o so eode done ordad Sir eto vr De pd p 170 Do Nothing 170 New Text Document 170 New Disk Browser 170 New FTP Browser 170 Open 170 Open from FTP Server 170 State Preferences e uui od cag and T9 dee pedalis m d dris ied cde Reg 171 Honor Saved State 171 Default State for New Documents 171 Always Add State 172 Status Dar Preferences erres t ECCO SEE taie deri d 172
129. 4 Save As command 22 Save As options file creator 24 line breaks 24 Options button 23 Save As Stationery 23 state information 24 Save command 22 Save Selection command 23 Save to FTP Server command 34 script placeholder 226 227 script systems 81 SCRIPT tag 201 208 Scripts 262 updating from old versions 241 Scripts menu 14 Scripts palette 4 14 289 scrolling synchronized 93 search results window 101 149 searching 96 all open documents 104 backward 98 111 batch find 98 case sensitive 98 111 exclude matches 100 extending selection 98 for non printing characters 99 for whole words 98 grep 98 see also grep in a folder 103 in multiple files 99 in results of a previous search 105 in selection only 98 menu reference 112 multiple files 98 non printing characters 121 on a Web site 106 replacing in multiple files 109 results window 101 149 search set 103 with a script 104 with scripts 104 wrap around 98 Select All command 4 46 Select Line command 46 Select Paragraph command 46 select placeholder 226 SELECT tag 205 selected text 46 selecting text 46 51 by clicking 51 extending the selection 53 rectangular selection 52 selend placeholder 227 selstart placeholder 227 Send PostScript plug in obsolete 286 Send to Back command 93 Set Breakpoint command 268 Set Marker command 49 70 Set Menu Keys command 3 4 289 Set Target command 267 setting markers 70 using grep 71 SGML 187 prologue 190 Shebang Menu 25
130. 52 PPP UCAMON PIELCTEN COS iis dla br hoo ca bee tob i S does SR COR ID ae EIA UIS hia pe 153 Browser Display Preterences ru on our ERES REA wee ERTE 154 Difterences Preferences 4 2 953 Raed OF SARA PEASE RENE ERA 155 Editor Defaults Preferences scs e euei nara ee Mio ee VO reU Eee 155 Pile Filters Preterences 2a qo ea RR Rusa ees add 157 File Search PReferences s eese er vet pe cem pue Pup dose e 157 File Types Preterencesda ois eoo bcs od ee e ea des ie pev eoa ds 159 Fonts Preferences ova aa docs e ra Ea au Qs dba ptu od 159 FIP Settings 16 erene6S o siise a Nus goi debes dice ee dE vas 160 F nchon Popup Preterencesuiessa dices o eteps weis ae See e ec 161 Glossary Preferences eed vata Sets or acea d cir ene dr de qur do a proc 162 Fa TIE Colors Prelerene es 2 5005 aie ta DI RA ah te a ate Aog Ta b inc e a a 162 ELIMI Markup Frere neor erdera hee ote tn eee aee Sod wae 163 HIME Palette Preferences sos ccs tirain Se eee eet REPE 164 HTML Preview Preterences v cuis oc oer Se ae aes CX er owe 164 HTML Tools Pr fer ne s i 4 au once a a oai A e wale CD 165 HTML Web Sites Preferences ua 2e orem caer e m RR 166 Languages PreferenceSus deo ed dies diede d ok erbe eee des 168 Software Update Preferences 3 howe de ek Ae pce a edo ic 169 Spelling Preterences s qe sistant 6 oS eae Dope Sd ale ou PU d E areata c 169 Startup Preferences s 8 0 4 Sos ree a Now 109 VR aL cle a 0 ae A ae 170 SEtate Prelerencess s v 93e eset ROO deo eee e
131. 87 Using the HIML Tools 5 ooa o ci eee one mex e eren 188 Creating a New Document 189 e File Addressing 191 HIME Tool DeseripuOns od sae iz holes tweet tues AER QD 192 Tag Maker 193 Edit Tag 194 Close Current Tag 195 Balance Tags 195 Document Type 195 Character Set 195 CSS Submenu 196 Body Properties 200 e Head Elements 200 Block Elements 201 Lists 203 e Tables 203 Forms 204 Inline Elements 206 Phrase Elements 209 Font Style Elements 210 Frames 211 Check 211 Update 212 Includes 214 Utilities 214 Misc 215 Preview 216 The HTML Tools Palette 5 xoc XR EE EHE RESP 216 HTML Tools Palette Tips 217 HTML Tools Palette 217 Other Palettes 218 MITME Trans la COD uhi mt PR DIM EE de eie Eua dn 220 Remove Tags 220 e Paragraphs 220 HTML Entities 220 Templates ist sutor vet OUR CROP e Mi edens de feoda d 220 Template Setup 220 Using a Template 221 Custom Markup chart bitte esci voe S aO UR do dat 221 Table of Contents xi xii Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Using the Glossary 223 The Glossary Command oves ben Rn Redon 223 Language Sensitivity of the Glossary 000 eee 224 Manually Sorting the Glossary 00 0 cece eee eee ee 224 lnsertins Glossary enis srir fag noid He ies wr iD dh eae 224 Assigning Key Equivalents to Glossary Items
132. 9 Assertions can be nested in any combination For example foo bar baz matches an occurrence of baz that is preceded by bar which in turn is not preceded by foo while 2 2Nd 3 21999 foo is another pattern which matches foo preceded by three digits and any three characters that are not 999 Assertion subpatterns are not capturing subpatterns and may not be repeated because it makes no sense to assert the same thing several times If any kind of assertion contains capturing subpatterns within it these are counted for the purposes of numbering the capturing subpatterns in the whole pattern However substring capturing is carried out only for positive assertions because it does not make sense for negative assertions Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Conditional Subpatterns Conditional subpatterns allow you to apply if then or if then else logic to pattern matching The if portion can either be an integer between 1 and 99 or an assertion The two forms of syntax are if then condition yes pattern if then else condition yes pattern no pattern If the condition evaluates as true the yes pattern portion attempts to match Otherwise the no pattern portion does if there is a no pattern If the condition text between the parentheses is an integer it corresponds to the backreferenced subpattern with the same number Do not precede the number with a backslash If t
133. 9 Shell scripts 256 shell worksheets 254 Shift Delete keystroke 54 shifting text 62 Show Invisibles command 49 Show pop up menu 147 simple includes 311 SMALL tag 210 Smart Editing 57 157 smart quotes 57 Soft Wrap Text command 49 soft wrapping 57 65 66 as default 66 solid diamond 49 Sort Lines plug in 285 source files 253 source management 269 SPAN tag 209 special folders 11 spell checking 76 external spell checker 79 user dictionary 78 Spelling Preferences 169 split bar 51 in browsers 146 startup items 20 Index 327 Startup Preferences 170 state 24 State Preferences 171 stationery 23 91 Stationery List 91 status bar 48 hiding 50 58 in browsers 146 in disk browsers 147 Status Bar Preferences 172 STRIKE tag 210 STRONG tag 210 STYLE tag 201 stylesheets 201 SUB subscript tag 209 subpatterns 124 substitution in glossaries 226 SUP superscript tag 209 Super Get Info button 50 Synchro Scrolling command 93 syntax checking 212 syntax coloring 59 T TABLE tag 203 Tables submenu 203 tabs converting to and from spaces 64 Tag Maker command 193 194 TBODY tag 204 TD tag 204 templates for HTML documents 191 220 scripts 313 variables 312 Text Colors Preferences 174 Text Editing Preferences 174 Text Encodings Preferences 176 Text Files Saving Preferences 179 Text Files Opening Preferences 177 text highlighting 46 Text Options pop up menu 49 text panel 148 Text Printing Preferences 179 Text Search Prefe
134. Actually even if you have never used a non Roman script system before you may still have used this menu if you have ever chosen an alternate keyboard layout such as Dvorak or a keyboard layout for a Roman language such as French However since the Roman script is suitable for several languages choosing one of these keyboard layouts still leaves you in the Roman script If you have only the Roman script installed it is possible to turn off the menu by choosing only one layout in the Keyboard control panel or the International section of the System Preferences However once you install additional script systems this menu will always appear even if you have chosen only one keyboard layout for use with the Roman script To start entering text in another script you simply choose it from the menu The icon for the associated script system appears in the menu bar in place of the American flag or the icon for your usual Roman keyboard layout Scripts that do not have very many characters have keyboard layouts that map each key on your keyboard to a character in the appropriate alphabet you can open the Key Caps desk accessory to see what keys you must press to generate each character Using Script Systems 83 84 Note Note If you are using a script with its own input method like Chinese or Japanese another menu appears to the left of the script menu to allow you to control the input method and other text encoding options You can find mo
135. BBEdit and make a new one Chapter 3 Working with Files new in 7 0 2 Note Note BBEdit can natively open files with type TEXT utxt UTF8 or PICT Of course you cannot edit PICT files in BBEdit but it will display them If you have QuickTime installed you can play movie files by opening them with BBEdit You can also have BBEdit ask QuickTime to try to open non text files by selecting the appropriate setting in the Application panel of the Preferences window BBEdit can then open image files and sounds in their own windows rather than displaying them as text If this preference is not active BBEdit will open the files in their raw condition as if they were text documents Choosing the Encoding for a Document When opening documents BBEdit will automatically recognize and appropriately handle files that use character set encodings other than Mac Roman even multi byte character sets BBEdit examines the file for any indication of the proper encoding If it finds none and you opened the file with the Open command it uses the encoding specified in the Read As pop up menu on the Open dialog Otherwise it uses the encoding specified in the If the file s encoding can t be guessed use pop up menu in the Text Files Opening panel of the Preferences window You can choose which encodings appear in both the Read As and the If the file s encoding can t be guessed use pop up menus by using t
136. BEdit Some of BBEdit s menus have icons rather than names BBEdit uses the following names for its icon menus MacPerl Mac OS 9 only Mac OS X only CVS Compiler Projector and Scripts Furthermore the New With Stationery submenu is named Stationery for purposes of attachability similarly the Perl Scripts and Perl Filters menus are named Perl Scripts and Perl Filters respectively on Mac OS 9 or Unix Scripts and Unix Filters on Mac OS X When you choose a menu item with an attached script BBEdit runs its MenuSelect handler if it has one passing it the menu name and item name of the selected menu item as parameters If no MenuSelect function is present BBEdit executes the script s run handler The MenuSelect handler can return a boolean value to indicate whether BBEdit should continue by performing the action usually invoked by the menu command false means yes true means stop after executing the script If MenuSelect returns false BBEdit will call the script s PostMenuSelect handler if it has one after it performs the menu command Here is a simple example which adds a confirmation dialog to the Save command addressed as FileeSave Note that we test the menu and item names to make sure the script is attached to the Save command f it is attached to some other command it does nothing on menuselect menuName itemName if menuName File and itemName Save then set weHan
137. BEdit Plug ins When this option is selected BBEdit makes the Tools menu available in the menu bar so that you can use BBEdit plug ins small add on programs that add functionality to BBEdit The factory supplied plug ins are part of the BBEdit application Third party BBEdit plug ins are in the BBEdit Support folder See Chapter 2 to learn more about the organization of the BBEdit Support folder or Chapter 15 for information about the factory supplied plug ins Font Menu Mark this checkbox to display a Font menu in BBEdit s menu bar Since BBEdit edits plain text most users will not need to change the font often However if you frequently edit text in more than one language you may find this option convenient Show Full Paths in Open Recent Menu Mark this checkbox to always show the complete pathname of recently opened files rather than just their names in BBEdit s Open Recent submenu If a recent file is missing only its name will appear regardless of this setting Also if two or more files have identical filenames their complete pathnames will always be shown to prevent ambiguity regardless of this setting Application Preferences 153 new in 7 0 2 Remember Dialog Box Placement Mark this checkbox to have BBEdit remember the location of the Find amp Replace dialog and most other dialogs between sessions If you turn the checkbox off BBEdit will open dialogs at a default location every time you use them When Draggin
138. BEdit s online help content including a complete PDF version of the user manual is now contained within the application package so there is no longer a separate Help folder You can access help at any time while running BBEdit by choosing an item from the Help menu In particular choosing BBEdit User Manual will open the Acrobat PDF version of the user manual instead of the Help Viewer HTML Templates This folder contains HTML document templates for use with the New HTML Document command A sample set of templates is provided which you can modify or add to as you wish Please see Chapter 11 for more information on BBEdit s HTML tools You should move or copy over any customized template or include documents that you wish to preserve Language Modules This folder contains plug in modules that tell BBEdit about new programming scripting or markup languages so that it can colorize them appropriately and generate function pop up menu listings for them Three modules are supplied with the default installation Python Setext and TeX A list of additional modules from third party developers is available on our web site The factory supplied language modules will run on both Mac OS X and Mac OS 9 Some third party language modules may need to be updated to run on Mac OS X Visit our web site for the latest information 12 Chapter 2 Installing BBEdit Upgrading new in 7 0 2 Upgrading IMPORTANT MacPerl Support This fol
139. BEdit takes advantage of Apple s Keychain Manager which is a standard component of both Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X As a security measure we do not recommend saving FTP passwords without using Keychain support If you prefer to store such information without relying on the Keychain you should consider using the bookmark facility of a stand alone FTP client or a secure information storage application such as PGP or Web Confidential Chapter 3 Working with Files Note In the Open from FTP Server dialog the Remember Password option applies only to the last FTP session that was initiated before dismissing the FTP dialog The Auto Connect option depends on this switch so if Remember Password is turned off or disabled Auto Connect will be disabled As long as the Keychain is unlocked whenever you enter a server and user name pair for which there is a record the corresponding password will be filled in automatically This will happen regardless of whether the Remember Password option in the dialog is on or off If the Keychain is locked the Remember Password option will also be disabled and you will need to retype your password every time you use the FTP dialog You can click the key icon in the FTP dialog above the Password field to unlock the Keychain or to query it for a password if the Keychain is already unlocked The Passive FTP checkbox tells BBEdit to open a connection to the FTP server in passive mode in which the server will send B
140. BEdit the number of the port to use for the session If this option is turned off BBEdit will specify the port number We recommend using passive mode when possible however not all servers or networks support it so if you encounter difficulties try turning this checkbox off The checkbox labeled Show Files Starting with tells BBEdit whether to display hidden or admin files in the chosen directory such as login forward and signature Starting a file name with a period is a Unix convention to make it invisible in most directory listings Once the connection is made you can use the Open button and the directory pop up menu to navigate through the directories just as you would navigate through the folders on your hard drive Click Delete to remove the file from the server You can use the Get Info button to reveal the size modification date and if applicable file system permissions of the selected file You can edit the file s name and click the Rename button to rename the file on the server you can also make changes to the permissions and click the Set button to change them Take care not to set the permissions such that the file becomes inaccessible to you BBEdit also supports FTP URL clippings You can make a clipping of the FTP URL for a file add the clipping to a file group and double click it and BBEdit will open the specified file for editing If the clipping contains the FTP URL for a directory BBEdit will open a new
141. By Select Name to list windows alphabetically by name or Creation Order to list them in the order they were opened in the current BBEdit session Window Stacking These icons determine how BBEdit stacks windows down and to the left straight down directly atop or down and to the right BBEdit stacks windows down and to the left by default Leave Room for Palettes When this option is on BBEdit leaves room for any open floating palettes when creating or rearranging windows if the palettes are stacked together such that at least one is against either the right hand or left hand edge of the screen This option is on by default Leave Room for Finder When these options are selected BBEdit leaves room at the right side and or the bottom of the screen so that you can see icons on the desktop These options are off by default 184 Chapter 10 Preferences CHAPTER IMPORTANT BBEdit HTML Tools This chapter describes the use of BBEdit s HTML Tools a powerful suite of utilities for creating and maintaining HTML documents and entire web sites In this chapter Introduction to the HTML Tools eee n 185 Recommended Books 186 Recommended Online Resources 186 SGML Resources 187 e What You Need 187 Confieuring the HIME Tools sais t ep Sub eR ou tog Eu EDU AR 187 Usine the ELEME T66 5575 52 e melt b ee sane a ad ae Nbre d 188 Creating a New Document 189 File Addressing 191 HIMEL lool
142. Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Note Using a Template A template is a simple text file that contains boilerplate text or HTML content that will form the foundation for the document you are creating Template files must have the file name suffix tmpl in order to be recognized When creating a template file you can convert or reuse an existing document or you can write one from scratch Simply rename the file by adding the suffix tmpl to it and then move or copy it into your active HTML Templates folder Templates are always invoked using the New Document tool Even if you want to impose a template on an existing document you still do it through New Document The Template option appears as a pop up menu at the bottom left of the New Document dialog All template files in the Templates folder appear in this menu The Default setting is not a template per se but rather a directive to create a blank HTML document framework containing whatever Title Base Meta Link SGML Prologue and so on values you specify It is always available regardless of the contents in your Templates folder Once you have specified the appropriate settings and chosen Create BBEdit will open an new Untitled window containing the full text of the selected template file If you invoke the Document tool while working on an existing document you will see a Create New Window checkbox next to the Template menu Normally this option will be on but if you deac
143. Choose the type of warnings to be issued by the HTML link checker HTML Tools Preferences 165 new in 7 0 Remote Links flags each offsite link so that it can be checked for validity manually Incorrect Pathname Case flags situations where the name of a file as specified in an HTML document does not exactly match the name of the file on disk which can cause problems when files are uploaded to servers with a case sensitive file system Folder Aliases in URL Path warns you if any file paths contain aliases rather than real folders File Out of Server Scope controls whether the link checker will issue out of server scope warnings for links that fall outside of the server scope for the document being checked In general you will want to leave this option on and make sure your web site preferences are properly configured If however you often check transient content such as help files or readme files which does not merit adding a separate site configuration you may want to turn this warning off HTML Web Sites Preferences The HTML Web Sites preferences let you tell BBEdit about the Web server where your pages will be hosted eo BBEdit Preferences These settings specify information about the Web site you re Revert Save developing for use by BBEdit s HTML site tools Application Browser Display Differences Editor Defaults File Filters File Search File Types Fonts FTP Settings Function Popup Glossary HTML Colors H
144. D Open Recent b Open Recent b Close 36W Close All Windows C86W Save FS Save All KES Save As Save As Selection Save a Copy Save a Copy Save to FTP Server OS Save to FTP Server OS Save a Copy to FTP Server 36S Save a Copy to FTP Server 36S Revert Backup Options Make Backup Now Page Setup Revert Backup Options Make Backup Now Page Setup Print 36P Print All P You can use the Shift and Option keys when you choose an item from a menu or when you use the Command key equivalents Bypassing Options Dialogs You may have noticed that commands that require additional settings to be made before they are performed appear on the menu with ellipses after their names To bypass this step and use the command with its most recent settings hold down the Option key while selecting the menu item For example Zap Gremlins in the Text menu becomes Zap Gremlins when the Option key is pressed and when chosen will zap gremlins in the frontmost text document using the current settings Keyboard Shortcuts for Commands Many of BBEdit s commands have keyboard shortcuts BBEdit lets you reassign the shortcuts for any menu item glossary entry plug in or Open Scripting Architecture OSA script to suit your own way of working To change the keyboard shortcut for any menu item choose the Set Menu Keys command in the Edit menu on Mac OS 9 or in the BBEdit Application menu on Mac OS X
145. D DIOWSOLS 222 205 090 0809 nate bes die S E eee Een C e 35 Usine otatloDeri eoe eode bed E SES Seeded es senes 35 Usine Pile Groups soeia po its VERE Eder coe ore dup 36 Creating a File Group 36 Using File Groups 37 Removing Files from a File Group 38 Making Backups xcccened cut an UNDER pF EON Ree Ea tea dte 38 Automatic Backups 39 Manual Backups 39 PANDAS qoipesuraxck erba meee ba Oeon e Coon E fade i dae RP deu 40 Options Available from the Print Dialog 41 The Printing Options Command 42 Editing Text with BBEdit 45 BASC Edi os soos y VERI EU Ep dea Geek nia ead op ae bes 46 Moving Text 46 Multiple Clipboards 47 Drag and Drop 48 Multiple UndO 35234 i meh ox pete Rate Ner anie oce inox ure s 48 WitidOw Anatomy ys d urrad chen e dae acu ntes a a ux M fecti e d 48 The Status Bar 48 The Function Pop Up Menu 50 The Split Bar 51 Cursor Movement and Text Selection 006 51 Clicking and Dragging 51 Rectangular Selection 52 Arrow Keys 52 Scrolling the View 53 The Delete Key 54 The Numeric Keypad 54 Go To Line Command 55 Function Keys 55 Text ODHBOLDS i circo bs eh o xdi D edicola ecd dete ee a d ad 56 Editing Options 57 Display Options 58 PONE S TODS ouo oso IRR E ice teach esce nidi iani dnobus 60 Text Transformations aeree ater sad eas cor I Ra ER Res tui ae 60 Balance 60 Exchange Charac
146. DE for the search paths to the current project s current target and look for files in those folders as well e If BBEdit cannot find the file in any of these places it will display a Choose Folder dialog to allow you to locate the file manually In some cases there may be more than one file with the same name in the various folders BBEdit looks in Normally BBEdit opens the first one it encounters and then stops If you want BBEdit to find all files that match the selected name be sure to select the Find All Matching Files option in the File Search preferences panel 30 Chapter 3 Working with Files Note Open File by Name If there is no selection or there is no text display view in the front window Open Selection becomes Open File by Name Choosing this command brings up a dialog in which you can specify a file name or an exact path BBEdit will open it as described above for Open Selection As with Open Selection you can specify an optional line number and can enclose the file name in angle brackets to limit the search to the default directory specified in the File Search preference panel When specifying a file in the Open File by Name dialog on Mac OS X you can use the shorthand user notation to refer to an arbitrary user s home directory for example siegel Documents bigfile c If you select the Match Wildcards checkbox in the Open File by Name dialog you can use the following wildcards in the file name Wildcard M
147. Descriptions acte abd E ca ceo de ed at Er foe 192 Tag Maker 193 Edit Tag 194 Close Current Tag 195 Balance Tags 195 Document Type 195 Character Set 195 CSS Submenu 196 Body Properties 200 Head Elements 200 Block Elements 201 Lists 203 Tables 203 Forms 204 Inline Elements 206 Phrase Elements 209 Font Style Elements 210 Frames 211 Check 211 Update 212 Includes 214 Utilities 214 Misc 215 Preview 216 The HIME Tools Palettes 2 e osdeb tos opi iore oat ap etae te res ree 216 HTML Tools Palette Tips 217 HTML Tools Palette 217 Other Palettes 218 HIME Translavion 5c odo mo X 2r mds EO ed br qu eo eds 220 Remove Tags 220 Paragraphs 220 HTML Entities 220 ionge T EE 220 Template Setup 220 Using a Template 221 Custom Mat RUD sue rom ae antiehe ee eve ae eds eS edere es 221 Introduction to the HTML Tools Please be sure to read both this introduction and the next section Configuring the HTML Tools before attempting to create Web pages using these tools Already the most powerful set of utilities ever created for the World Wide Web developer the BBEdit HTML Tools are more powerful than ever The HTML tools streamline the process of creating HTML documents help you check for common usage errors and speed up development time without sacrificing flexibility or forcing you to
148. E tags which specify the number and sizes of the desired browser window subdivisions and indicate the URLs of the files to be loaded into each Frame Set This defines a frame set a series of one or more frames You indicate whether the frame set divides the browser window vertically ROWS or horizontally COLS and then indicate the size of each frame in a comma separated list using to tell the browser to use whatever space is left over from the other specified frames Frame sets can be nested For example if you want to create a framed Web page with three rows with the middle row divided into two independent columns you would first define a frame set consisting of three rows Instead of defining the second row with a FRAME tag however you would open another lt FRAMESET gt tag there this time to specify the two columns for the middle frame which would then be specified by lt FRAME gt tags Frame This defines a frame in a frame set document You will need to specify the URL of the file to be displayed in this frame either using the button or by drag and drop If the frame will be targeted by links in another frame you will also need to give the frame a name You can optionally specify a long description for the frame choose whether the frame can be scrolled and indicate whether the user should be able to resize the frame You can also set margins and borders for the frame Borders are the visible lines between frames M
149. File Filter dialog Click Revert to undo any changes you have made to the filter Hold the Option key when you click Revert to skip the confirmation alert Temporary Filters Choose current criteria from the pop up menu in the Find amp Replace dialog to reuse the last set of criteria applied either from using a saved filter or from using the Edit button to define criteria Thus you can use filter criteria on the fly without the need to create and store a throwaway filter Editing and Deleting Filters To edit a file filter you have already defined choose it from the Filters pop up menu change it as desired and click Save Since each filter must have a unique name saving it will replace the old version of the filter To delete a filter entirely visit the File Filters panel in the Preferences window You can also create or modify filters there Multi File Replacing If you want to replace only some occurrences of text in multiple files you can simply do a File by File or Batch Search as described earlier in this chapter and then use the Replace commands in the Find menu to change only the instances you want to change However BBEdit can also change all occurrences of a string in a group of files with one command Globally replacing text in more than one file works the same as replacing it in a single file The only possible complication is that if you make a mistake it can have much wider consequences If you are not sure
150. Ger Infor cos tyes ee he tb Osi s P a EU Soe ae 92 Reveal in Emde az a 5a keer Ss era headers weed ud bri nea ethics ater 92 ZOOM sx odio E Ra oo MSG tebe Royale dixo De dated ewe saul aoe ree 93 Sene to DacKu sape de ace aded Ge tin arose dart alia WG ete E ae A 93 Exchange with Next 223009 da vos eu ere mapas bei Sans 93 Syr chro epo la es 4k ae EU hd pa at OC E Rohr Lobos 93 Window Names caesos at quanta d ep c ere dba Ecuador er P da NA Kb E eed 93 Window Menu The Window menu provides easy centralized access to all of BBEdit s tool palettes and floating windows in addition to offering commands that you can use to access and organize editing and results windows on screen BBEdit also offers several preference options in the Applications panel of the Preferences window so that you have greater control over the listing of open documents You can choose whether items are grouped by window kind or are all listed together without dividers You can also elect to sort windows by name or in order of creation Please refer to Chapter 10 for additional details The Quick Find command once located in the Window menu is now in the Search menu See Chapter 7 Searching for details Minimize Window This command puts the frontmost window into the Mac OS X Dock Click the window icon in the Dock to restore the window Hold down the Option key and this command will become Minimize All Windows If you are not using Mac OS X this command wil
151. Markup Check Document Syntax Window Send To Back Markup Check Balance Tags File Reveal Selection Search Enter Replace String Search Quick Search Listing by Default Key Equivalents 299 Key Command Cmd Opt Search Go to Line Cmd Opt L Edit Select Paragraph Cmd Opt M Markup Edit Tag Cmd Opt N File New Disk Browser Cmd Opt P File Print All Cmd Opt R CodeWarrior Run Cmd Opt S File Save All Cmd Opt T Markup Utilities Translate Cmd Opt W File Close All Windows Cmd Opt Text Rewrap Quoted Text Cmd Opt Search Find Definition Cmd Opt Edit Text Options Cmd Opt Text Exchange Words Cmd Opt Text Decrease Quote Level Cmd Opt Text Increase Quote Level Cmd Opt Zoom Window Full Screen Cmd Opt Search Replace All Cmd Opt Text Hard Wrap Cmd Opt down arrow Search Go to Next Error Cmd Opt up arrow Search Go to Previous Error Cmd Opt Shift F Markup Utilities Format Cmd Opt Shift I CodeWarrior Set Breakpoint amp Go Cmd Opt Shift N File New with Clipboard Cmd Opt Shift S File Save a Copy to FTP Server Cmd Opt Shift W File Close All Documents Cmd Shift A Edit Select None Cmd Shift C Edit Copy amp Append Cmd Shift G Search Find Again reverse Cmd Shift H Search Find Selection reverse Cmd Shift I CodeWarrior Set Breakpoint Cmd Shift J Search Go to Center Line 300 Appendix A Command Reference Key Command Cmd Shift N File New with selection Cmd Shift
152. No Modifier Option Command Control Up Up one line Up one screen Start of scroll view up document Down Down one line Down one screen End of document scroll view down Left Left one character Left one word Start of line scroll view left Right Right one Right one word End of line scroll view right character 52 Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Holding down the Shift key extends the selection For example pressing Shift Option Right Arrow selects the word to the right of the insertion point If you are used to a word processor or text editor that lets you use Command key combinations to page through your document you may want to swap the meaning of the Option and Command keys 1 Open the Preferences window by choosing Preferences from the BBEdit menu on Mac OS X or from the Edit menu on Mac OS 9 2 Select the Text Editing preferences in the list on the left in the Preferences window 3 Under the heading Exchange Command and Option Key Behavior select Horizontally Vertically or both as you prefer When active these settings change the sense of the up and down arrow keys as follows No Modifier Option Command Up Up one line Start of document Up one screen Down Down one line End of document Down one screen Left Left one Start of line Left one word character Right Right one End of line Right one word character When the Shift key is held down the arrow keys behave as described in the table above except that the
153. Numbers 281 e Configure TeX Coloring 281 Convert to ASCII 281 Educate Quotes 282 e Hex Dump 282 Prefix Suffix Lines 282 Process Duplicate Lines 283 Process Lines Containing 284 e Salary Adjust 285 Sort Lines 285 Un Comment 286 Obsolete TIue Inss o sspe Ee at eed oul Gute ta idet ees 286 ThirdsParty Plug In eee a bite earth eee Sani oe ide Redes dee 286 Finding More Plug Ins 286 Plug In Compatibility 286 Mac OS X Plug Ins 287 Command Reference 289 Keyboard Shortcuts for Commands 00 eee eee 289 Assigning Keys to Menu Commands seseees 290 Available Key Combinations 290 Listing by Menu and Command Name 29 Listing by Default Key Equivalents 0 298 publ ee Mu xal EISE LM ec E 301 Editing Shortcuts 303 Mouse Comand S125 45 40 iai sca pais dob ene ee du eases 303 Arrow and Delete Keys aac pops es eode weed amas ais im pueda 304 Emacs Sev Bindi ais dst va o SU IR NOGCRA ROI dere aC nee end 305 Using universal argument 306 Placeholders and Include Files 307 PIaeeliold ES atinch aioe teeren eranan aq d te dace ee 307 Using the RELATIVE Placeholder 310 nce a l c ose Ett ond eee eee detecta Sere ere domas 311 Simple Includes 311 Persistent Includes 311 Include Files with Variables 312 Including AppleScripts 313 Including Perl or Python Scripts 314 Other Include No
154. O File Open from FTP Server Cmd Shift P File Print One Copy Cmd Shift S File Save to FTP Server Cmd Shift V Edit Paste Previous Clipboard Cmd Shift W File Close amp Delete Cmd Shift X Edit Cut amp Append Cmd Shift Z Edit Redo Cmd Shift Edit Printing Options Cmd Shift Text Shift Left One Space Cmd Shift Text Shift Right One Space Ctl Search Go to Next Placeholder Ctu Shift Search Go to Previous Placeholder Ctl Tab Switch to Header Source File Ctl Edit Previous Clipboard Ctl Edit Next Clipboard 301 302 Appendix A Command Reference APPENDIX Editing Shortcuts In BBEdit you can perform many editing functions including word selection or deletion directly from the keyboard Chapter 4 contains complete details on BBEdit s text editing features This appendix provides a quick reference to available keyboard and mouse shortcuts for word selection and deletion In this appendix Molise COIDITBFOS 3 ar d roan a S UPC eo S Ebo 303 ATEoW and Delete NEV Sins sa ab et tse ca he IOS IIR US od ce Fe d RTL D e 304 Emacs Key Bindings esa oes amo 9 Rp tae eae VRCE ACE aes te 305 Using universal argument 306 Mouse Commands No Modifier Shift Click move insertion point extend selection Double click select word extend selection to word Triple click select line Triple clicking is the same as clicking in a line and then choosing the Select Line command from the Edit menu Holding d
155. Other Other m t Options U Use File Filter current criteria 7 Edit 3 Type the string you are looking for in the Search For text field 4 Type the replace string if any in the Replace With text field Be sure to read the section Multi File Replacing later in this chapter if you use the replacement features 5 Mark any checkboxes in the middle part of the dialog box that you want to apply to your search To learn more about these options see Search Settings earlier in this chapter 6 To have BBEdit collect the results of the search in a search results window select the Batch Find checkbox Otherwise BBEdit searches for the search string file by file 7 If you want BBEdit to find only files that do not contain the search string select the Exclude Matches checkbox 8 Use the controls in the bottom part of the dialog to specify the set of files to search See Specifying the Search Set later in this chapter for more information 9 Click one of the buttons along the right side of the dialog box to begin the search 100 Chapter 7 Searching The table below tells you what each of the buttons does This button Does this Find Batch Find on Not available when the multi file search option is selected Batch Find off Finds the first occurrence of the search string in the first file of the set Find All Finds all the occurrences of the search string in all the files in the set Ba
156. Search checkbox and everything below it The section Multi File Searching later in this chapter discusses this part of the dialog box 2 Type the string you are looking for in the Search For text field You can use special characters in the Search For text field to search for tabs line breaks or page breaks See Special Characters later in this section BBEdit remembers the last 12 search terms you used since launching the application If you are searching for something you recently searched for you can choose it from the pop up menu above the Search For field Click the button to enter the document selection in the Search For field 3 Type the replace string if any in the Replace With text field BBEdit also remembers the last 12 replace terms you used since launching the application These appear in the pop up menu above the Replace With field Click the button to enter the document selection in the Replace With field 4 Mark any checkboxes in the middle part of the dialog box that you want to apply to your search For more info about these options see Search Settings later in this section 5 Click one of the buttons along the right side of the dialog box Chapter 7 Searching Note Note The size of both the search and replace strings is limited only by available memory However the memory requirements for searching multi byte text files are generally at least double those for single byte text
157. TML Markup HTML Palette HTML Preview HTML Toals HTML Web Sites Languages Software Update Spelling Startup State Status Bar Text Colors T store barebones com Add Y www harebones com Change Remove Make Default You can now define as many separate web sites as you like The Add button brings up a Web Site Settings dialog see below for adding a new site to the list and specifying its properties When a site is selected in the list the Change button displays this same Web Site Settings dialog allowing you to modify the existing settings for that site the Remove button deletes the selected site from the list The list must always include at least one site the Remove button is disabled when only one site is listed preventing you from deleting that last site The check mark identifies one site in the list as the default site you can change this setting by selecting another site and clicking the Make Default button 166 Chapter 10 Preferences All of the HTML Tools commands that generate or operate on links such as Tag Maker and Check Links will recognize and take account of the presence of multiple sites in the HTML Web Sites preference panel see the descriptions of these tools in Chapter 11 for further details The Web Site Settings dialog displayed by the Add and Change buttons is shown below Web Site Settings Site Name Example Site Web Server Name http www example com Site Pat
158. TML Tools 217 Dreamweaver 215 DT tag 203 dynamic menus 3 Edit Tag command 194 Edit Task Comment command 272 editing text 46 shortcuts 303 Editor Defaults Preferences 155 Educate Quotes plug in 282 EM tag 210 Emacs Key Bindings 175 305 encoding 25 27 85 176 178 318 End key 56 Entab command 64 Enter key 4 Enter Search String command 112 error browser 253 escape codes 64 117 Escape key 4 Exchange with Next command 93 exclude matches 100 expanding tabs 57 extending the selection 53 55 extensions see plug ins external spell checker 79 F F keys 55 Favorites 17 103 FIELDSET tag 205 file filters 107 File Filters Preferences 157 file groups 21 36 file list panel 148 file placeholder 226 File Search Preferences 157 File Types Preferences 159 file_extension placeholder 226 File pop up menu 49 Filters 261 filters file 107 Find amp Mark All command 71 Find amp Mark command 49 Find amp Replace All Matches 102 110 Find amp Replace All Matches command 113 Find Again command 97 112 Find AII 97 101 Find command 95 112 Find Definition command 114 Find dialog 96 Find Differences command 114 Find in Next File command 102 113 Find in Reference command 114 Find Selection command 112 finding text see searching floating windows ASCII table 88 Glossary 223 HTML Entities 219 HTML Tools 188 216 218 Web Safe Colors 219 window list 89 font for printing 41 FONT tag 208 Fonts menu 60 foreign tex
159. This section describes the built in spelling checker To learn how to configure BBEdit to use an external spelling checker see Using an External Spelling Checker later in this chapter The checker matches each word in the document against the words in its dictionaries If a word is not in a dictionary the spelling checker offers a suggested correction Sometimes the questioned word may actually be spelled correctly in those cases you can add the word to the User Dictionary or you can skip the word 1 Choose the Check Spelling command from the Text menu BBEdit opens the Check Spelling dialog box Check Spelling Checking main c Mi Skip ALL CAPS M Start At Top Guesses Questioned Word M LLL Skip All Add Replace With Replace Replace All r Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit 2 Set spelling options Select Selection Only to limit spelling checking to the selected text Select Start At Top to check from the beginning of the text otherwise BBEdit checks from the insertion point to the end of the document Select Skip ALL CAPS to avoid checking words consisting of only capital letters Note that these settings persist across runs of the application 3 Click Start to begin checking BBEdit scans the text Words that are not in a dictionary appear in the Questioned Word text field The text box in the middle of the dialog shows the questioned word in context BBEdit lists guesses f
160. URL for the current document in its current location The relative path from the current file back up to the Local Server Root inserts a path of the form J to tell the browser to back up to the site s root directory Path to the Local Site Root as specified in your HTML Web Site preferences The file s path relative to the Local Server Root specified in the HTML Web Site preferences to the current file URL of your Web server as specified in your HTML Web Site preferences Short Date Day month year e g 07 10 01 Returns the login short name instead of the full user name on Mac OS X or the owner name from the File Sharing control panel on Mac OS 9 Current time in the format specified in the Date amp Time control panel Title of the current document as entered using the New HTML Document command Placeholders 309 310 Placeholder Replaced By USERNAME The owner name from the File Sharing control panel on Mac OS 9 or the currently logged in user on Mac OS X YEARNUM The current year e g 2002 Using the RELATIVE Placeholder When dealing with large web sites that have multiple content folders it is often useful to specify relative rather than absolute paths for linking documents The RELATIVE placeholder allows you to easily generate relative references in templates and include files by providing a virtual path that uses the construction to back up the hierarchy to t
161. Use the companion Un Comment Settings plug in to set up the comment strings for the supported languages Obsolete Plug Ins The Columnize Concatenate Machine Info Make Prototypes Reverse Lines Send PostScript and VOODOO Shim plug ins are no longer part of the distribution package You can use the Insert File Contents command in BBEdit 7 0 2 which allows selection of multiple files to perform the same function formerly provided by the Concatenate plug in see page 71 The capabilities formerly provided by the Tools menu commands Cut Copy Clear Lines Containing have now been subsumed by the Process Lines Containing plug in see page 284 Third Party Plug Ins In addition to the standard plug ins described above a wide variety of BBEdit plug ins are available from third parties Finding More Plug Ins An extensive though not exhaustive listing of plug ins is available in the support section of the Bare Bones Software web site http www barebones com support plugins html Plug In Compatibility Any third party plug in which does not present a floating palette and does not explicitly include support for multi byte text will be disabled if the front document window contains multi byte or Unicode text However BBEdit cannot determine whether plug ins that do present floating palettes are capable of safely processing multi byte text and will not disable them so you should exercise caution when using such plug ins on multi
162. User name Bernard Rubble Occupation Actor Spouse Betty You would use this search pattern a z t a z and this replacement pattern VENGA ZEN Matching Delimited Strings In some cases you may want to match all the text that appears between a pair of delimiters One way to do this is to bracket the search pattern with the delimiters like this ox e This works well if you have only one delimited string on the line But suppose the line looked like this apples oranges kiwis mangos penguins The search string above would match the entire line This is another instance of the longest match behavior of BBEdit s grep engine which was discussed previously Once again non greedy quantifiers come to the rescue The following pattern will match delimited strings 9p Marking Structured Text Suppose you are reading a long text document that does not have a table of contents but you notice that all the sections are numbered like this 3 2 7 Prehistoric Cartoon Communities 5 19 001 Restaurants of the Mesozoic Examples 131 132 You can use a grep pattern to create marks for these headings which will appear in the Mark pop up menu Choose Find amp Mark All from the Mark pop up menu in the status bar Then decide how many levels you want to mark In this example the headings always have at least two digits and at most four Use this pattern to find the headings Nd N Nd N
163. When performing a Replace All with Wrap Around selected the replace is transformed into Start at Top to allow for performance optimizations Search Backwards When this checkbox is selected BBEdit searches from the insertion point to the beginning of the file Otherwise BBEdit searches from the insertion point to the end of the file Unavailable if Start at Top is checked Search Selection Only When this checkbox is selected BBEdit searches only the selected text Otherwise BBEdit searches the entire document Unavailable if Wrap Around or Start at Top is checked Extend Selection When this checkbox is selected BBEdit extends the selection from the current insertion point to the end of the matched search string Case Sensitive When this checkbox is selected BBEdit treats upper and lowercase letters as different letters Otherwise BBEdit treats upper and lowercase letters as if they were the same Match Entire Words When this checkbox is selected BBEdit matches the search string only if it is surrounded in the document text by word break characters white space or punctuation Otherwise BBEdit matches the search string anywhere in the text Multi File Search When this checkbox is selected BBEdit searches a set of files for the search string See Multi File Searching below to learn more about searching in several files Batch Find When this checkbox is selected and you are doing a multi file search BBEdit collect
164. abase Projector does this by checking out another copy comparing the two files and then deleting the copy Working with Projector SourceServer 271 272 Get Revision Gets a revision for the current document or for some other file The Get Revision dialog appears Get Revision none selected fH F File Revision Options 1 Put History in CKID f Touch Modification Date W Verify Contents mh Cancel Get Revision works on files that have been checked out or on which Modify Read Only has been used It will perform a checkout or Modify Read Only operation if necessary and notifies you that you will lose your changes File This field defaults to the frontmost window s file Click the File button to choose a different file or drag a file from the Finder to the rectangle displaying the file path Revision Lists the available revisions of the document Put History in CKID Check this box to store the revision data in the documents ckid resource as well as in the database If this is done the Revision list will display a list of all revisions without having to check in the Projector database Touch Modification Date Check this box to set the source file s modification date and time to the current date and time Verify Contents Check this box to make sure the file you are checking out is actually the same file as the one in the Projector database Projector does this by checking out another copy comparing
165. ability to perform keyword substitution combined with an option to run OSA scripts and insert their results further extends its flexibility and usefulness In this chapter The Glossary Command 2o eura Hae nonere cere a net ne dade kiaia 223 Language Sensitivity of the Glossary lees 224 Manually Sorting the Glossary iaces ne 2e da b eor Eni e eiue ees 224 Inserting Glossary lems esis vnd ace ERU dace cech Rs 224 Assigning Key Equivalents to Glossary Items llle 225 Glossary SUDSUIUNONS aane orm ERROR REOR e Oe ERA 226 Using OSA Scripts with the Glossary eee 227 The Glossary Command Choosing the Glossary command from the Palettes submenu of the Window menu opens the Glossary floating window shown below This window lists the contents of the active glossary set plus the contents of the Universal Items glossary set and any glossary items contained directly within the Glossary folder that is which do not belong to a set Names that are too long to fit within the width of the window are truncated with ellipses o Glossary Set HTML Glossary html r3 F HTML Glassary html Anchor Bigger Font Bold Center Italicize Link Page Template Y Universal Items Current Date amp Time Hovering the mouse over such a truncated name displays a tool tip showing the full name If you hold down the Option key the tool tip will appear instantly with no hovering delay Names that fit entirely w
166. acPerl Mailing Lists http www macperl com depts mlists html http lists perl org Picking Up Perl a freely redistributable Perl tutorial book by Bradley M Kuhn http www ebb org PickingUpPerl comp lang perl misc comp lang perl moderated Usenet news groups Python is a portable interpreted object oriented programming language originally developed by Guido van Rossum If you are interested in learning Python consider the following books Learning Python by Mark Lutz amp David Ascher O Reilly and Associates 1999 ISBN 1 56592 464 9 Programming Python 2nd Edition by Mark Lutz O Reilly and Associates 2001 ISBN 0 596 00085 5 Internet resources for Python Python home page http www python org Python Cookbook http aspn activestate com ASPN Cookbook Python comp lang python Usenet news group Line Endings and Perl Unix Scripts To execute scripts the script interpreter for any given language requires source code to be encoded with native line endings Macintosh line breaks for MacPerl and Unix line breaks for Unix Perl and the other shell scripting languages on Mac OS X BBEdit will automatically make sure that the script source sent to each interpreter matches its line ending expectations This means that on Mac OS 9 BBEdit will send scripts to MacPerl with Macintosh line endings regardless of the line endings of the file on disk and on Mac OS X BBEdit will always send scripts to Perl Python and other s
167. actually an enhanced replacement for Apple s Script Editor featuring variable monitoring step trace debugging an object browser for an application s objects and much more Scripter http www mainevent com scripter html The original enhanced script editor for the Macintosh Scripter also features extensive debugging capabilities and also comes with ScriptBase a database that lets you easily store large data items persistently BBEdit and AppleScript BBEdit has been scriptable for years though we have continually worked to improve its level of scripting refinement BBEdit has long provided access to scripts in its menu bar and more recently through a floating Scripts palette In BBEdit 5 0 many BBEdit plug ins became scriptable as did the HTML authoring tools BBEdit now takes a further step forward by being both attachable and recordable See the later section Attaching Scripts to Menu Items for complete details on BBEdit s attachability Recording Scripts for BBEdit Any language is easier to read than to write easier to understand than to speak AppleScript is no different That s because even though all the commands it uses are English words arranged in ways that more or less make grammatical sense you still have to know or find out from the application s dictionary exactly which words to use and what order they should go in But it is easy to get started making scripts by recording them First launch both BBE
168. ading or Trailing respectively or runs of more than one space 5 Click Compare to perform the comparison If the two files are different BBEdit tiles the windows for the files side by side and opens a Differences window below them E index html index html gi Zu aJi MU E FE ALY ee ARE mmm mm lt DOCTERE HTFL PUBLIC WSC DTD HAL 4 H2 7EN l DRCTYPE HIAL PUBLIC W3C DTD HIAL 4 207 EN hiipi wes v3 vor TA 1958 RE bem 400 1990590 226 et ick ad hktpz jee wo arg TR 1590 5EC hbs 1404 19559 et ick ed in l gt him xard tad wt itlesBREGLE Secreta Ei ble xtitlsWelccme to my sleali tb lee etu ee gererobor cuntents BBEdiL amp 5 gt metu rames generutor pontents EBEdit 6 5 gt Style tupea text css tyle tupez tast cs2 xl x Wimpurt odditional oss p inport cddittonal csz Bop Bop j L bargin iem margin iem i rx t 35 er x font fomily Helwetica sans serif font fumily Helvetica sans serif line height 1 5em line height 1 5em background wie backs cured unless color 034 color 038 font size Bem font size Bem 4sty e a aty les heat x h eock body body AL SEEGLE Tips ond Tricks hl hlsxBEEdib Tipa aed TEickz nl ee xf If you bove a scrolling wheel mosse try it in BBEdik s About Boe in Pec 05 I you have scrolling wheel mouse try it in EBEdik z About Box in Moc US aps p gt p ills Did you nobios Ehe About Box anisekion con
169. after Checking In 3 Everything v Verify Contents E Cancer The New Project command skips over files named DS Store and FBCIndex folders named FBCLockFolder and invisible files like Icon M If for some perverse reason you want these files checked in the Check In command will allow you to do so Save Project As Click the Choose button to specify the location of the database usually on a server volume Search Folder Click the Choose button to choose the folder that contains your source files or drag the folder from the Finder to the gray box Scan Nested Folders Check this box to scan all subfolders of the selected folder for files to include in the new project Working with Projector SourceServer 273 Skip Folders Check this box to have BBEdit skip any files whose names are enclosed in parentheses when scanning Checking In Check the boxes for the types of files you want to add to the project You can choose text files resource files or all files Keep Modifiable Check this box to allow you to continue to edit the file after it has been added to the project Use this function when you wish to record a revision but are not yet finished working on the file Touch after Checking In Check this box to set the source file s modification date and time to the current date and time Verify Contents Check this box to make verify the contents of the file after adding it to the Projector database
170. ake a snapshot of a document at any time to make it easier to revert to previous versions Starting with version 6 0 BBEdit uses a new format for its backup preferences that is not readable by any previous version If you open a document containing old backup preferences they will be converted into the new format immediately upon opening BBEdit names backup files with the same name as the original file and appends the date and a sequence number For example the first backup made on August 10 1996 of My Text File would be named My Text File 8 10 96 1 The name of the original may be shortened if the date and sequence number would make the name of the backup file longer than 31 characters Versions of BBEdit prior to 6 1 named backup files with dates separated by for example My Text File 8 10 96 1 This has been changed to avoid conflicts with Unix file naming conventions The Text Files Saving panel of the Preferences window includes an option that allows you to specify the default backup options for new files and for files that do not have state information See Chapter 10 for more details You can override this default on a file by file basis or manually back up a file at any time A document must be saved and named before you can set its backup options or make a backup manually If the file being backed up contains Projector version control information this information is removed from the copy If an error occu
171. alignment and the character offset to the first alignment character in the line HTML Tool Descriptions 203 204 TD TH These commands inserts a table data cell element or a heading cell element respectively Both have the same options though most browsers render TH elements differently from TD elements You can specify the width and height of the cell the number of rows or columns it should span its vertical and horizontal alignment including alignment to a character and the offset to the first such character whether the text in the cell should be permitted to wrap the background color of the cell and the scope of the header information in this cell if any You can also specify the axes an abbreviated version of the cell s content and which header cells contain information about the current cell Many of the less familiar and infrequently used attributes have use in certain applications such as speech accessibility To provide maximum accessibility for tabular data we suggest you consult the HTML 4 specification Caption This tag specifies a caption for a table You may also optionally specify the caption s vertical alignment Colgroup Col These tags are used to define column and column groups Browsers that understand HTML 4 tables can for example be told to format a number of columns the same way or to place rules between column groups using this construction The contents of a column group may be one or more lt COL gt
172. amp qunt 38 amp amp amp 0 BD Blt x 62 amp gt gt 192 amp Agrave A 183 amp Acute A 194 BAcirc A 195 amp Atilde A 186 amp A uml A 197 amp Aring A I Entities can be inserted by name amp copy is the copyright symbol or number amp 169 for by choosing the desired method from the small pop up menu at the top of the HTML Entities palette We suggest inserting entities by name since they are more readable unless browser compatibility requires use of the decimal versions Double click an entity name to insert it into the active document or click once to select the desired entity and then click Insert The list of entities presented in the HTML Entities palette is now sortable by decimal value name case insensitive so amp ecaute and amp Eacute are grouped together Or character sorted by the character position after all diacriticals have been stripped so that all a s are grouped and so on Click on a column label to set the sort order accordingly The default is to sort by decimal value Since Mac OS X offers a larger set of Unicode glyphs than Mac OS 9 BBEdit will always draw the Unicode character corresponding to an entity on Mac OS X This means that you will see fewer undefined characters in the list Web Safe Colors The Web Safe Colors palette displays the 216 colors that display properly in Web browsers on all computers running in 256 color mode The colors are based
173. an 65 characters n fact it s so long it goes off the right edge of the window And this is another short line 4 3 beu BBEdit joins all the lines together to form a paragraph and then wraps the text to the 65 character margin The Paragraph Indentation buttons let you indent paragraphs after they have been wrapped e Flush Left does not indent paragraphs at all e First Line Only indents the first line by one tab stop The rest of the paragraph is flush against the left edge of the window e All Lines indents all lines in the paragraph by one tab stop e Reverse Indent places the first line in the paragraph flush against the left edge of the window and indents all other lines in the paragraph by one tab stop e Same As First Line indents all lines to the same indentation as the first line of the selection or document Mark the Relative to First Line checkbox to make any paragraph indents relative to the original indent of the first line of the selection or document If you want paragraph indents to be relative to the left margin of the document make sure this checkbox is not marked Click the Wrap button to perform the Hard Wrap command Click the Don t Wrap button to save the settings without changing the text If you hold down the Option key as you choose the Hard Wrap command BBEdit uses the last Hard Wrap settings to perform the operation without displaying a dialog box The Mark Submenu A marker is a selecti
174. an add new suffixes to map to existing languages or by installing third party language plug ins add syntax coloring support for new languages as well All the specific languages that BBEdit recognizes and the suffixes or extensions it expects for them are listed in the Languages preference panel and suffix mappings can also be changed there You can choose the colors that BBEdit uses for syntax coloring in the Text Colors preference panel BBEdit will now recognize and syntax color VBScript embedded within HTML via the 906 96 and lt SCRIPT gt lt SCRIPT gt tags Text Options 59 IMPORTANT Note Note 60 Font amp Tabs You can choose the font font size text style and tab spacing for a window by choosing Font amp Tabs from the Text menu The Font amp Tabs dialog appears Font amp Tabs Font Monaco HH Size 9 9 HH Tabs I spaces Cancel 8 You can choose the desired font font size and style using controls in this dialog You can also tell BBEdit how many spaces occur between tab stops The chosen display style will be used for all text in the window BBEdit does not support the use of selective text styles The changes you make here affect only the active document This dialog s settings will be saved with the document if you choose BBEdit State information when saving To set the default font size style and tab information for new documents or for documents that do not have a saved state
175. aracters are not displayed in the window You can also insert a divider by including an empty folder whose name ends with the string The folder can be named anything so it sorts where you want it These conventions are the same as those used by the utilities FinderPop and OtherMenu Attaching Scripts to Menu Items BBEdit now lets you attach scripts to menu items By this we mean that you can write scripts that BBEdit automatically calls before or after performing a menu command For example if you want BBEdit s Open From FTP Server command to launch your favorite FTP client you can simply attach a script to that menu item Scripts can return a value that tells BBEdit whether to continue with the command that was selected or to cancel the operation in which case only the script is executed Scripts attached to BBEdit menu items are stored in the Menu Scripts folder which should be inside the BBEdit Support folder These files should be compiled scripts not script applications Scripts are named to indicate which menu item they go with first the name of the menu or the submenu upon which the item is immediately located then a bullet e Option 8 character then the name of the menu item For example to attach a script to the Open From FTP Server menu item you would name it FileeOpen From FIP Server while to attach a script to the New Document menu item you would name it Newe Text Document 248 Chapter 13 Scripting B
176. arch Menu Reference This section describes all of the commands in the Search menu Find Opens the Find amp Replace dialog You can set the search and replace strings choose searching options and for a multi file search specify the set of files to search Quick Search Opens the Quick Search window You can use this window to interactively search for text strings as described in the previous section Find Again Uses the previous settings of the Find amp Replace dialog to search for the next occurrence of the search string Hold down the Shift key to search in the opposite direction from the current search direction For example if you have set the Backwards option in the Find amp Replace dialog holding down Shift while performing a Find Again will search forward in the document Find Selection Uses the selected text as the search string and finds the next occurrence of the selected text This command is the same as using the Enter Search String command followed by the Find Again command Hold down the Shift key to search in the opposite direction from the current search direction just as for Find Again Hold down the Option and Command keys as you double click on a word to search for the next occurrence of that word Enter Search Replace String Choose the Enter Search String command to enter the currently selected text into the Find amp Replace dialog as the search string without opening the dialog This command do
177. ard to literal text set contents of clipboard 3 to foobar To set the text in a clipboard to text represented by an object specifier set contents of clipboard 3 to selection of window 2 To copy the contents of one clipboard to another set contents of clipboard 5 to clipboard 3 or to set the current clipboard to the contents of a different clipboard thus making it exportable to the system clipboard set current clipboard to clipboard 3 as text or finally with even less typing involved set current clipboard to clipboard 5 To make any clipboard the current clipboard select it select clipboard 5 Working with Scripts The Scripts menu left in BBEdit s menu bar contains several commands It also lists all OSA scripts present in the Scripts folder within the BBEdit Support folder providing a quick way to access frequently used scripts You can place scripts within subfolders up to 4 levels deep of the Scripts folder to organize them Scripts written for use in the menu should be saved as compiled script documents not script applications Scripts Menu In addition to the list of available scripts the Scripts menu provides the following commands Open Script Editor Choose this item to switch to your preferred AppleScript editor as chosen in the Tools panel of the Preferences window If the script editor is not running BBEdit launches it Open Scripting Dictionary Choose this item to switch to your preferred AppleS
178. argins determine how far each frame s content appears from its border or from the window edge No Frames HTML markup included between the lt NOFRAMES gt and NOFRAMES tags is displayed by browsers that do not support frames This is where you should include a link to a non frame or text only version of the site Although many current browsers support frames some users do not like the feature and intentionally disable it in their browser Check The Check submenu contains utilities for finding errors in your HTML markup and document links You can run syntax or link checks on the current document a specified folder or the current site as defined in the HTML Web Sites preference panel You can also perform a Balance Tags operation on the current document HTML Tool Descriptions 211 212 When you are checking a folder or a site using these tools a dialog like the one below appears Check Folder Syntax none selected B C Skip Folders wi Check Nested Folders The pop up menu to the right of the path box includes all of the web sites that you have specified in the HTML Web Sites preference panel choosing any of these selects its designated site root folder for checking The Other entry on the pop up menu displays an Open dialog allowing you to navigate to and choose any other desired folder You can also drag a folder from the Finder directly into the path box The Skip Folders checkbox specifies that subfo
179. arkers 70 Clearing Markers 70 Using Grep to Set Markers 71 Thede toubier s d so estere Co edo Se tar he aetna ene E 71 Inserting Files 71 e Inserting a Folder Listing 72 Inserting Paths 72 Inserting a Toolbox Call Template 72 Inserting a Page Break 72 Comparitie Text Pues ss si ina area ences white dep ora we a a be ee du 73 Multi File Compare Options 75 Using the 5pelling Checkers s dudari ereot ee eae 76 Checking Spelling 76 Selecting Active Dictionaries 78 Editing the User Dictionary 78 Using an External Spelling Checker 79 45 46 Note Basic Editing BBEdit behaves like most Macintosh word processors and text editors Characters that you type in an active window appear at the insertion point a vertical blinking bar You can click and drag the mouse to select several characters or words and the selected text is highlighted in the system highlight color eoo Es untitled text This Line of text is nat selected This is the selected text Hn additional Line Q DF If you select some text and then type whatever you type replaces the selected text To delete selected text press the Delete key or choose Clear from the Edit menu If you have a keyboard with a numeric keypad on it you can press the Clear key on the keypad to delete the selected text In addition to clicking and dragging you can use three selection commands in the Edit menu to select text
180. articular purpose In no event will Bare Bones Software Inc be liable for any damages including lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damages even if Bare Bones Software Inc is advised of the possibility of such damages or for any claim by you or any third party General Terms This Agreement can only be modified by a written agreement signed by you and Bare Bones Software Inc and changes from the terms and conditions of this Agreement made in any other manner will be of no effect If any portion of this Agreement shall be held invalid illegal or unenforceable the validity legality and enforceability of the remainder of the Agreement shall not in any way be affected or impaired thereby This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of The Commonwealth of Massachusetts without giving effect to conflict of laws provisions thereof As required by United States export regulations you shall not permit export of the program or any direct products thereof to any country to which export is then controlled by the United States Office of Export Administration unless you have that agency s prior written approval Use duplication and disclosure by the United States Government of the program or any part thereof is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision g 3 of Rights in Data General Clause in Federal Acquisition Regulations FAR 52 227 14 the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights Clause in FAR 52
181. aseline Superscript This command marks the selected characters as a superscript raised above the baseline Phrase Elements Phrase elements are HTML tags that mark sentences or phrases within a block element such as a paragraph with certain content related styles such as emphasis strong emphasis citation and so on Indirectly this determines the displayed format of the enclosed text although exactly what emphasis and so on mean is left up to the browser or the stylesheet Abbreviation The enclosed text is an abbreviation Acronym The enclosed text is an acronym Citation The enclosed text is a citation of another document Computer Code The enclosed text is computer source code Deleted Text This command inserts a block formatted to indicate that the enclosed text has been deleted usually with a horizontal line through it that is struck out You may optionally specify a citation indicating a reference to another file and a date and time HTML Tool Descriptions 209 210 Defined Term The enclosed text is term defined in a glossary Emphasis The text should be displayed with visual emphasis most browsers interpret this as italic text Inserted Text This command inserts a block formatted to indicate that the enclosed text has been inserted usually by underlining the text You may optionally specify a citation indicating a reference to another file and a date and time Input Text Kbd
182. at can be saved to disk and opened later Note that this does not mean a document must be saved to a file only that it could be Asarule documents and windows are associated with each other but it is important to remember that there is not a one to one correspondence between windows and documents For example the About box is a window which has no document associated with it Furthermore in current versions of the application there is no such thing as a document with no associated window Here is a general overview of the object classes used in BBEdit Classes of Windows e window the basic window class contains properties that can be fetched and set for any window on screen position size and so forth e palette the palette class refers to windows that float above all others on the screen the HTML tools palette scripts list and so on Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit e text window the text window class provides properties which are specific to text editing windows as on screen entities These properties pertain mostly to the display of text in the window show invisibles auto indent and so on In addition to the text editing specific properties the basic window properties are also accessible e group window provides a way to reference windows corresponding to open file groups A group window does not present any properties beyond the basic window class but provides a way to differentiate file group windows from other type
183. atch any character except a return But what if you only want to match a literal dot If you escape the dot it will only match another literal dot character in your text So most characters match themselves and even the special characters will match themselves if they are preceded by a backslash BBEdit s grep syntax coloring helps make this clear When passing grep patterns to BBEdit via AppleScript be aware that both the backslash and double quote characters have special meaning to AppleScript In order to pass these through correctly you must escape them in your script Thus to pass r for a carriage return to BBEdit you must write r in your AppleScript string Writing Search Patterns 117 118 Wildcards Match Types of Characters These special characters or metacharacters are used to match certain types of other characters Wildcard Matches any character except a line break that is a carriage return beginning of a line unless used in a character class end of line unless used in a character class Being able to specifically match text starting at the beginning or end of a line is an especially handy feature of grep For example if you wanted to find every instance of a message sent by Patrick from a log file which contains various other information like SO From Rich server barebones com To BBEdit Talk server lists barebones com From Patrick server example barebones com you could
184. ation itself That means you can use them even if no BBEdit Support folder is available To install a plug in drag and drop it directly onto the BBEdit application icon in the Finder BBEdit is launched if necessary and presents an alert asking you to confirm that you want to install the plug in If there is already a plug in with the same name in your Plug Ins folder you will be further prompted whether to replace it with the version you are dragging If you confirm the operation the plug in you dragged will be placed at the top level of your Plug Ins folder and the one it replaced will be moved to the Trash You will need to quit and relaunch the BBEdit application in order to use the newly installed plug in Various plug ins and information are available from our web site as well as the BBEdit Plug In SDK if you are interested in writing your own BBEdit plug ins If you have any third party plug ins that you wish to use with BBEdit 7 0 on Mac OS 9 you may move or copy them into the Plug Ins folder You should not copy any of the factory supplied plug ins from previous versions of BBEdit including those provided with BBEdit 6 5 to use with BBEdit 7 0 You will also not be able to use any third party plug ins that have not been updated to function on Mac OS X Contact the developers of your plug ins or visit the Bare Bones Software web site for more information on the availability of updated plug ins BBEdit Support Folder 13 gt
185. ation on saving files see Setting the Encoding on page 25 For additional details on BBEdit s handling of character sets in multi byte and Unicode files see Chapter 5 Appendix D Changes Since 7 0 Application Packaging Changes Beginning with this release the factory supplied plug ins and spelling dictionaries are now part of BBEdit s application package This means that factory plug ins and spelling dictionaries remain available when the application is launched without a BBEdit Support folder In addition keyboard equivalents for plug ins are no longer tracked using the plug in file as a mechanism Thus future updates to plug ins will no longer require that you re apply any customized key equivalents for plug ins For this release you will need to do so one last time For more details on these changes please refer to the appropriate sections of Chapter 2 Mac OS 9 1 Support BBEdit 7 0 2 is now qualified to run on Mac OS 9 1 and later versions with CarbonLib 1 5 or later required Please note that use of Mac OS 9 2 2 remains recommended see the System Requirements on page 9 for further details Insert Multiple Files The Insert File Contents command now supports selecting multiple files to be inserted into the current document See The Insert Submenu on page 71 for complete details Save a Copy The new Save a Copy command allows you to save a copy of the current document out to a file at any time while you
186. ation on the server When invoking a template using the New HTML Document command and the Create New Window checkbox is not marked the current contents of the frontmost window if any will replace this placeholder CHARSET COMPDATE The character set specified in the New HTML Document command Compact Date format e g 27 Oct 02 CREATIONDATE The creation date of the current file e g 27 Oct 02 CREATIONTIME DIRPAT H The creation time of the current file in the format specified in the Date amp Time control panel The path on the server as specified in the HTML Web DOCSIZE Site panel of the Preferences window Strips any leading slash from the path string The size of the current document plus included images DOCTITLE in bytes The title of the current document as extracted from the lt TITLE gt tag Marks a document so that the HTML Update tool will DONT_UPDATE FILE_EXTENSION ignore it during processing The filename extension for the file determined as the FILENAME rightmost period delimited portion of the filename without the period For example whether the file is named test html or test foo html the filename extension is html The file name of the current file GENERATOR 1C_EMAIL Generator name used for Give BBEdit Credit in New HTML Document function e g BBEdit 7 0 Email address returned by Internet control panel
187. bar unsplits a split window or restores the last used split position If the window has never been split the window is split 50 50 To force a 50 50 split for a previously split window you can Option double click the split bar when it is in its original position Cursor Movement and Text Selection BBEdit gives you several ways to move the insertion point and change the selection You can click and drag using normal Macintosh text selection techniques or you can use various keys on the keyboard Clicking and Dragging You can select text in an editing window in the normal Macintosh fashion by clicking and dragging Holding down the Shift key while clicking or dragging extends the selection No Modifier Shift Click Move insertion point Extend selection Double click Select word Extend selection to word Triple click Select line Triple clicking is the same as clicking in a line and then choosing the Select Line command from the Edit menu Cursor Movement and Text Selection 51 new in 7 0 IMPORTANT Holding the Command and Option keys as you click or double click triggers special actions Command Option Command Option Click Open URL Double click Look up selected Select word and word in program search for next ming reference occurrence of the word BBEdit optionally allows you to select entire lines by clicking in the left margin of an editing window If you have line numbers displayed via the Show Line Numbers
188. ber of the backreference Pattern Matches Examples d 1 a string of digits followed by 7 7 a plus sign followed the 123441234 same digits w st 1 double words the the Nw w 2 1 a word character a second abba word character followed by the second one again and the first one again We will revisit subpatterns in the section on replacement where you will see how the choice of subpatterns affects the changes you can make Using Alternation The alternation operator allows you to match any of several patterns at a given point To use this operator place it between one or more patterns x y to match either x or y As with all of the preceding options you can combine alternation with other pattern elements to handle more complex searches Pattern Text is Matches a t A cat each a and t alc t A cat each a c and t a cat dog A cat is here A dog is A cat is A dog is is here A giraffe is here A b Abba A bb and are Andy Ted Andy and Ted joined AAA Andy and Ted yesterday d 4 years I ve been a loyal member 1983 years since 1983 almost 16 years ago a z Nd That s almost 16 years That s almost 1 6 years Writing Search Patterns 125 IMPORTANT IMPORTANT The Longest Match Issue When creating complex patterns you should bear in mind that the quantifiers and are greedy That is they will always make the longest possible
189. board The Report Results option tells the plug in to report the total number of lines matched regardless of their final disposition With all of the other options turned off this can be useful for pretesting the extent of a search operation without affecting the clipboard or the contents of the original window Chapter 15 BBEdit Plug Ins Note new in 7 0 The plug in requires that at least one of these four options be turned on If you turn off the first three options the fourth Report Results will be turned on automatically Salary Adjust The Salary Adjust plug in directs your payroll service to adjust your gross salary by the amount you specify in minimum increments of 10 units of your local currency You must have an Internet connection to use this plug in Sort Lines The capabilities of the Sort Lines plug in have been greatly expanded in BBEdit 7 0 This plug in sorts lines of text by collating them in alphanumeric order It can operate either on the contents of the current selection or on the whole document The results can be copied to the clipboard replace the selection within the original document be displayed in a new untitled window or any combination of the three There are also options for ignoring white space at the beginning of lines taking case distinctions into account sorting strings of digits by numerical value instead of lexically and sorting in descending rather than ascending order Sort Lines Res
190. cause there are so many different ways the and repeats can carve up the subject and all have to be tested before failure can be reported Chapter 8 Searching with Grep CHAPTER Browsers Browsers are special kinds of windows that let you see a lot of information about files at once Browsers typically have two panes one pane lets you select a file the other displays detailed information about the file often its contents If you have used the Batch Find option in a multi file search you have already seen an example of a BBEdit browser In this chapter BLOW SCWMOVEIVICW ar er by pica aisle pron dia Wie ee ro tie UR ROBO t 145 List Pane 145 Status Bar 146 Text View Pane 146 Splitter 146 Disk DEFOWSOfS 0453 2 9 oo AN RICE Ure puts Rt odi aet doa d RL at Rods 146 Using Disk Browsers 147 Using the List Pane in Disk Browsers 148 Using the Text Pane in Disk Browsers 148 Search Results Browsers o4 ad ouis sco Rice Soi p LER Sos ates Dog 149 Error Resulis Browsers 2 oko he vene Rb ERES i RES DUE VES I 150 Browser Overview All BBEdit browsers share the same basic structure and behavior All browsers have a status bar a file list and a text pane List Pane The top pane of a browser lists the items available in the browser This pane shows different information for different kinds of browsers Browser File List pane contains Disk browser Files and folders that BBEdit can open
191. ces followed by one or more digits followed by zero or more characters that are not digits to allow for comments followed by the end of the line The problem with this pattern is that it matches the entire line It does not provide a way to remember the individual parts of the found string If you use subpatterns to rewrite the above search pattern slightly you get this define t t d 0 9 S The first set of parentheses defines a subpattern which remembers the name of the constant The second set remembers the value of the constant Chapter 8 Searching with Grep The replacement string would look like this const int M1 M2 The sequence 1 is replaced by the name of the constant the first subpattern from the search pattern and the sequence 2 is replaced by the value of the constant from the second subpattern Our example throws out any comment that may follow the C style constant declaration As an exercise try rewriting the search and replace patterns so they preserve the comment enclosing it in style Pascal comment markers Here are some more examples Data Search for Replace Result 4 2 d d 2 1 2 4 1234 5829 d d 1 1 123441234 2152 B C d 4 t JB C 1 A D 2152 A D 1 234 56 0 9 d 1 dollars and 2 1 234 dollars and cents 56 cents 4 296 459 19 0 9 d M dollars and 2 4 296 459 dollars cents and 19 cents 3 5 6 4 00000
192. ces an index of the HTML files within a specific folder You can choose from five different styles of indexes including one that provides full information about every referenced file The best way to see what each format of index looks like is to experiment for yourself Index Site This command creates an index of all the HTML documents in your site as with Index Folder GoLive Home Page or PageMill Cleaner These commands clean up the often gnarly HTML code created by these WYSIWYG editing tools This will make the file easier to edit smaller and often slightly quicker to load into a browser The GoLive cleaner removes font tags with no semantic value that is tags which contain nothing at all or just white space The PageMill cleaner removes the NATURALSIZEFLACG attribute that PageMill puts in lt IMG gt tags and turns every two consecutive line break tags into paragraph lt P gt tags Preview The Preview commands allow you to view your creation in a browser You can choose a browser from the Preview With submenu or use Preview by itself to use the last chosen browser You can also preview the page in all running browsers or in a text only format On Mac OS X browsers running in the Classic environment are labeled Classic The HTML Tools Palette The main HTML Tools Palette is the place from which you will probably access the HTML Tools most frequently You can invoke the HTML Tools palette at any time by selecting i
193. ching a string in parentheses allowing for unlimited nested balanced parentheses Without the use of recursion the best that can be done is to use a pattern that matches up to some fixed depth of nesting It is not possible to handle an arbitrary nesting depth Perl 5 6 has provided an experimental facility that allows regular expressions to recurse among other things It does this by interpolating Perl code in the expression at run time and the code can refer to the expression itself Obviously BBEdit s grep engine cannot support the interpolation of Perl code Instead the special item R is provided for the specific case of recursion The following recursive pattern solves the parentheses problem NCCGGOP 0 1 CR 88 First it matches an opening parenthesis Then it matches any number of substrings which can either be a sequence of non parentheses or a recursive match of the pattern itself that is a correctly parenthesized substring Finally there is a closing parenthesis This particular example pattern contains nested unlimited repeats and so the use of a once only subpattern for matching strings of non parentheses is important when applying the pattern to strings that do not match For example when it tries to match against this line of text aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa it yields no match quickly However if a once only subpattern is not used the match runs for a very long time indeed be
194. ckreference 1 the second in X2 and so on Opening parentheses are counted from left to right to determine the numbers of the captured subpatterns For example if the following grep pattern red white king queen Advanced Grep Topics 135 136 is matched against the text red king the backreferences will be set as follows l red king X2 red X3 king Sometimes however parentheses are needed for only for clustering not capturing BBEdit now supports non capturing parentheses using the syntax PATTERN That is if an open parenthesis is followed by the subpattern matched by that pair of parentheses is not counted when computing the backreferences For example if the text red king is matched against the pattern red white king queen the backreferences will be set as follows l red 2 king Perl Style Pattern Extensions BBEdit s grep engine supports several extended sequences which provide grep patterns with super powers from another universe Their syntax is in the form KEY in other words an open parenthesis followed by a question mark followed by a KEY for the particular grep extension followed by the rest of the subpattern and a closing parenthesis This syntax specifically an open parenthesis followed by a question mark was not valid in older versions of BBEdit thus none of these extensions will conflict with old patterns We have already seen one such e
195. code Files 86 Working with Windows Window Ment sos erben ca eo dens aUa pot dece M dio irai aed Minimize Window 87 Bring All to Front 88 Palettes 88 Arrange 91 Get Info 92 Super Get Info 92 Reveal in Finder 92 Zoom 93 Send to Back 93 Exchange with Next 93 Synchro Scrolling 93 Window Names 93 Searching Basic Searching and Replacing 0 eee e eee eee eee Search Settings 97 e Search Field Input Script 99 Special Characters 99 M lk File Searching 21a pras be OEC ERE SEE Multi File Search Results Batch Find 101 Multi File Search Results File by File 102 Specifying the Search Set 103 Multi File Search Options 106 File Filters 107 INI lt Eie Replacing sauter sd esto ten eaae seas A VES Replacing in Files with Projector CKIDs 110 Oiek Seapeli uoSou mas eue dne e aptat IEEE ati DUANE CE 81 81 83 85 87 87 Table of Contents vii viii Search Menu Reference cece eee eee e een ee enee 112 Find 112 Quick Search 112 Find Again 112 Find Selection 112 Enter Search Replace String 112 Replace 112 Replace All 113 Replace amp Find Again 113 Find in Next File 113 Open All Matches 113 Find amp Replace All Matches 113 Go to Line 113 Go to Center Line 113 Go to Previous Next Error 113 Go to Previous Next Placeholder 11
196. command is not available for languages other than Perl and Python View POD Views the current window as POD On Mac OS 9 the window is opened in Shuck On Mac OS X the window contents are processed by the command line pod2text tool and then displayed in a new window in BBEdit POD stands for Plain Old Documentation and is the standard Perl documentation format Filters and Scripts Before you begin using MacPerl or Unix scripts with BBEdit you should locate and familiarize yourself with the MacPerl Support and Unix Support folders both of which reside in the BBEdit Support folder See Chapter 2 for details about the BBEdit Support folder Inside these folders are subfolders for storing Filters Scripts and other files used for MacPerl and Unix shell scripting integration If you are running BBEdit on Mac OS 9 it will use the MacPerl Support folder If you are running Mac OS X BBEdit will use the Unix Support folder The contents of these two folders will be used to build the Scripts list and Filters list two floating palettes that allow you to run your scripts or filters with a double click Scripts and filters placed in these folders will also appear in their respective submenus at the bottom of the MacPerl Shebang menu Filters Filters operate on the selected text of the frontmost window The current selection is passed as input to the filter and any output generated by the filter overwrites the selection In other words fi
197. cribed in the description of the menu in the table above The following indicators appear in the pop up menu to show the type of function Indicator Meaning The function containing the insertion point T C C typedef 0 C C pragma mark directive italic name C C function prototype 1 6 Heading level in HTML files tag name Tag name for the indicated name or ID attribute value in HTML files Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Note Tip The Split Bar Every editing window has a split bar a small black bar above the scroll bar that lets you split the window into two panes Splitting the window lets you edit a document in two places at the same time Each pane is independently scrollable Scrolling the non active split view no longer automatically changes view focus as in older versions of BBEdit To split the window simply drag the split bar down and let go eoe i index html 2 e Fle Path Users admin Desktop index lt IDOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC r W3C DOTO HTML 4 81 EN http www wo org TR 1999 REC htm l 401 19991224 strict dtd htm l lt head gt stitlesBBEdit Secretaetit les lt meta name generator content BBEdit 6 5 gt xstvle type text css gt l aimport additional csz 4 3 be To return to a single pane window drag the split bar starting from anywhere along its length not just at its right end back up to its original position Double clicking the split
198. cript editor and open BBEdit s scripting dictionary for viewing If the script editor is not running BBEdit launches it Working with Scripts 247 new in 7 0 Start Recording Select this item to record all available actions that you perform within BBEdit or any other recordable applications which you switch to When this command is active the menu item will change to Stop Recording and a tape icon will flash over the Apple menu When you choose Stop Recording BBEdit will display a Save dialog which allows you to save a script file containing the recorded actions Scripts Window The Scripts command located in the Palettes submenu of the Window menu opens a floating window listing all available scripts Names that are too long to fit within the width of the window are truncated with ellipses Hovering the mouse over such a truncated name displays a tool tip showing the full name If you hold down the Option key the tool tip will appear instantly with no hovering delay Names that fit entirely within the window without truncation do not display a tool tip Organizing Scripts Items in the Scripts menu or Scripts window are displayed in alphabetical order by default but you can force them to appear in any desired order by including any two characters followed by a right parenthesis at the beginning of their name For example 00 Save All would sort before 01 Close All For names of this form the first three ch
199. cript interpreters with Unix line endings You can thus save your scripts and filters with whatever line breaks you choose and BBEdit will do the right thing behind the scenes to make sure the interpreter for each language gets the line endings it expects This also means that for Perl the same scripts and filters will work on both Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools MacPerl Shebang Menu The commands in this menu are also available in a floating tool palette called Perl Tools on Mac OS 9 and Unix Scripting Tools on Mac OS X In either case the palette is accessible via the Palettes submenu of the Window menu Open MacPerl Available only on Mac OS 9 this command locates and launches the MacPerl application At the first launch the MacPerl application is located by its creator type If you have more than one copy of MacPerl installed this will usually find the version with the most recent modification date If you prefer to use a different version of MacPerl simply launch that copy of MacPerl yourself via the Finder If you hold down the Option key this command changes to Open Shuck and selecting it will launch Shuck MacPerl s helper application for viewing POD documentation files Check Syntax Checks the syntax for the frontmost window Errors are displayed in a standard BBEdit error browser see Chapter 9 Browsers for more details on working with error browsers This command is on
200. cted text visible in the source level debugger if the debugger is running Set Breakpoint Use this command to make the selected text visible in the source level debugger and to set a breakpoint If you hold down the option key when you open the Compiler menu this command becomes Set Breakpoint amp Go which sets the breakpoints and begins execution of the program If CodeWarrior s source level debugger is not active this command is not available Add If the active editing window has been saved on disk and it is not part of an open project this command adds the file to the project Add amp Compile If the active editing window has been saved on disk and it is not part of an open project this command adds the file to the project and compiles it This command is the same as using the Add command followed by the Compile command Precompile Tells CodeWarrior to precompile the source file in the active window BBEdit displays a standard file dialog that lets you specify the name of the precompiled header The active window must belong to a project that is open in CodeWarrior Preprocess Tells CodeWarrior to preprocess the source file in the active window and to place the results in a new untitled editing window The active window must belong to a project that is open in CodeWarrior Bring Up To Date Tells CodeWarrior to check the project for modified files and to recompile and reload any files that have changed Make Tel
201. d the line break character is not included in the match Writing Search Patterns 121 122 Other Special Character Classes BBEdit uses several other sequences for matching different types or categories of characters Special Character Matches s any whitespace character space tab carriage return line feed form feed AS any non whitespace character any character not included by s NW any word character a z A Z 0 9 and some 8 bit characters AW any non word character all characters not included by Nw including carriage returns Nd any digit 0 9 AD any non digit character including carriage return A word is defined in BBEdit as any run of non word break characters bounded by word breaks Word characters are generally alphanumeric and some characters whose value is greater than 127 are also considered word characters Note that any character matched by s is by definition not a word character thus anything matched by s will also be matched by VW but not the reverse Quantifiers Repeat Subpatterns The special characters and specify how many times the pattern preceding them may repeat style quantifiers allow you to specify exactly how many times a subpattern can repeat The preceding pattern can be a literal character a wildcard character a character class or a special character Pattern Matches p zero or more p s pt one or more p s p zero or one p s p COUNT match exac
202. d You can have text wrap at the Philip bar the edge of the window or a specific character position Soft wrapping and rectangular selection are mutually incompatible When soft wrapping is enabled dragging the mouse performs normal non rectangular selection even if the Option key is held down when there is a rectangular selection the Soft Wrap Text option is unavailable in the Text Options pop up menu and dialog box To make soft wrapping the default for new windows select the Soft Wrap Text option in the Editor Defaults panel of the Preferences window You can also use the settings in that panel to specify the default wrapping margin To freeze the current line endings and hard wrap the text at the current soft wrapping settings use the Add Line Breaks command to insert a carriage return at the end of each line While BBEdit prefers to break lines at white space when soft wrapping lines will be broken as close as possible to the designated wrap width if they do not contain any white space This way long URLs and other extended strings of characters are visible without requiring horizontal scrolling 66 Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Note Exporting Soft Wrapped Text BBEdit will not insert hard line breaks into Unix or DOS format files upon saving although versions of BBEdit prior to 4 5 did Soft Wrapping in Browsers Use the Text Options command from the Edit menu to control soft wrapping and other display options
203. d are only available inside regular character classes in other words inside another set of square brackets Class Meaning alnum letters and digits alpha letters ascii character codes 0 127 cntrl control characters digit decimal digits same as d graph printing characters excluding spaces lower lower case letters print printing characters including spaces punct punctuation characters space white space same as s upper upper case letters word word characters same as Nw xdigit hexadecimal digits For example digit is the same as d POSIX style character class names are case sensitive It is easy to forget that POSIX style character classes are only available inside regular character classes The pattern space without enclosing square brackets is just a MU MAII MI MI MIIN character class consisting of the characters a c e p and 44 LA Ss The names ascii and word are Perl extensions the others are defined by the POSIX standard Another Perl extension supported by BBEdit is negated POSIX style character classes which are indicated by a after the colon For example to match any run of non digit characters digit Non Capturing Parentheses As in previous versions of BBEdit bare parentheses cluster and capture the subpatterns they contain The portion of the matching pattern contained within the first pair of parentheses is available in the ba
204. d of its rightmost period delimited portion For example if the file is named test html the base name is test while if the file is named test foo html the base name is test foo CLIPBOARD Contents of the current clipboard DATE Current date formatted according to your Date amp Time control panel preferences FILE File name of the document into which the item is inserted FILE_EXTENSION FUNCTION INDENT INLINE INSERTION NAME SCRIPT filename SELECT Chapter 12 Using the Glossary The filename extension for the file determined as the rightmost period delimited portion of the filename without the period For example whether the file is named test html or test foo html the filename extension is html If the item is being inserted into a source file the name of the current function When used in a glossary item with multiple lines causes every line after the first to be indented to the same whitespace level as the line in which the item was inserted see the supplied WML glossary for examples Strips all trailing vertical white space from the item before insertion see also the Glossary preference panel Marks the place where BBEdit will place the insertion point after inserting the item if multiple INSERTION placeholders are used the second and subsequent occurrences are replaced with e which can be used with Go to Next Previous Placeholder in the Search men
205. d right and for changing the matched text when performing replacements A subpattern consists of any simple or complex pattern enclosed in a pair of parentheses Pattern Matches p the pattern p and remembers it You can combine more than one subpattern into a grep pattern or mix subpatterns and other pattern elements as you need Taking the last set of examples you could modify these to use subpatterns wherever actual data appears Pattern Matches Examples d d a string of digits followed by 442 a plus sign followed by more 1234 5829 digits d 4 t B C four digits followed by a tab 2152 B C or a space followed by the string B C 0 9 d an optional dollar sign 1 234 56 followed by one or more 4 296 459 19 digits and commas followed 3 5 6 4 0000 by a period then zero or 0 more digits What if we wanted to match a series of digits followed by a plus sign followed by the exact same series of digits as on the left side of the plus In other words we want to match 123441234 or 7 7 but not 54321984 Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Using grouping parentheses you can do this by referring to a backreference also known as a captured subpattern Each set of parentheses in the pattern is numbered from left to right starting with the opening parenthesis Later in the pattern you can refer to the text matched within these backreferences by using a backslash followed by the num
206. d text use the Add Line Breaks command in the Text menu This command inserts a carriage return at the end of every line of the text as it appears in the window If your wrapping margin is the edge of the window you will get different results depending on the width of the window The Add Line Breaks command does not turn off soft wrapping Hard Wrapping and Filling Text The Hard Wrap command in the Text menu gives you more flexibility over hard wrapping text than the Add Line Breaks command While Add Line Breaks merely freezes the line breaks as they appear in the editing window whereas the Hard Wrap command lets you specify a wrapping margin apply the command to the selection only and reflow paragraphs How BBEdit Wraps Text 67 68 When you choose the Hard Wrap command BBEdit opens this dialog box Hard Wrap Selection Only Paragraph Indentation amp Paragraph Fill Flush Left cH First Line Only Break Lines at All Lines Philip Bar Window Width Character Width Reverse Indent Same As First Line kal Relative to First Line f Don tWrap 1 l Cancel wrap gt The controls in the left half of the dialog control how much of the text is hard wrapped and the maximum length of lines after hard wrapping The controls in the right half determine how this command deals with paragraphs The Selection Only option limits the effect of the command to the selected text If this option is not select
207. der contains the Perl Scripts and Perl Filters folders which are used to build the MacPerl Shebang menu and the floating Perl Scripts and Perl Filters palettes when running on Mac OS 9 See Unix Support below if you are running BBEdit on Mac OS X You can place scripts and filters within subfolders up to four levels deep of their respective folders to organize them Some example Perl scripts and filters are also supplied with the standard installation The Perl Output file stores output from Perl and the Perl Logs folder stores output logs for specific source files See Chapter 14 for more information on this folder You can move or copy over any Perl scripts or filters that you wish Note that BBEdit 6 1 looked for a single folder named Perl Support that was used on both Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X but this is no longer the case in current versions Perl scripts and filters must now be placed in the Unix Support folder for use on Mac OS X See Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools for more details Menu Scripts This folder contains scripts that are attached to BBEdit menu items See Chapter 13 for more information on creating and using menu scripts Plug Ins The Plug Ins folder contains third party code modules that add features to BBEdit Each plug in adds a command to BBEdit s Tools menu and you can run the plug in by choosing its name from that menu Note that the factory supplied plug ins are contained within the applic
208. der named BBEdit Preferences which can be located either in the BBEdit Support folder or in the Preferences folder of your System folder The settings in the BBEdit Support folder have precedence although if neither is found BBEdit will create a set of default preferences in your system Preferences folder On Mac OS X the default location for the BBEdit Preferences folder is in the Preferences folder in the Library folder in the current user s home folder Settings located in the BBEdit Support folder have precedence BBEdit Prefs Data Basic preference settings are stored in a file named BBEdit Prefs Data in the BBEdit Preferences folder BBEdit 7 0 will not import preference settings from versions of BBEdit prior to BBEdit 6 0 If you are upgrading to BBEdit 7 0 from BBEdit 5 1 or earlier you will need to reset any preferences for which you do not want to use the factory default value BBEdit FTP Bookmarks BBEdit stores user defined FTP bookmarks in this file which is located in your active BBEdit Preferences folder In some previous versions of BBEdit these bookmarks were stored in the Prefs file If you wish to convert FTP bookmarks from BBEdit 5 x you can do so in the FTP Settings panel of the BBEdit Preferences window Clipboards BBEdit stores the last used clipboard contents for each of its multiple clipboards in this file upon quitting If you lock the Clipboards file by selecting it in the Finder doing Get Info
209. der sample html Area 6 lt end bbinclude gt In addition BBEdit will pass information about the current HTML Tools settings to the script in the following environment variables BBEditServerURL BBEditServerPath BBEditDefaultFileName BBEditTemplateDirectory BBEditRootDirectory BBEditLowercaseTags BBEditLowercaseAttributes BBEditAlwaysQuoteAttributes To access these in your Perl code use the ENV environment variable hash For example this line of Perl will print the Web server name specified in your BBEdit HTML Web Site preferences print SENV BBEditServerURL Include Files 315 IMPORTANT Here s an example Python include script usr local bin python import os import string import sys print Hello Python World print SS SS Se print File being updated sys argv 1 print userVariables for i in range 2 len sys argv 2 userVariables sys argv i sys argv it l print print Dumping the user variables passed to the script print z2z2zzzzz zzzcc zzzcczzzcc zzz c zzz zlll lcllllcll print keys userVariables keys keys sort for k in keys print 30s s k userVariables k print print Dumping the environment variables set by BBEdit print for k v in os environ items if string find k BBEdit 0 print 30s s k os environ k Other Include Notes Older versions of BBEdit supported the use of include as an alternative to
210. ding the script and of course the script will not do anything when you run it Next let s save the script in the BBEdit Scripts folder so that it shows up in BBEdit s script menu Choose Save As from the File menu and then use the Script Editor s Save dialog to put the script in your BBEdit Scripts folder Now try selecting it from the script menu in BBEdit BBEdit and AppleScript 235 236 Reading an AppleScript Dictionary To display an application s AppleScript dictionary you can simply drag that application onto the Script Editor icon or use the Script Editor s Open Dictionary command As we noted earlier all scriptable applications include a dictionary that tells AppleScript how to convert English like commands into the Apple Events actually expected by the application The Script Editor uses this same information to display a sort of vocabulary guide that helps you write your scripts We will naturally use BBEdit s dictionary shown below to illustrate how to read a dictionary oo80 BBEdit Dictionary Required Suite Terms that every applicat 4 open Opens the specified item s open reference Ae fes fe ages with properties record Tenna e negans stationery awareness boolean Ana foe Us Standard Suite close Gant LF translation boolean coke oes fest gm ug delete eff duplicate read only boolean uses cies rne as exiztz reading as auto detect file UTFS file Unicode File move COM ar P
211. dit and the Script Editor If you do not know where your copy of the Script Editor is use Find File or Sherlock to locate it If you do not have it maybe you deleted it because you thought you would never use it just reinstall it from your Macintosh system software CD 234 Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit When you launch the Script Editor a new blank script window appears Click the Record button circled in the illustration below eoe untitled Description Check Syntax AppleSer ipt 4 3 hake Now switch to BBEdit and perform your task Remember that the Script Editor is recording everything you do in every recordable application you are running not just BBEdit If you do something in the Finder for instance that will get recorded too Since almost everything you do is recorded remember that if you make an error and then Undo it your recorded script will faithfully make the same mistake and undo it when you run it later It will be possible to fix minor errors later but things always go more smoothly if you do not make any mistakes so take your time and try to do it right the first time Now switch back to the Script Editor and click the Stop button After a brief pause your script is compiled and ready for use Try clicking the Run button to see it work It might not work correctly If you recorded a search and replace operation changing every cat to dog you already changed the document while recor
212. dit display either a hierarchical listing where all the matches associated with a particular file are grouped under that file using disclosure triangles similar to those in the Finder s list views to reveal or hide the match list or a flat listing showing each individual match encountered on a separate line In the former case you can also tell BBEdit to expand all the file nodes initially by checking Expand Listing This preference also governs the default display of hierarchical or flat error listings in error browsers Show File Icons When this option is selected browsers that display files folders and disk volumes will also display small icons for the items When this option is deselected the browsers list only the names of files and folders 154 Chapter 10 Preferences Note Differences Preferences The Differences preferences control the way the Find Differences command places its windows Arrange Windows On The Arrange Windows radio buttons let you choose which screen BBEdit uses to display Differences windows You can choose the main screen the largest screen or the smallest screen When you mark the Use Two Screens checkbox BBEdit displays the Differences window on the second screen This option gives you the largest view of the items you are comparing Keep Windows Arranged provides control over whether BBEdit rearranges the windows being compared when you click a difference item Differences Window Placement
213. dit will ask you for a filter name then the Edit File Filter dialog below appears You can also define new file filters in the File Filters panel of the Preferences window see Chapter 10 Edit File Filter g h Criteria E LAND tor earch Criteria iu very I f More Criteria 5 eo Any OR If you have the Preferences window open you will not be able to add filters in the Find amp Replace dialog To work around this close the Preferences window before using the Find amp Replace dialog to add new filters The Edit File Filter dialog lets you specify multiple criteria that determine whether a given file is selected by the filter You can choose whether these criteria are exclusive that is whether a file must meet every listed test to be selected or inclusive that is whether a file that meets any of the tests is selected using the Every AND and Any OR radio buttons at the top of the dialog Multi File Searching 107 108 Note Tip To add a test click More Criteria A new row appears in the dialog as shown below Edit File Filter Search Criteria 7 Every AND a S b Barch Utena TIS Mare Criteria Fewer Criteria m m P Revert r Close Save The leftmost column lets you specify which attribute of a file you wish to test BBEdit lets you test a file s name the name of its enclosing folder its creator or type its creation and modification date or both date and time or its Finder label
214. dledCommand to true display dialog Are you sure you want to save 7 buttons No Save default button 2 if button returned of the result is Save then the application should do its work set weHandledCommand to false else we handled the command app does no work postmenuselect doesn t get called display dialog The document was not saved buttons OK default button 1 end if return weHandledCommand end if end menuselect on postmenuselect menuName itemName this is called after the application has processed the command display dialog The document was saved buttons OK default button 1 end postmenuselect Working with Scripts 249 250 Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit CHAPTER Working with Development Tools This chapter describes how to set up BBEdit to work with development environments You can use BBEdit with MPW SourceServer Projector and as an external editor for Metrowerks CodeWarrior For Perl development BBEdit integrates with MacPerl on Mac OS 9 and the native Perl environment on Mac OS X On Mac OS X you can also access the CVS version control system use additional Unix scripting tools such as Python Ruby or shell scripts and employ shell worksheet windows to store and execute frequently used shell commands In this chapter Configuring BBEdit for Development Environments ls 252 Syntax Coloring 253 Working with Development Environments eee eee
215. ds This feature is particularly useful on PowerBooks To enable this feature 1 Open the Preferences window by choosing Preferences from the BBEdit menu on Mac OS X or choosing Preferences from the Edit menu on earlier Mac OS versions 2 Select Text Editing from the list on the left in the Preferences window 3 Select Enable Shift Delete for Forward Delete If you have activated Horizontally for Exchange Command and Option Key Behavior as described in the previous section the effects of Command and Option shown in the table above will be reversed accordingly The Numeric Keypad Most Macintosh keyboards have a numeric keypad on the right side Normally you use the keys on the keypad to enter numbers If you prefer you can use the numeric keypad to move the insertion point 1 Open the Preferences window by choosing Preferences from the BBEdit menu on Mac OS X or choosing Preferences from the Edit menu on Mac OS 9 2 Select Text Editing from the list on the left in the Preferences window Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Note 3 Mark the Use Numeric Keypad for Cursor Movement checkbox start of line 3 Scroll up show selection A end of line Scroll down 1 You can use the Shift key with the keys on the numeric keypad to extend a selection You can use the Command and Option keys with the 2 4 6 and 8 keys as you would the arrow keys To toggle the behavior of the keypad between moving the cursor and en
216. e Option key as you press the Return key Balance While Typing When this option is selected BBEdit flashes the matching open parenthesis brace bracket or curly quote when you type a closing one This option is useful when you are editing source files to ensure that all delimiters are balanced Smart Quotes When this option is on BBEdit automatically substitutes curly or typographer s quotes for straight quotes To type a straight quote when this option is selected or to type a curly quote when the option is deselected hold down the Control key as you type a single or double quote You should avoid using Smart Quotes when editing HTML documents Auto Expand Tabs When this option is selected BBEdit inserts an appropriate number of spaces instead of a tab character every time you press the Tab key Show Invisibles This option shows or hides non printing characters in the window Select this option when you want to see line breaks tabs and gremlins invisible characters BBEdit uses these symbols to represent non printing characters Symbol Meaning A tab 0 space non breaking space line break q page break other non printing characters Show Spaces If this setting is selected and Show Invisibles is active BBEdit will display placeholder characters for spaces Deselect this option to suppress the display of spaces which will reduce clutter when you are displaying invisible characters
217. e Don t Ask Again option before clicking Skip or MRO amp Update BBEdit will apply the same action to all files with this Projector state that it encounters during this and only this search operation Note An equivalent dialog will also be displayed when you perform any other batch operation that modifies files and a file with a Read Only ckid is encountered Quick Search The Quick Search command formerly located in the Window menu is now available in the Search menu Whenever you need to interactively locate a string in a window you can use this feature Quick Search lets you do an incremental search In other words it shows the matching text as you type the search string so you only have to type until you find the text you want To use Quick Search 1 Choose Quick Search from the Search menu 2 Type the string you are looking for in the Quick Search window e Quick Search Case Sensitive Search Backwards As you type BBEdit selects the first occurrence of what you have typed so far 3 To find the next occurrence of the matching text click Find Again You can use the Case Sensitive and Find Backwards options to change the way Quick Search looks for text Quick Search 111 112 Tip Tip You can keep the Quick Search window open all the time and bring it to the front when you want to search Quick Search always searches in the text view of the window immediately behind the Quick Search window Se
218. e Roman script is used for English and many European languages If you have additional Language Kits installed or are running a non English version of Mac OS other scripts may be available This list displays every encoding supported by the Mac OS Encodings with list entries displayed in normal text are installed and available on your Macintosh Encodings whose list entries are dimmed represent script systems that are not installed on your Macintosh To choose the default text encoding for new documents select the desired encoding in the list and click the Make Default button If a document does not contain any script or font information BBEdit will assume it contains Roman text File Types Preferences 159 160 Warning To choose the default font font size and tab stop spacing for a particular encoding click Set Font amp Tabs The Font amp Tabs dialog box appears Font amp Tabs Font Monaco H4 Size 9 9 Hd Tabs 4 spaces You can choose the desired font and font size using controls in this dialog The font should be appropriate to the encoding selected for example you should not choose Monaco as the font to use for Japanese text You can also tell BBEdit how many spaces occur between each tab stop Individual documents may override these settings if they contain appropriate state information See Chapter 3 for more details on document states The settings you choose here are defaults that BBEdit uses for n
219. e button Field Set Legend In HTML 4 you can group your form s fields and other controls into sets of related fields by using the FIELDSET container Within the FIELDSET container the LEGEND tag is used to define a title for the field set Browsers differ in how they represent field sets visually but some browsers may draw a rectangle around the related controls as in dialog boxes In this case the Align attribute of the LEGEND tag can be used to set the alignment of the legend relative to the visual representation of the field set Browsers that do not support these tags will ignore them and the contents of the LEGEND container will be displayed as any other text Input This tag defines an input field which can be a text or password input various types of buttons and even files images or hidden fields Specify the name and the default value of these fields and if applicable their size maximum length tab index access key and disabled or read only attributes Disabled Read Only Tab Index and Access Key are HTML 4 features and may not be supported by all popular browsers You may also specify handlers for the JavaScript onFocus onBlur onSelect and onChange handlers Label HTML 4 allows you to specify that text next to a control is a Label and in browsers that understand the tag clicking the label associated with a button activates the corresponding control BBEdit lets you create a lt LABEL gt tag specifying the name o
220. e by Name or Open Selection command To change the default search directory do one of the following Click the Choose button and select the folder from the directory dialog box Drag the icon of the folder to the path box On Mac OS X the default value for the Default lt gt Directory setting is the current user s login folder Unix Search Paths The Unix Search Paths options are available only when BBEdit is running on Mac OS X Unix search paths are designed to make it easier to work with Unix source code which uses include statements of the form include lt xxx yyy h gt As a more concrete example the canonical Unix include directory is usr include It contains its own subdirectories but since Unix command line compilers do not usually do recursive searches you need to qualify the include file s name if you want to include a file out of one of the subdirectories include lt sys ioctl h gt With the Unix Search Paths settings you can add usr include to the list actually that is one of the factory defaults When you select sys ioctl h and choose Open Selection BBEdit attempts to construct a file path using each of the directories shown in the Unix Search Paths list If one resolves to a file BBEdit will open the resulting file Thus the partially qualified selection sys ioctl h resolves to usr include sys ioctl h and the file opens Chapter 10 Preferences Note Note File Types Pref
221. e comparison In this chapter Basic BOWING sisted adu Seabee eo habe eee ox aee e be few 46 Moving Text 46 Multiple Clipboards 47 Drag and Drop 48 Multiple Undo 5 25 o d d oae ROS x iiec evo Se tity Rub GUERRE Ue ci dus 48 Aandow Atom 6s ete de dec a m np Rene GR CR oca pio Se eta TE Udo bob dol Ro efe a 48 The Status Bar 48 The Function Pop Up Menu 50 The Split Bar 51 Cursor Movement and Text Selection 0 cece eee eee eee eee 51 Clicking and Dragging 51 Rectangular Selection 52 Arrow Keys 52 Scrolling the View 53 The Delete Key 54 The Numeric Keypad 54 Go To Line Command 55 Function Keys 55 Text OpHOTS d esos tain Nhe ETE rw pde Serato ut 56 Editing Options 57 Display Options 58 PODE GE TADS arise auci uu p ad ari ceu eo OS as cede ar a aU UH pur s Mud 60 Jext DE3nS f OPPHAT EOD ute ui Ta E09 e te de edo MR UE OR EUR EE a te cee BR 60 Balance 60 Exchange Characters 61 Change Case 61 Shift Left and Shift Right 62 Add Line Breaks 62 Remove Line Breaks 62 Rewrap Quoted Text 62 Increase and Decrease Quote Level 63 e Strip Quotes 63 Hard Wrap 63 Zap Gremlins 63 Entab 64 Detab 65 Resolve URL 65 How BBEdit Wraps Text 2 224 eri Ihr eee ee e nel e b ed 65 Soft Wrapping 66 Hard Wrapping 67 The Mark Submenu e 2499 eos etes debe oS haa ed PEE wade 69 Setting M
222. e dialog for saving a local file it includes a field for the name of the file so that you can name it before saving Bookmarks FA css T Server W Passive FTP as guide css New Dir www barebones com _ default css MER fag css Go To User Name index html E foo secondary css sae n Password 0 0 0 gp Get Info Remember Password f rm J e Ened ea ER Delete AALUO Urriecct U Show Files Starting with oo l Disconnect Cancel kal Show Document Icons Save As untitled text 2 When you save a file to an FTP server using either Save or Save to FTP Server and the file has Unix LF or Windows CR LF line endings BBEdit uploads the file in binary mode preserving its line endings exactly as they are on your local machine However if the file has Macintosh CR line endings it is uploaded in text mode so that the server can convert the line endings as appropriate Finally you can use Save a Copy to FTP Server to upload a copy of your current file to an FTP server while keeping your local file open This is especially useful when you maintain web site content on your local hard drive and only need to upload changes made in one or two files to the server Chapter 3 Working with Files FIP Browsers BBEdit now offers FTP Browser windows To open an FTP Browser choose New FTP Browser from the New submenu of the File menu eoe8m FTP Browser 1 Bookmarks fe about peg campany html
223. e file is a dictionary Also it has Unix line breaks and each word you enter must be placed on a separate line If you just edit the file and save it BBEdit will do the right thing We do not recommend that you try to create a user dictionary from scratch Do not change or remove the magic number or your User Dictionary will no longer be recognized by the spelling checker Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Using an External Spelling Checker You can use any external spelling checker that supports Apple s Word Services Suite To set up an external spelling checker 1 Open the Preferences window by choosing Preferences from the BBEdit menu on Mac OS X or from the Edit menu on Mac OS 9 and select the Spelling panel 2 Select the Word Services option 3 Click the Choose button and select an external spell checker You can also drag the icon of the spelling checker from the Finder to the path box to the left of the Choose button To start the external spelling checker use the Check Spelling command just as you would for the built in spelling checker See the documentation for your spelling checker for details on how to use it once it has been invoked Using the Spelling Checker 79 80 Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit CHAPTER Working with International Text This chapter describes BBEdit s support for international text formats including Unicode If you need to work with such text we strongly recommend that yo
224. e folder can be named anything so it sorts where you want it These naming conventions are the same as those used by the utilities FinderPop and OtherMenu Using File Groups If you frequently work with many related files you may want to create a file group for them A file group is a special kind of BBEdit file that contains references to other files and folders These files will usually be BBEdit text files but you can place any kind of file in a file group including aliases to a file and URL clippings File groups are persistent Once you have created one you can save it to disk using the Save command and then open it in a later BBEdit session to have instant access to the same set of files Creating a File Group To create a new file group pull down the File menu and choose File Group from the New submenu A new file group window appears e eA Het untitled group f Add Files 4 f Add Folder 4 6 5 Grep Changes etx index html 4 a TF To add files to a file group drag them from the Finder into the file group window or click the Add Files button When you click the Add Files button BBEdit presents the Open dialog so that you can choose multiple files to be added at once You can also add a file by dragging its icon from the status bar to the group window or by dragging a file entry from a search results window Chapter 3 Working with Files Note In addition to file and folder references BBEdit supports URLs
225. e from the Save State pop up menu in the Save Options dialog The default state is MPW Setting the Line Breaks The line breaks settings let you choose what kinds of line breaks BBEdit writes when you save the file Choose e Macintosh line breaks ASCII 13 if you are using the file only on a Macintosh or will be sending it to another Macintosh user Unix line breaks ASCII 10 if the file resides on a Unix file server or if you will be sending it to someone who uses a Unix system e DOS line breaks ASCII 13 10 if the file resides on a DOS or Windows file server or if you will be sending it to someone who uses a DOS or Windows system Chapter 3 Working with Files Note new in 7 0 2 Note Note On Mac OS 9 almost all applications expect or require files formatted with Macintosh line breaks However many of the Unix tools supplied with Mac OS X require files to be formatted with Unix line breaks Setting the Encoding BBEdit lets you save documents that use character set encodings other than Mac Roman even multi byte character sets Chapter 5 contains more information on handling Unicode files and character set encodings with BBEdit In addition to the standard character set encodings BBEdit also lets you save the files in a variety of plain Unicode formats e UTF 8 e UTF 8 no BOM e UTF 16 e UTF 16 no BOM e UTF 16 byte swapped e UTF 16 byte swapped no BOM Anyone preparing HTML files in UTF 8 format may want
226. e list below a separator line and are not counted against the specified item limit Recent Folders amp Favorites This folder contains aliases to folders that have recently been searched or compared in a Find Differences operation The items stored in this folder are used to create the folder search pop up menu in the Find amp Replace dialog or in the Find Differences folder lists To set the number of items shown in these lists use the Remember the most recently used items option on the Application panel of the Preferences window You may lock items in this folder to have them persist as Favorites To do this open the Recent Folder amp Favorites folder and use the Finder s Get Info command to open an info window for each item alias you wish to lock then turn on the Locked option Locked items will be displayed at the bottom of the list below a separator line and are not counted against the specified item limit User Dictionary This special text file contains words which you have chosen to add while using BBEdit s spelling checker See Using the Spelling Checker on page 76 for details on how to work with the User Dictionary Other BBEdit Files and Folders 17 18 Chapter 2 Installing BBEdit CHAPTER Working with Files This chapter discusses how to use BBEdit to manipulate text files In this chapter Launchine BBEIts ode o reo Duda ew stds Nate Ebbene d occ tds 19 Startup Items 20 Memory Conside
227. e name of the file and the time and date printed in a header at the top of each page Print Line Numbers When this option is selected BBEdit prints line numbers along the left edge of the paper Print Two Up When this option is selected BBEdit prints two pages on one sheet of paper Use this option to save paper 1 Inch Gutter When this option is selected BBEdit leaves a one inch margin along the left edge of the paper Use this option if you usually put your pages in three ring binders Chapter 3 Working with Files Note Print Full Pathname When this option is selected BBEdit prints the full pathname of the file in the header Time Stamp The Time Stamp options let you choose whether the date that appears in the header is the date that the file was last modified or the date that the file was printed Print Rubber Stamp When this option is selected BBEdit prints a message in gray diagonally across the page Use the pop up menu to choose a font and type the message in the text field BBEdit chooses the right size font to print the message If your printer supports grayscale printing BBEdit prints the rubber stamp in gray otherwise it is printed in outline style This feature is not supported by all printer drivers Printing 43 44 Chapter 3 Working with Files CHAPTER Editing Text with BBEdit This chapter describes the basics of editing text with BBEdit wrapping text text manipulations and fil
228. e names of all the open documents browsers and other editing windows Choose a window s name from this menu or use its numbered Command key equivalent if applicable to bring that window to the front You can also use the Windows floater to select windows quickly Window Menu 93 94 Chapter 6 Working with Windows CHAPTER Searching This chapter describes BBEdit s powerful Find command now enhanced with a flexible file filtering mechanism It tells you how to search for text in the active window or within a set of files BBEdit can also do advanced pattern or grep searching To learn about pattern searching you should read this chapter first and then read Chapter 8 Searching with Grep In this chapter Basic Searching and Replacing 2 e ca ee Wee ek Rm Renta 96 Search Settings 97 Search Field Input Script 99 Special Characters 99 Maki File Sean hint s ocior buco Coed be Pac Dea ue Vari d 99 Multi File Search Results Batch Find 101 Multi File Search Results File by File 102 Specifying the Search Set 103 Multi File Search Options 106 File Filters 107 Mult amp Ele Replacing s ih oc8o cise we te DOCE I SEE TS 109 Replacing in Files with Projector CKIDs 110 Ouick Sedtclioss s exe oe OR Serene aR Shs edu edat Ve dee ride 111 Search Menu References i Do dea y qt S RP rl ee T Ro a dt 112 Find 112 Quick Search 112 Find Again 112 Find Selection 112
229. e order in which glossary sets appear as described in the next section Manually Sorting the Glossary These selection rules are intended to provide maximum flexibility while automatically doing the right thing as often as possible Manually Sorting the Glossary By default the Set pop up menu displays glossary sets in alphabetical order However you can force them to appear in any desired order by including any two characters followed by a right parenthesis at the beginning of their name for example 00 Web template would sort before 01 HTML Template The first three characters of such names are not displayed in the menu You can also insert a divider by including an empty folder whose name ends with the string You can use anything you want for the rest of the name to make it appear where you want it in the menu These conventions are the same as those used by the utilities FinderPop and OtherMenu Inserting Glossary Items Double clicking an item s name in the Glossary window inserts its contents at the insertion point or in place of the current selection Alternatively you can click the item s name once to select it and then click the Insert button or drag the item directly to the desired location in the document window If you hold down the Option key the Insert button changes to Edit allowing you to open the file corresponding to the selected item so you can edit it you can also do the same thing by Option doub
230. e page 296 see page 296 see page 297 see page 297 Cmd Ctl P see page 297 Markup gt Head Elements Base Link Meta Script Noscript Style Format Markup gt Block Elements Paragraph Paragraph Opt Div Horizontal Rule Horizontal Rule Opt Heading Cmd Ctl H H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 Address Blockquote Center Deleted Text Inserted Text Noscript Preformatted Markup gt Lists List Cmd Ctl L Unordered Ordered Definition Menu Directory List Item List Items Markup gt Tables Table Cmd Ctl T Row Row Opt TD TD Opt TH TH Opt Caption Colgroup Col THead TFoot TBody Convert to Table Markup gt Forms Form Button Field Set Legend Input Label Select Option Group Option Text Area Markup gt Inline Anchor Cmd Ctl A Image Cmd Ctl I Applet Object Param Script Map Area Convert to Client Side Map Break Cmd Ctl B Break Font Cmd Ctl F Base Font Bidirectional Override Quotation Span Subscript Superscript Markup gt Phrase Elements Abbreviation Acronym Citation Computer Code Deleted Text Defined Term Emphasis Inserted Text Input Text Kbd Sample Output Strong Emphasis Variable Listing by Menu and Command Name 295 Markup gt Font Style Elements Big Small Bold Italic Str
231. e same action to all files with this Projector state that it encounters during this and only this Update operation Includes The Includes submenu contains commands for inserting one time include directives persistent include directives and placeholders See Appendix C for more information Choosing Include or Persistent Include prompts you to choose a file using an Open dialog and then inserts the appropriate markup Choosing Placeholders displays a scrolling list of available placeholders selecting one and clicking Insert places it into the document ojog Utilities The Utilities submenu contains commands for automatically editing the current HTML document for ease of editing and for consistency Format This command formats the current HTML document for easier editing The appearance of the document in a browser is generally not affected except in the case of Document Skeleton You can choose from among the following e Hierarchical Nested HTML structures are indented This command may add white space which can affect display in a browser e Gentle Hierarchical Same as Hierarchical with less indenting e Plain Places each tag on a separate line with no indenting e Compact Absolute minimum white space e Gentle Compact A slightly more human readable version of Compact e Source Format Profile Formats the document according to the Dreamweaver Source Format Profile selected in the HTML Markup preference panel if any e
232. e takes the following form bbinclude footer html When such an include is used in a template or glossary entry it is replaced with the contents of the specified file when the template is used to build a new document or when the glossary entry is inserted The original template or glossary file is not changed Imagine that you have ten different templates each of which contains your name address phone number email address and a copyright statement with the current year in them Rather than pasting this info into all ten templates you can create a file named address html put it in your Templates folder and include this statement bbinclude address html in each of the templates at the appropriate point Later when the new year arrives or you move you only have to update one file not all ten templates You could use the YEARNUM placeholder for the year and only need to update the include file when you move Headers and footers are probably the most common uses for include files but any template or glossary entry may use as many include statements as you wish Included files themselves may also use bbinclude directives up to 16 levels deep BBEdit looks for include files first in the same directory as the document containing the directive then in the same directory as the document into which the processed document is being inserted and finally in the HTML Templates folder specified in your preferences Persistent
233. e title will be selected since it lies between the tags lt TITLE gt and lt TITLE gt Choose Balance Tags again and BBEdit selects everything between lt HEAD gt and lt HEAD gt the next set of enclosing tags outside the lt TITLE gt element Choosing the command once more will select everything between lt HTML gt and lt HTML gt Use this command to quickly select an element for editing or just to check to see whether all your nested elements are formed correctly If BBEdit sounds the system alert beep when you expect it to select text it cannot find a matching set of tags around the selected text Document Type Choosing Document Type brings up a dialog that allows you to select the desired document type DTD for the current document If the document already contains an SGML DOCTYPE declaration this will be used as the default You may choose any of BBEdit s supported document types or enter one of your own Character Set Choosing Character Set brings up a dialog that allows you to enter a character set specification for the current document To insert this specification check the Meta Tag box choose a character set from the pop up menu of supplied standard types or type in a character set name and click Apply To remove any existing character set specification deselect the Meta Tag box and click Apply You can choose which character sets appear in the pop up menu by using the Text Encodings panel of the Preference
234. e tools will automatically convert the file path HD HTML Documents Main Site flapdoodle target html to http www example com foo bar flapdoodle target html If you have defined multiple web sites in the HTML Web Sites preference panel the HTML tools will recognize and convert file paths lying in any of their site root folders This will work even when the source and target files are on different sites the tools will convert the target file s pathname to a full URL within the target web site When the source and target files are both on the same site all three address styles full root and relative are available when the files are on different sites root addressing is disabled its radio button is dimmed For files residing in local site root folders on the same disk relative addressing from one file to the other is always available HTML Tool Descriptions This section describes all of the HTML Tools as they appear in the hierarchical Markup menu For a description of the tools as they appear on the palette see the HTML Tool Palette Index which appears after the tool descriptions Tools that create tags insert the tag at the insertion point unless otherwise specified Such tools also place an end tag automatically where appropriate You should already be familiar with HTML before using BBEdit s HTML tools The dialogs BBEdit displays will help you associate correct attributes with each tag and provide shortcuts to help you enter i
235. eaning Any single character E Any number of characters Any numeric character Escapes one of the above for example enters a question mark To enter a literal backslash use e e Invoking BBEdit from the Command e Line When running on Mac OS X you can use the bbedit command line tool to open files in BBEdit via the Unix command line The first time you run BBEdit after installation it offers to install the bbedit tool for you If you choose not to do so you can use the Install bbedit Tool button in the Tools preference panel to install the tool at a later time To open a file in BBEdit from the command line type bbedit filename where filename is the name of the file to be opened To launch BBEdit without opening a file or activate it if it is already running type bbedit 1 You can also pipe stdin to the bbedit tool and it will open in a new untitled window in BBEdit for example ls la bbedit If you just type bbedit with no parameters the tool will accept stdin from the terminal type Control D end of file to terminate and send it to BBEdit Invoking BBEdit from the Command Line 31 32 Note WARNING The complete command line syntax for the bbedit tool is bbedit bcehlpuvVw e encoding name n file See the tool s man page for a complete description of the available switches and options Opening from and Saving to FTP Server
236. earch all the open windows choose Open Documents from the pop up menu The display box next to the pop up menu tells you how many windows will be searched X MulrizEile Search S Batch Find C Exclude Matches Open Documents Jvindows to search Other m T Options O Use File Filter current criteria Peg Edit Searching the Results of a Previous Multi File Search If a multi file search finds many files that contain your search string you may want to narrow the search You can do this if you selected the Batch Find option to do the initial search and the results are in a search results window To narrow a search based on the results of an earlier search 1 Choose Results Window from the pop up menu W Batch Find Exclude Matches Other f Options Edit O Use File Filter current criteria 2 Choose the desired search results window from the second pop up menu The second pop up menu defaults to the frontmost search results window If you have more than one such window open you can choose another from the menu Note You can search the list of files presented in any results browser not just search results browsers Searching the Files in a File Group If the files you are working with are all included in a BBEdit file group you can limit the multi file search to the files in the group To search the files in a file group 1 Choose File Group from the pop up menu File Gr
237. earching with Grep Character classes respect the setting of the Case Sensitive checkbox in the Find amp Replace dialog For example if Case Sensitive is on a will only match a if Case Sensitive is off a will match both a and A Matching Non Printing Characters As described in Chapter 7 on searching BBEdit provides several special character pairs that you can use to match common non printing characters as well as the ability to specify any arbitrary character by means of its hexadecimal character code escape code You can use these special characters in grep patterns as well as for normal searching For example to look for a tab or a space you would use the character class t consisting of a tab special character and a space character Character Matches r line break carriage return n Unix line break line feed t tab AT page break form feed Na alarm hex 07 NCX a named control character like NcC for Control C b backspace hex 08 only in character classes e Esc hex 1B NXNN hexadecimal character code NN for example xOD for CR x NNNN any number of hexadecimal characters NN for example x 0 will match a null x 304F will match a Japanese Unicode character XN backslash Use Vr to match a line break in the middle of a pattern and the special characters and described above to anchor a pattern to the beginning of a line or to the end of a line In the case of an
238. eatures that have changed significantly or have been added since the last major version BBEdit 6 5 If you are viewing the PDF version of the manual you can also search for this marker For an overview of features added in BBEdit 7 0 2 please refer to Appendix D of this manual or look for the new in 7 0 2 marker in the margin For a detailed summary of other changes and bug fixes added in maintenance versions please refer to the release notes which are available on our web site http www barebones com support bbedit current notes shtml Changes from Previous Versions Support Services The Bare Bones Software web site provides up to date information on BBEdit Mailsmith and other Bare Bones Software products including FAQs product updates plug ins sample scripts and other support and informational materials http www barebones com For support help and information follow the links to the Support area where you ll find a wide range of information including Frequently Asked Questions FAQ Information and answers for commonly encountered questions and problems We strongly recommend you read the BBEdit FAQ before resorting to any other means of inquiry e Product Updates The latest maintenance versions of our products will always be available for download e Technical Support If you have a registered version of BBEdit or any other Bare Bones product and you can t find the information you need on ou
239. ection File Open File by Name Search Enter Search String Search Find Search Find Again Search Find Selection BBEdit Hide BBEdit Mac OS X CodeWarrior Debug Search Go to Line CodeWarrior Compile Edit Select Line Markup Tag Maker File New Text Document File Open File Print BBEdit Quit BBEdit Mac OS X File Quit Mac OS 9 CodeWarrior Debug File Save Search Replace amp Find Again CodeWarrior Bring Up To Date Edit Paste File Close Edit Cut CodeWarrior Check Syntax Edit Undo Key Command Cmd Text Rewrap Quoted Text Cmd Search Find in Reference Cmd BBEdit Preferences Mac OS X Edit Preferences Mac OS 9 Cmd Text Shift Left Cma Text Shift Right Cmd Text Exchange Characters Cmd Zoom Window Cmd Search Replace Cmd Text Hard Wrap Cmd left arrow Cmd right arrow Cmd Ctl A Cmd Ctl B Cmd Ctl F Cmd Ctl H Cmd Ctl I Cmd Ctl K Cmd Ctl L Cmd Ctl N Cmd Ctl P Cmd Ctl T Cmd Ctl U Cmd Ctl X Cmd Ctl Y Cmd Ctl Cmd Opt B Cmd Opt D Cmd Opt E Cmd Opt F Search Apply to New Search Apply to Old Markup Inline Anchor Markup Inline Break Markup Inline Font Markup Block Elements Heading Markup Inline Image Markup Check Document Links Markup Lists List File New HTML Document Markup Preview Markup Tables Table Markup Update Document Markup Misc Index Site
240. ed List Items This command converts selected text to list items one line becomes one item or inserts an lt LI gt tag if no text is selected Tables The commands on this submenu all have to do with building HTML tables HTML tables are frequently used for layout purposes as well as for the display of tabular data although strictly speaking their use for layout should be avoided as much as possible BBEdit fully supports HTML 4 tables which are considerably more flexible than the HTML 3 2 tables many users may be familiar with If some tags or attributes in this section are unfamiliar to you we strongly encourage you to study the HTML 4 standard before attempting to use them Table This command inserts lt TABLE gt and lt TABLE gt tags around the selected text You can specify border width spacing padding frame ruling alignment and background color If there is no selection you can have BBEdit generate a shell for the table including all lt TR gt and lt TD gt elements inside the table for the number of rows and columns you specify and optionally insert placeholder label text in each cell Row This command inserts lt TR gt and lt TR gt tags in the document before and after the selection if there is one You can specify the desired horizontal and vertical cell alignment and a row background color If horizontal alignment to a specific character is specified you can also indicate the character that determines
241. ed correctly If you want to view or edit that text switch back to the first font and script system the newly entered text will become gibberish Naturally whatever application you want to use such text files with will need to provide some way of defining which script systems should be used for which text You can use international text throughout BBEdit for example in the Find amp Replace dialog in the HTML Tools and everywhere else you would use regular Roman text Likewise BBEdit will provide the necessary style information so that if you copy and paste or drag and drop international text into another application that application will have enough information to handle the text correctly assuming it is capable of doing so BBEdit remembers the script system used in a document when you save it so the next time you open it you will not need to choose the font However files that do not have this stored information such as those you download from the Internet may not be readable until you choose an appropriate font and script for them When saving a multi byte document BBEdit will write out a styl resource in the document s resource fork This ensures compatibility with applications that do not know how to interpret the MPW state resource or which otherwise cannot properly select the document font on their own Chapter 5 Working with International Text When performing a multi byte search BBEdit respects the saved inf
242. ed the command affects the entire contents of the window The Break Lines at buttons let you specify the wrapping margin If the Paragraph Fill option is selected BBEdit forms the lines into paragraphs before wrapping the lines An example is the best way to illustrate this option Suppose you start with this text eot ig Wrap Music Last Saved 10 05 01 08 42 52 PM L1 File Path Users admin op Wrap Music i This is a short line of text m This is a much longer line of text much longer than 65 characters In fact it s And this is another short Line 3 Pez This is what happens when you wrap to 65 characters with Paragraph Fill off e o8 Wrap Music Last Saved 10 05 01 08 42 52 PM E A File Path Users admin op Wrap Music This is a short line of text This iz a much longer Line of text much longer than 65 characterz n fact it s so long it goes off the right edge of the window And this is another short Line a ik Ta pes BBEdit breaks the long line at the 65 character right margin twice because the line was so long and leaves the short lines alone Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Tip Note This is what happens to the same text when you wrap with Paragraph Fill on eos Wrap Music o Last Saved 10 05 01 08 42 52 PM La File Path Pata aeimin on WIPap Music mm This is a short Line of text This is a much longer Line of text n much longer th
243. ed by a zero is an octal character reference Up to two further octal characters are read Thus 040 will match a space character and 07 will match the ASCII BEL x07 but N08 will match an ASCII null followed by the digit 8 because octal characters only range from 0 7 1 9 A backslash followed by a single decimal digit from 1 to 9 is always a backreference to the Nth captured subpattern Advanced Grep Topics 133 134 Modifier Effect 10 99 A backslash followed by two decimal digits which taken together form the integer N ranging from 10 to 99 is a backreference to the Nth captured subpattern if there exist N capturing sets of parentheses in the pattern If there are fewer than N captured subpatterns the grep engine will instead look for up to three octal digits following the backslash Any subsequent digits stand for themselves So in a search pattern 11 is a backreference if there are 11 or more sets of capturing parentheses in the pattern If not it matches a tab 011 always matches a tab 81 is a backreference if there are 81 or more captured subpatterns but matches an ASCII null followed by the two characters 8 and 1 otherwise In Character Classes Modifier Effect NOCTAL Inside a character class a backslash followed by up to three octal digits generates a single byte character reference from the least significant eight bits of the value Thus the character class N7 will match a
244. ed items hard to find When you deselect the List Identical Files checkbox BBEdit will list only the flagged items the ones that have been changed in the list of items that appear in both folders Flatten Hierarchies Normally BBEdit retains the hierarchy of the files being compared in a folder In other words when comparing folders it looks in each subfolder of the first folder you select and tries to match it with a file of the same name in the same subfolder of the second folder and so on down for all subfolders If you choose Flatten Hierarchies BBEdit considers the files in the folders as a single flat list allowing a file in one folder to match a file of the same name in the other folder regardless of whether they are in the same subfolder in both hierarchies Compare Projector States If you mark this checkbox BBEdit will flag files that have different Projector information CKID resources even if they are otherwise identical Files that differ in their Projector states are underlined in the results list Only List Text Files If this option is set BBEdit does not list non text files when comparing folders Skip Folders If this option is set BBEdit skips subfolders whose names are enclosed in parentheses when comparing folders Use File Filter File Filters allow you to select files for comparison with great precision If either file in a compared pair matches the filter the files are eligible for comparison if nei
245. edit bcehlpuvVw e encoding name ReneS f Eile s See the tool s online man page for a complete description of the available switches and options Perl Python and Shell Scripting BBEdit provides robust integration with Perl Python and Unix shell scripting languages Versions of BBEdit prior to version 6 5 understood Perl syntax and would color Perl source code appropriately these versions could run Perl scripts and provided support for special kinds of scripts known as filters which operate on the text in a BBEdit document window very much like BBEdit plug ins Starting with version 6 5 when running on Mac OS X BBEdit extends the support provided in previous versions for Perl to encompass other Unix scripting languages such as Python and shell scripts Using MacPerl on Mac OS 9 On Mac OS 9 BBEdit works with the Macintosh version of Perl dubbed MacPerl MacPerl is free software and can be downloaded from the MacPerl web site BBEdit can not run Python or Unix shell scripts when running on Mac OS 9 but it will provide syntax coloring and function browsing for files containing code in these languages http www macperl org Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Note Note BBEdit s MacPerl features are accessed through the MacPerl menu pictured at left Why a camel Because the camel is both the official mascot of the Perl programming language and also the Finder icon for the MacPerl application
246. eedy searching and discrete match quantifiers Integrated support for CSS cascading style sheets syntax coloring function navigation and markup support including contextual markup via Tag Maker Expanded contextual menu support including access to the Tag Maker and Edit Tag commands for quickly adding or modifying HTML markup Advanced multi file search filters that let you choose precisely which files to search based on partial file name parent folder name creator type creation date last modification date Projector status and more Enhanced FTP capabilities including the use of alternate ports allowing the use of third party port reflectors and SSH tunnels for FTP and FTP Browser windows which present a persistent view of remote directories Pervasive integration with Unix scripting systems run Perl Python and Unix shell scripts and filters from within BBEdit Mac OS X Authenticated saves automatically prompts for administrator name and password when working with protected files Mac OS X bbedit command line tool invoke BBEdit from anywhere in the Unix command line to open files or use BBEdit as your default editor Mac OS X Info on New Features In addition to the major enhancements described above BBEdit 7 0 also contains a plethora of additional features and interface and performance enhancements as well as bug fixes Look for the new in 7 0 marker in the margin throughout this manual to find f
247. efault worksheet stationery exists you will see the contents of this file in every new worksheet window you create BBEdit ships with a default worksheet stationery file that provides a small tutorial on using worksheet windows When you grow tired of seeing this tutorial in every new worksheet you can either remove the Default Worksheet Stationery file from the Stationery folder or replace it with one of your own BBEdit and the Unix Command Line 255 256 Invoking BBEdit from the Command Line When running on Mac OS X you can use the bbedit command line tool to open files in BBEdit via the Unix command line The first time you run BBEdit after installation it offers to install the bbedit tool for you If you choose not to do so you can use the Install bbedit Tool button in the Tools preference panel to install the tool at a later time To open a file in BBEdit from the command line type bbedit filename where filename is the name of the file to be opened To launch BBEdit without opening a file or activate it if it is already running type bbedit 1 You can also pipe stdin to the bbedit tool and it will open in a new untitled window in BBEdit for example ls la bbedit If you just type bbedit with no parameters the tool will accept stdin from the terminal type Control D end of file to terminate and send it to BBEdit The complete command line syntax for the bbedit tool is bb
248. election with the replace text Replace All Replaces all occurrences of the search string with the replace string Replace amp Find Again Replaces the selection with the replace string and looks for the search string again Search Settings The checkboxes in the Find amp Replace dialog let you control how BBEdit searches your document for the indicated text You can set the defaults for many of these settings in the Text Search section of the Preferences window Basic Searching and Replacing 97 98 Use Grep When this checkbox is selected BBEdit treats the search and replace strings as grep patterns Otherwise BBEdit searches the document for text that matches the search string as it appears literally and will replace any matched text with the replace string To learn more about pattern searching see Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Start at Top When this checkbox is selected BBEdit always starts searches from the beginning of the document Choosing this option will disable the Wrap Around and Search Backwards settings Wrap Around When this checkbox is selected BBEdit continues searching from the beginning of the document if a match is not found or from the end of the document if searching backwards Otherwise BBEdit stops searching when it reaches the end or the beginning if searching backwards of the file Choosing this option will automatically disable Selection Only Unavailable if Start at Top is checked
249. ell application BBEdit 7 0 find BBEdit searching in window 1 options search mode Grep with selecting match end tell In previous versions the find command always operated on the front window Now you must explicitly specify the text to be searched either by specifying an explicit tell target or by supplying a searching in parameter So the following scripts are equivalent Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit tell application BBEdit 7 0 find BBEdit searching in window 1 end tell and tell application BBEdit 7 0 tell window 1 find BBEdit end tell end tell Note that either the tell target or the searching in parameter must resolve to something that contains text As a shortcut you can specify a window and if the window contains text the search can proceed You can also specify a text object find Search Text searching in lines 3 thru 5 of window 2 Also unlike previous versions of BBEdit the defaults for parameters not specified in the find command are no longer controlled by the user interface that is the Find amp Replace dialog When performing a find BBEdit will return a record describing the results of the search This record contains a Boolean which indicates whether the search was successful a reference to the text matched by the search and the text string matched by the search Given the first example above the results might look like this after reformatting for clarity found true
250. en any items it finds in the folder This folder is installed empty by default If the items present are documents of a type that BBEdit knows how to handle such as text files or file groups BBEdit will open them directly If you place a compiled OSA AppleScript or any other OSA compliant scripting language script in this folder BBEdit will execute the script If you place a folder alias here BBEdit will open a disk browser window based at that folder If you place other types of items in this folder BBEdit will ask the Finder to open them If you often edit HTML files for instance you may want to place an alias to your Web browser or your visual HTML editor in the BBEdit Startup Items folder so that it will start up automatically whenever you run BBEdit You can copy or move any file or application aliases from the Startup Items folder of your previous version of BBEdit If you have any OSA scripts in this folder please see the preceding upgrade note for the Scripts folder about script version compatibility Stationery This folder contains stationery files for use with BBEdit s Stationery List feature which can be selected from the Palettes submenu in the Window menu Stationery files may be placed within subfolders up to four levels deep to organize them When you want to create a new file you can choose one of the files in the Stationery List as its basis The contents of the stationery file will be copied into a new document
251. epetition 122 replacement patterns 127 replacing with subpatterns 128 setting markers with 71 subpatterns 124 127 wildcards 118 Hard Wrap command 66 67 hard wrapping 62 63 65 67 Head Elements submenu 200 header files 253 headers 42 heading tags 202 Hex Dump plug in 282 324 Index hex escapes 99 121 hexadecimal 64 hidden files on FTP servers 33 highlighting of text 46 hollow diamond 49 Home Key 56 HR tag 202 HTML books on 186 CSS 196 document title 190 Web sites about 186 HTML Colors Preferences 162 HTML document 21 HTML Entities palette 219 HTML Markup Preferences 163 HTML Palette Preferences 164 HTML Preview Preferences 164 HTML Templates folder 220 HTML Tools 185 221 Block Elements 201 checking HTML 211 colors 219 custom markup 221 Edit Tag 194 entities 219 forms 204 frames 211 Head Elements 200 include files 311 indexing 216 inline elements 206 lists 203 Markup menu 188 miscellaneous 215 new document 189 optimizing documents 215 palette 188 216 218 phrase elements 209 preferences 187 reformatting documents 214 scripting 221 scripts 313 tables 203 Tag Maker 193 194 templates 220 tool descriptions 192 translation 215 220 updating documents 212 utilities 214 variables 312 HTML Tools Preferences 165 HTML Web Site Preferences 166 human interface 3 I italic tag 210 image maps 208 IMG tag 206 include files 311 variables 312 see also templates indent placeholder 226 indenting 62
252. er ff M Options 3 Use File Filter current criteria peg Edit 2 Choose a folder from the second pop up menu This pop up menu displays up to 12 recently used folders as well as any favorite folders you have designated see Chapter 2 If the folder you want to search is not in the pop up menu choose Other or click the Other button at the right of the dialog and select the folder using the resulting Choose a Folder dialog Hold down the Option key while navigating the dialog to display You can also drag a folder from the Finder directly into the central path box where the path of the chosen folder is displayed On Mac OS X the Choose a Folder dialog will display any packages it encounters as folders rather than just as single files the way they appear in the Finder This allows you to navigate their internal structure just as you would any other folder Similarly you can drag a package from the Finder into the path box in the Find amp Replace dialog and it will be treated as a true folder rather than as a single file Multi File Searching 103 104 3 To search folders within the folder you chose click the Options button and select the Search Nested Folders option in the Multi File Search Options dialog You can also choose to skip any folders whose names are enclosed in parentheses here by selecting the Skip Folders option and you can specify whether to search all files or only text fil
253. er matching all 6 digits and then failing to match foo the normal action of the grep engine is to try again with only 5 digits matching the d item and then with 4 and so on before ultimately failing Once only subpatterns provide the means for specifying that once a portion of the pattern has matched it is not to be reevaluated in this way so the matcher would give up immediately on failing to match foo the first time The notation is another kind of special parenthesis starting with as in this example gt d bar This kind of parentheses locks up the part of the pattern it contains once it has matched and a failure further into the pattern is prevented from backtracking into it Backtracking past it to previous items however works as normal In most situations such as in the example above the time saved by using once only subpatterns is insignificant a few small fractions of a second at most With some complicated grep patterns or with humongous lines of text however you can save tremendous amounts of time using once only subpatterns Once only subpatterns are not capturing subpatterns Simple cases such as the above example can be thought of as a maximizing repeat that must swallow everything it can So while both d and d are prepared to adjust the number of digits they match in order to make the rest of the pattern match gt d can only match an entire sequence of digits Once only subpatter
254. erences The File Types preferences let you define the creator signatures of the files that BBEdit can save By default when BBEdit saves a new file it sets the type of the file to TEXT and sets its creator to R ch You can choose a different creator by selecting it from the File Creator pop up menu in the Save Options dialog reached via the Options button in the main Save dialog The File Types preference panel specifies the list of creator signatures that will appear in this pop up menu The Find All button lets you easily add all the applications you have that are capable of opening text files This may be a long list so you may prefer to add only the applications you actually use To set the default creator signature 1 Select an application from the list 2 Click Make Default A check mark appears next to the default creator When saving files BBEdit will save new files with this creator signature unless you choose a different one When saving a file that already exists BBEdit never changes the creator To add a new application to the list 1 Click Add 2 Select an application from the Open dialog box To delete an item from the list 1 Select an application from the list 2 Click Remove Fonts Preferences The Fonts preference panel displays a list of the text encodings you can use with BBEdit and the default font you want to use with each encoding On many systems only the Roman script will be supported Th
255. es Searching with a Script To specify the set of files to be searched using a compiled OSA script choose Script from the pop up menu then click the Other button and select the desired script or drag the script file into the pathname box next to the pop up menu M Batch Find Exclude Matches ES one selected T TT 7 Use File Filter current criteria The script should return a list of the files to be searched This provides great flexibility since an OSA script can do pretty much anything it wants to generate a list When calling the script BBEdit will first try a handler named MultiFileSearch if there is no such handler it will call the script s run handler Here is a very simple example script on MultiFileSearch note that this requires the BB Commands OSAX return folder listing of alias Projects BBEdit files only returning files of type TEXT with recursion end MultiFileSearch on run you could do something different here in case the script was run manually by the user end run Of course you do not have to use the BB Commands OSAX to generate file lists any other scripting tool which can produce the same type of output will work fine Searching All Open Documents You can limit the set of files to be searched to the open editing windows One advantage of this kind of search is that you can search windows that have not yet been saved to a file Chapter 7 Searching To s
256. es the icons on the left in the dialogs represent the entire box top right bottom and left respectively Padding Margins Selector BODY Selector BODY Eo 89 f 18 f f Cancel Apply gt Cancel m iB 0 Bl a o m Een aed o 30999 3 0 T UM When you are working with the individual margin fields in these dialogs as opposed to the overall value they behave the same way CSS value replication does e If right is missing it takes on the value of top e If bottom is missing it takes on the value of top e If left is missing it takes on the value of right so an empty field has special meaning it means replicate the related value If you want to specify a value for any given side you must enter it explicitly Font The Font dialog allows you to edit values for the following font properties color font size line height font family font style font weight and font variant Note that BBEdit will parse the font shortcut property but never generates it instead BBEdit generates exploded values for font style font variant font family and font weight Font Selector BODY Color mm Style Default m Size a Weight Default m Line Height 1 5em a Variant Default m Font Family Helvetica sans serif HTML Tool Descriptions 199 200 Text The Text dialog allows you to edit the following text properties text decoration text indent text align vertical
257. es not automatically close when you click Save or Revert You can of course close it with the close box or by choosing Close from the File menu The following sections describe each of the preference panels in detail Chapter 10 Preferences Note Application Preferences The Application preferences control which application and system services BBEdit uses when open files are verified and various other global settings Previous versions of BBEdit allowed Navigation Services and Appearance Manager support to be turned off Starting with BBEdit 6 5 these two services are no longer optional Optional Mac OS Services QuickTime Translation If you mark this checkbox and have a recent version of QuickTime installed BBEdit will ask QuickTime if it recognizes any files that BBEdit does not If QuickTime recognizes the file as one it can display BBEdit will open it for viewing otherwise the file will be opened as raw text This option is on by default If the supplemental option Don t Translate PDFs is checked BBEdit will not attempt to apply QuickTime translation to PDF files This option is on by default QuickTime Playback This checkbox controls whether BBEdit opens QuickTime movies for playback in a movie window or just opens them as text data in an editing window The default is to recognize QuickTime movies and display them with a player Changes to this preference take effect immediately Optional Application Services B
258. es not perform a search but only sets the contents of the search string When you hold down the Option key this command becomes Enter Replace String and behaves identically except that it enters the selected text as the replace string Replace Replaces the selected text usually an occurrence of the search string with the replace string Chapter 7 Searching Note Replace All Replaces every occurrence of the search string in a file with the replace string Replace amp Find Again Replaces the selected text with the replace string and searches for the next occurrence of the search string Find in Next File When doing a non batch multi file search this command looks for the first occurrence of the search string in the next file Open All Matches This command opens all the files in the search set that contain at least one occurrence of the search string Find amp Replace All Matches In a multi file search and replace for which Batch Find is turned off this command finds every occurrence of the search string in every file in the search set and replaces them with the replace string When you choose this command BBEdit opens a dialog that gives you an opportunity to approve replacements Go to Line When you choose this command BBEdit opens the Go To Line dialog box Type in a line number and the frontmost text window will jump to display that line The Go To Line command honors the Use Hard Line Numbe
259. et Breakpoint Set Breakpoint amp Go Add Add amp Compile Precompile Preprocess Bring Up To Date Make Debug Run Projector Check In Check Out Modify Read Only Modify Read Only Get Revision Cancel Check Out Cancel Check Out MRO Edit Task Comment Edit Task Comment in Flle Compare Revisions Get Revision History New Project Check In Folder Check Out Folder Find Lurkers Make Obsolete Make Obsolete Remove Projector Info Remove Projector Info Open Log File Scripts Open Script Editor Open Scripting Dictionary Start Stop Recording Installed scripts Cmd K Cmd Y Cmd I Cmd Shift l Cmd Opt Shift Cmd U Cmd R Cmd Opt R Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Appendix A Command Reference Markup Tag Maker Edit Tag Close Current Tag Balance Tags Document Type Character Set CSS Body Properties Head Elements Block Elements Lists Tables Forms Inline Phrase Elements Font Style Elements Frames Check Update Includes Utilities Misc Preview Preview in New Window Preview With Markup gt CSS import Box Padding Border Margins Background Font Text Format Cmd M Cmd Opt M Cmd Opt B see below see below see next column see next column see page 295 see page 295 see page 295 see page 295 see page 296 see page 296 see page 296 se
260. ew Markup gt Preview With submenu Other Palettes In addition to the main HTML Tools palette BBEdit incorporates a number of other palettes that may be useful to HTML authors First several of the pop up menus on the HTML Tools palette can be used to open floating palettes for specific tools At the bottom of the pop up menus for CSS Block Elements Inline Elements Table Forms Phrase Elements Font Style Elements and Utilities is a menu item that opens the specified menu as a palette For example choosing Inline Palette from the bottom of the Inline Elements pop up menu opens a new palette containing a button for each of the items on that menu You probably will not need to open all these subpalettes at once but they can be quite convenient to open temporarily when you are working on a particular type of element form table and so on In addition to being able to open them from the main HTML Tools palette you can also access each palette from the Palettes submenu in the Window menu Two other palettes are also of particular interest to Web authors the HTML Entities palette and the Web Safe Colors palette Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Note Note HTML Entities In HTML extended characters must be encoded as entities since different computers define the extended ASCII characters differently The HTML Entities floating window lists these entities HTML Entities zm Method Name r3 Dec Entity Char 34
261. ew windows and for documents with no saved state information FTP Settings Preferences The FTP Settings preferences let you change the default settings of some options in the Open from FTP Server and Save to FTP Server dialogs Remember Passwords Mark this checkbox to have BBEdit store the passwords for FTP sites Store Passwords in Keychain This checkbox determines whether BBEdit stores saved FTP passwords in the Mac OS Keychain or whether they are stored in plain text in the bookmarks file BBEdit is not a security program If you choose not to use the Keychain your stored FTP server passwords can be easily obtained by anyone with access to your computer As an alternative we suggest you consider using a secure bookmark storage application such as Web Confidential http www web confidential com Include Passwords in Proxy URL Drags Dragging the window proxy icon from an editing window corresponding to a file opened from an FTP server will drag that file s URL rather than a representation of the local temporary file To control whether the dragged URL includes the FTP account password set the Include Passwords in Proxy URL Drags checkbox This setting is turned off by default so that you do not accidentally create clippings containing passwords as this may be a security risk Chapter 10 Preferences Note List FTP Files on the Open Recent Menu Mark this checkbox to show files opened from FTP sites on the Open Recent
262. ext Files Saving Preferences 179 180 Defaults for Printing The Printing button lets you set the default options for the Print dialog box Default Font To set the default printing font click the Default Font button BBEdit opens a dialog that lets you specify the font and the width of tab stops The current printing font settings appear in the display box to the right of the button Use Document s Font When this option is selected BBEdit uses the document s font when printing Fractional Widths When this option is selected BBEdit prints proportionally spaced fonts with better letter spacing Print Backwards When this option is selected BBEdit prints documents last page first This option is useful if you are printing to a printer like the original LaserWriter that does not arrange pages in the proper order Frame Printing Area When this option is selected BBEdit draws a box along the edges of the printed text Print Page Headers When this option is selected BBEdit prints the page number the name of the file the time and date printed in a header at the top of each page Print Full Pathname When this option is selected BBEdit prints the full pathname of the file being printed in the header Print Line Numbers When this option is selected BBEdit prints line numbers along the left edge of the paper Print Two Up When this option is selected BBEdit prints two pages on one sheet of paper Use this option t
263. ext already entered as the file s name Saving a Copy of a File You can save a copy of a file with BBEdit s Save a Copy command in the File menu Just like the Save As command the Save a Copy command displays a Save dialog and lets you choose a name and location for the file However unlike the Save As command where BBEdit will start working with the new file you saved in place of the original when you use Save a Copy you create a new file in the designated location but keep working with the original file For example say you are editing a document called Test c and use the Save a Copy command to save a document called Backup Test c The next time you choose the Save command BBEdit saves the changes to Test c and not to Backup Test c File Saving Options BBEdit s Save dialog is the standard Macintosh Save dialog with these additions e Save As Stationery When this option is selected BBEdit saves the document as a stationery pad When you later open this document BBEdit uses it as the basis of a new untitled document The new document will inherit the contents and display settings of the stationery document but BBEdit will prompt you for a name when you save it e Options button This button opens a dialog box that lets you control what file creator to use how much state information is saved with the file and what kind of line breaks and file type to use Save Options File Creator BBEdit Save State MPW She
264. f the control it should be associated with an optional keyboard equivalent to activate the control and onFocus and onBlur JavaScript handlers Select This tag defines a scrolling list or pop up menu Enter the name of the control the number of items to display leave the size blank for a pop up menu rather than a scrolling list and whether the list allows multiple items to be selected Optionally mark the control as disabled and specify onFocus onBlur and onChange handlers HTML Tool Descriptions 205 206 Option Group Using the lt OPTIONGROUP gt tag you can create submenus in pop up menus in browsers that support them All lt OPTION gt tags within an lt OPTIONGROUP gt container are displayed as items cascading from the specified submenu label In browsers that do not understand OPTIONGROUP users will see a simple straight list of all defined options Option This tag defines an option in a pop up menu or a scrolling list Enter the desired label and value for the option and mark the Selected checkbox to make the option the default or initial choice Text Area This tag defines a scrolling text area field for entering large amounts of data You can specify the name of the file its size in rows and columns and optional HTML 4 only attributes such as Disabled Read Only Access Key and Tab Index You can also specify script handlers for onFocus onBlur onSelect and onChange events Inline Elements Inline elemen
265. f document picture document refers to a document corresponding to an open picture file A picture document does not present any properties beyond the basic document class but provides a way to differentiate picture documents from other types of document e movie document refers to a document corresponding to an open QuickTime movie file A movie document does not present any properties beyond the basic document class but provides a way to differentiate movie documents from other types of document QuickTime document refers to a document corresponding to an imported Quicktime image file A QuickTime document does not present any properties beyond the basic document class but provides a way to differentiate QuickTime documents from other types of documents BBEdit and AppleScript 243 244 Getting and Setting Properties One significant improvement in BBEdit s new scripting framework is the ability to get and set multiple properties of an object with a single scripting command Every object has a property called properties This property returns a record which contains all of the properties which can be fetched for that object For example the script command properties of text window 1 will return a result like this one id 241732 container application BBEdit 7 0 bounds 278 45 918 861 closeable true index 1 modal false file file Files WebSite index html modified true name index html position 278 45 resi
266. f this element is browser dependent but it is usually used to indicate that a block of text is a postal address Blockquote This command inserts a block quote that is several lines of text that have been quoted from another document Most browsers display this as indentation leading many authors to use this tag to indent a section of text although stylesheets are a more correct and flexible way to accomplish this You may optionally indicate the document being quoted if it is available on the Web using the Cite field Center This command inserts a block centering tag This tag while permitted in current HTML specifications is deprecated since it includes no information about the content being centered It is generally considered better form to use stylesheets or P or DIV tag ALIGN attributes instead Deleted Text This command inserts a block formatted to indicate that the enclosed text has been deleted usually with a horizontal line through it that is struck out You may optionally specify a citation indicating a reference to another file and a date and time Inserted Text This command inserts a block formatted to indicate that the enclosed text has been inserted usually by underlining the text You may optionally specify a citation indicating a reference to another file and a date and time Noscript This command begins a section of HTML to be displayed only if the Web browser does not support client side scriptin
267. f which text is displayed in which scripts and automatically selects an appropriate font to display each script When you copy and paste text information on what script it is in comes with it In short it works just the way you think it should When writing in other languages it is fairly common to use an English term where no native word is available so most scripts also include a Roman character set to allow users to type the occasional English word without having to constantly switch back and forth between the Roman script and the international one This is especially fortunate for Web design because all HTML tags are in English although of course the contents of Web pages need not be The part of the Mac OS that allows applications to handle text in different scripts is called WorldScript Thus you will often see applications referred to as WorldScript aware or WorldScript savvy Using Script Systems Throughout this section we will assume you are using a U S English or another Roman based version of the Mac OS If you are not you probably already know how all this works because you already use it all the time Once you have installed one or more Language Kits on your computer or on Mac OS X if you have enabled additional Input menu options in the International section of the System Preferences you will see a new menu in the menu bar This menu allows you to change keyboard layouts or script systems as you work
268. folder to your Applications folder or other desired location Then you can move over any additional plug ins or customized support files such as scripts or glossary items from your old BBEdit folder before deleting it Please carefully read the next section BBEdit Support Folder since the organization of supporting files has changed from older versions We have provided specific suggestions and tips for transferring your custom support files with each category 10 Chapter 2 Installing BBEdit Note new in 7 0 2 BBEdit Support Folder This section describes the arrangement of BBEdit s support folder This is the location that BBEdit scans when you launch it to locate a variety of items that add functionality such as plug in tools and more All of these items are contained in the relevant subfolders described below within a folder named BBEdit Support Although none of the items contained in the BBEdit Support folder are essential for doing basic tasks with BBEdit and you can remove any or all of them they provide additional functionality that you may wish to retain BBEdit will look for the BBEdit Support folder in the following locations e When running on Mac OS X BBEdit will first look in the current user s Application Support folder for the BBEdit Support folder If it is not found there the application will look in its own folder for the BBEdit Support folder On Mac OS X the path to this folder is Library A
269. for files viewed in a browser window Soft Wrapping and Line Numbers The preference Use Hard Line Numbering in Soft Wrapped Views controls the way line numbers are displayed when you use soft wrapping If this option is turned on the line number bar cursor position display and Go To Line commands in editing views will use line numbers that correspond to hard carriage returns in the document rather than to soft wrapped line breaks To restore the behavior of previous versions of BBEdit turn this preference off Hard Wrapping The easiest way to hard wrap text is to type a carriage return by pressing the Return key whenever you want to start a new line If the file you are editing is a program it is best to turn off soft wrapping altogether To turn off soft wrapping for the active window do one of the following e Choose Soft Wrap Text from the Text Options pop up menu in the status bar Deselect the Soft Wrap Text option from the Text Options dialog box by choosing Text Options from the Edit menu To turn off soft wrapping for new windows deselect the Soft Wrap Text option in the Editor Defaults section of the Preferences window BBEdit provides two ways to convert soft wrapped text into hard wrapped text The first is a simple technique that uses a single command the second is a bit more complicated but gives you much more control over wrapping Hard Wrapping Soft Wrapped Text To convert soft wrapped text to hard wrappe
270. frontmost text window Depending on the modifier keys you hold down the Insert button inserts the selected character in different formats Clicking Insert while holding Inserts in this format None Escape code appropriate to the front window for example x69 or 9669 Option Decimal value for example 105 Command Literal character for example i You can also double click on a line in the ASCII table to insert the corresponding character or character code into the editing window Clicking the Show button in the ASCII Table window displays the ASCII value of the character to the right of the insertion point or the first character of the selection Glossary BBEdit s powerful Glossary provides an easy way to store and access frequently used text of any sort For details on using the Glossary including its language sensitive mode please refer to Chapter 12 Chapter 6 Working with Windows Note Plug In Tools The Tools floating window displays a list of all the plug ins in your BBEdit Plug Ins folder Any plug ins you have installed will appear both in this Tool List window and in the Tools menu itself See Chapter 15 BBEdit Plug Ins for more information on installing plug ins Scripts The Scripts floating window displays all the currently installed OSA scripts in your BBEdit Scripts folder In most cases OSA scripts are all AppleScripts See Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit for information about usi
271. g s Start At Top Setting Mark this checkbox to have BBEdit remember the state of the Start At Top checkbox in the Find amp Replace dialog from one invocation to the next Color Grep Patterns in Find Dialog When this preference is turned on and Use Grep is turned on in the Find amp Replace dialog BBEdit will apply syntax coloring to grep search and replace patterns Multi File Search Replace Mark Allow File Script Guessing to have BBEdit guess for the script used in documents that do not contain information about their encoding This is useful when searching documents in various languages If this checkbox is marked BBEdit uses the script of the search string when searching a file whose script could not be determined otherwise it uses MacRoman Grep Patterns This list displays all the grep patterns regular expressions you have defined for use in the Find amp Replace dialog s Patterns pop up menu Click Add to add a new one click Change to edit the selected pattern or click Remove to delete the selected pattern Text Search Preferences 181 IMPORTANT 182 Note Note Note If you have the Preferences window open you will not be able to add grep patterns from the Find amp Replace dialog To work around this close the Preferences window before using the Find amp Replace dialog to add new grep patterns Tools Preferences The Tools preferences control the way BBEdit integrates with programming tools
272. g Show These radio buttons control the way selected text is displayed while tracking mouse movements during a drag and drop operation choose Outline Only to have the selection displayed as an outline or Translucent Image to have the selection displayed as visible translucent text Verify Open Files After If you frequently make changes to files with another program while they are open in BBEdit or you often edit shared files that might be changed by someone else you may want to mark one or more of these checkboxes If the option for Activating BBEdit is checked for instance BBEdit will check the modification date of each open document every time you switch to BBEdit alerting you if any changes have been made to the file while BBEdit was not the frontmost application Similar functions are available to perform this check after running an OSA script a BBEdit plug in or a Unix on Mac OS X or Perl script on Mac OS 9 Remember the most recently used items This text field lets you choose how many files appear on the Open Recent sub menu of the File menu and how many folders appear on the folder search pop up menu in the Find amp Replace dialog and on the Find Differences folder lists Browser Display Preferences The Browser Display preferences control the initial appearance of BBEdit s built in browsers for search results compile errors disk contents and so forth Results Lists For search results browsers you can have BBE
273. g it is often used to provide alternate content following a SCRIPT block A matching lt NOSCRIPT gt tag is also inserted Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Preformatted This command begins a section to be reproduced with line breaks as specified in the HTML document Normally browsers convert carriage returns to white space for display breaking lines only at lt P gt or lt BR gt tags Most browsers use a monospaced font for this type of block Lists These commands add numbered or bulleted lists to your HTML documents If text is selected the selected text is converted to a list with each line terminated by a carriage return becoming a list item List This command inserts a list You can choose the type of list unordered ordered definition menu or directory and also the type of marker for an unordered bulleted list You can also suggest a compact display format for the list When converting existing text to a list you can choose to ignore blank lines in the text being converted to mark up only list items and not insert the list header and whether to indent the list items When converting text to a definition list DT term and DD definition tags are applied to alternating lines in the selection Unordered Ordered Definition Menu Directory These commands convert the selected text to the indicated type of list or insert a new list as with the List command using the options set in the last List dialog display
274. g for another one At this point the Mac OS may decide to give some time to another application on your computer Apple Events are special events that applications send to each other enabling a feature called inter application communication LAC It s a mouthful but it just means applications can talk to each other Apple Events are also the way OSA scripts tell applications what to do and which data to retrieve So to be scriptable an application must first support Apple Events Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit Apple Events in their naked form are raw and cryptic things bits of hieroglyphics only a programmer could love So a scriptable application also has a scripting dictionary The scripting dictionary tells any application that lets you write OSA scripts like the Script Editor that comes with the Mac OS the English like equivalent for each Apple Event and each event s parameters It is important to note that because Apple Events were originally designed to allow applications to communicate with each other OSA scripts automatically inherit the ability to talk to more than one application It is common in the publishing industry for instance to write scripts that obtain product information from a FileMaker Pro database and insert it into a Quark XPress file This integration is one of the Macintosh s primary strengths You use AppleScript s fell verb to indicate which application you are talking to If you are only sending one co
275. generally not be used stylesheets are a more flexible and more content oriented way of achieving this end Base Font This tag selects the default font size and or color for the text in this document Like FONT this tag is deprecated it is considered better form to use stylesheets Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Bidirectional Override This command inserts a lt BDO gt tag to note that the enclosed text is in a language that should be rendered in a different direction either left to right or right to left than the default text order for the document s primary language You can specify the desired text order and the language so that savvy browsers can switch fonts or script systems to display the text correctly Quotation This command marks the selected text as a quotation Use this only for short quotes within a paragraph use lt BLOCKQUOTE gt for quotations consisting of a paragraph or more of text Span This command marks the selection as belonging to a certain class of information such as a book title usually so that its text style can be retrieved from a stylesheet In contrast with lt DIV gt which marks paragraph level classes lt SPAN gt marks character level classes You will be prompted for an ID for this span a class name which should correspond to a stylesheet entry and inline style information All are optional Subscript This command marks the selected characters as a subscript lowered below the b
276. gger 3 0 Script Debugger wi Unix Scripting Tools w 5ourceServer v Dreamweaver vi Absoft Fortran Volumes Tharkoldu Mechanus References THINK Set If you made any changes in the default Tools options click the Save button Now you must quit and relaunch BBEdit in order for these changes to take effect Note Pascal and Symantec C environments BBEdit no longer supports Kodex MPW ToolServer MPW 411 or the THINK C THINK The ordering of BBEdit s development tools menus has changed for version 7 0 From left to right after the Window menu are the MacPerl Shebang menu the new CVS menu the Compiler menu the Projector menu and the Scripts menu Note that depending on your preferences settings and available tools not all of these menus may be displayed Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Note Syntax Coloring Although it is not essential you may want to turn on syntax coloring when you use BBEdit with a development environment When syntax coloring is on BBEdit displays keywords and other language elements in color You can turn on syntax coloring by e choosing Syntax Coloring from the Text Options pop up menu in the status bar selecting the Syntax Coloring option from the Text Options dialog box e setting the Syntax Coloring option in the Editor Defaults section of the Preferences window this sets the default for new windows Working with Development Environments Once you have set up
277. h on Server foo bar Default Page Name index html Local Site Root none selected Look for Templates amp Includes in none selected P Site Name Use this text field to enter the name by which the web site will be listed in the HTML Web Sites preference panel BBEdit also uses this name in the Web Site pop up menu of the New HTML Document dialog see Creating a New Document in Chapter 11 Web Server Name Enter the URL of your web server here such as http www example com in the figure BBEdit uses this information to determine which links are on local to your server Site Path on Server Enter the server path of your site s main page here For example if your web site is at http www example com foo bar you would enter http www example com for the Web Server Name as noted above and foo bar for the Site Path on Server HTML Web Sites Preferences 167 168 Note Default Page Name Specify the default name used by your server for the document that is sent to a web browser when a browser accesses a directory without specifying a file name Most servers use index html default html main html or home html Local Site Root Use the Set button to select the folder that is the root of your web site on your local hard disk or on a mounted server volume You can also drag the folder s icon onto the box to the left of the Set button
278. hat you fill out this dialog as completely as possible The function of each field is described below Insert XML Declaration Choose this checkbox to have BBEdit insert an XML declaration If the DOCTYPE selected in the pop up menu below is not an XML based type that is is not an XHTML version this checkbox will be disabled Using the HTML Tools 189 190 Note Note Note Although an XML declaration is required for XML documents whose character set is not UTF 8 or ISO 8859 1 some currently shipping Web browsers including Internet Explorer 5 0 for Macintosh cannot handle documents with XML declarations Insert DOCTYPE Choose the type of this HTML document from the pop up menu to have BBEdit insert an SGML prolog containing the desired document type This information is largely ignored by browsers however HTML syntax checkers such as the one built into BBEdit use it to determine which constructs are legal according to the HTML standard you select Available DOCTYPEs include e HTML 3 2 e HTML 4 01 Transitional Frameset and Strict versions e XHTML 1 0 Transitional Frameset and Strict versions e XHTML 1 1 e Compact HTML CHTML 2 0 Although HTML 4 0 has been superseded by HTML 4 01 and most users will want to use the latter BBEdit s syntax checker continues to accept HTML 4 0 as well for historical reasons HTML Head and Body Every HTML document should contain lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt and lt BODY gt tag
279. he form Junior X Potter Jill Safai Dylan Schuyler Goode Walter Wang Chapter 8 Searching with Grep If you use this search pattern I 155 And this replacement string Mc Al The transformed list becomes Potter Junior X Safai Jill Goode Dylan Schuyler Wang Walter Advanced Grep Topics BBEdit s new PCRE based grep engine offers unparalleled syntactical power The topics below cover areas that show how grep can effectively match very complicated patterns of text matches which were impossible to achieve with older versions of BBEdit However with this power comes complexity If you are new to grep it is possible that the topics covered in this section will not make much sense to you That s OK The best way to learn grep is to use it in real life not by reading example patterns In many cases the basic grep syntax covered previously in this chapter will be all that you need If you are an experienced user of grep from previous versions of BBEdit however many of the topics covered below will be of great interest Matching Nulls The grep engine used in versions of BBEdit prior to 6 5 was unable to search text that contained null characters ASCII value zero but this limitation has since been removed Here s one way to match a null x 0 Backreferences The following charts explain the rules BBEdit uses for determining backreferences In Search Patterns Modifier Effect NO A backslash follow
280. he AppleScript Sourcebook http www AppleScriptSourcebook com An extensive collection of links and articles about AppleScript AppleScript Primer http www maccentral com columns briggs shtml MacCentral columnist Bill Briggs offers an ongoing series of lessons for beginning scripters Quite a range of topics covered increasing in difficulty as time goes on Note that the oldest columns are on the bottom MacScripter Net http macscripter net and http osaxen com A good selection of AppleScript related news and topics including MacScripter s Magazine a stand alone multimedia tutorial for AS beginners and a very comprehensive list of scripting additions on its related site ScriptWeb http www scriptweb com This site covers all scripting languages not just AppleScript Also it has an extensive directory of scripting additions Software FaceSpan http www facespan com FaceSpan lets you create real Macintosh applications using AppleScript It includes a visual development environment that lets you create your user interface to which you then attach scripts AppleScript Overview 233 IMPORTANT PreFab Player http www prefab com player html This handy utility for Mac OS 9 allows you complete control over the Macintosh user interface allowing you to script even unscriptable applications to a degree Script Debugger http www latenightsw com Despite the name it is more than a debugger itis
281. he Text Encodings panel of the preferences Here are the details of the steps that BBEdit goes through to determine the proper encoding for a file 1 If the file is well formed HTML or XML BBEdit looks for an encoding or meta charset gt directive that contains an character set supported by Mac OS X 2 If the file contains a BBEdit state resource BBEdit uses the encoding stored in the state resource 3 If the file contains a UTF 8 or UTF 16 Unicode byte order mark BBEdit opens it as that type of Unicode file 4 If the file has a resource that contains font information such as a styl resource MPW state resource or BBEdit state resource and that resource specifies a multi byte font BBEdit opens the file as a Unicode file 5 f you are opening the file with the Open command BBEdit uses the encoding specified Read As pop up menu on the Open dialog 6 Finally it uses the encoding specified by the If the file s encoding can t be guessed use pop up menu on the Text Files Opening panel of the Preferences window To change the encoding for a file after opening it open the File pop up menu on the window s status bar and use the Encoding submenu If an encoding change results in the conversion of a document s contents from a single byte script to a multi byte script BBEdit will mark the document as being dirty or changed Opening Existing Documents 27 Using the Open Command To open a file with the Open command
282. he corresponding backreference has previously matched in the pattern the condition is satisfied Here s an example of how this can be used Let s say we want to match the words red or blue and refer to whichever word is matched in the replacement pattern That s easy red blue To make it harder let s say that if and only if we match blue we want to optionally match a space and the word car if they follow directly afterward In other words we want to match red blue or if possible blue car but we do not want to match red car We cannot use the pattern red blue car because that will match red car Nor can we use red blue car blue because in our replacement pattern we want the backreference to only contain red or blue without the car Using a conditional subpattern however we can search for blue red 2 car Here s how this pattern works First we start with blue red When this subpattern matches blue 1 and 2 are set to blue and 43 is empty When it matches red V1 and V3 are set to red and 2 is empty Next comes the conditional subpattern 2 car The conditional test is on 2 the second backreferenced subpattern if 2 is set which in our case means it has matched the word blue then it will try to match car If V2 is not set however the entire conditional subpattern is skipped The question mark a
283. he item is a BBEdit document BBEdit opens it If it is a folder it is opened in a disk browser If it is an FTP URL clipping BBEdit will open the remote file or open an FTP Browser if the clipping points to a directory Otherwise BBEdit tells the Finder to open the file When opening a file group converted from BBEdit 5 x format BBEdit will mark the file group document dirty in need of saving and alert you to this You will thus be prompted to save the file group when closing it even if you have not made changes to it If you added nested folders they appear in the file group with disclosure triangles as in a Finder list view Click the triangle to reveal the files and folders inside that folder You can use a file group as the basis of a multi file search See Chapter 7 Searching for more information Items in file groups display the Projector status of the individual file just to the left of the file s icon Using File Groups 37 Note Note Note Note new in 7 0 Removing Files from a File Group To remove a file from a file group drag it from the file group into the Trash in the Finder or select the items you want to remove and click the Remove button Removing an item from a file group even by dragging it to the Trash does not delete the original file only its entry in the file group Making Backups BBEdit can automatically make a backup copy of a document before saving it You can also manually t
284. he root directory of the site To use this placeholder write your links as if they were all relative to the top of your web site including RELATIVE as the first directory in the path For example consider that you have the following file structure where each page includes a file which references the separate GIF image My Web Site Folderl Filel html Folder2 File2 html File3 html Folder3 Folder4 Folderb5 File4 html Graphics Buttons my footer button gif If you write a relative link as follows img src relative Graphics Buttons my_footer_button gif alt n gt and then run the Update command the following links will be generated In File1 html Graphics Buttons my footer button gif In File2 html Graphics Buttons my footer button gif In File3 html Graphics Buttons my footer button gif In File4 html Graphics Buttons my footer button gif Appendix C Placeholders and Include Files Note Include Files An include file or just an include is a special form of placeholder whose substitution happens to be the contents of another file If you have used C or certain other programming languages you may already be familiar with the concept Using includes you can reuse standard bits of text content or HTML markup in several templates or glossary entries without having to revise all of those individual files whenever you revise the included text Simple Includes A simple includ
285. heir positions in the standard Macintosh character set into HTML entities using either names or the code in decimal or hexadecimal You can specify whether the tool should ignore lt and gt This is useful when translating text already marked up as HTML You can also specify that all Unicode text should be converted to entities Templates In addition to providing many facilities for creation and markup of individual documents the HTML Tools also incorporate a Template facility which can be used to quickly create or revise a set of HTML documents that share a common format structure or content You can design a skeleton document make a template from it and then use that template over and over again to produce new pages ready to fill with content or to insert into existing text documents to provide an uniform structure or appearance Templates may also employ placeholders and include files see Appendix C adding even more power to this useful function Template Setup A folder named HTML Templates which contains some sample templates is provided as part of the standard BBEdit installation We suggest in most cases that you continue to use this as your templates folder If you would prefer however you can set up your own template folder wherever you like See Look for Templates and Include Files In on page 168 If you plan to maintain multiple sets of templates for different projects you may find this option very useful
286. her BBEdit uses its built in spelling checker or an external one You can also tell the built in spelling checker which dictionaries to use Built In This option specifies that BBEdit should use the built in spelling checker when you choose the Check Spelling command from the Text menu Use Dictionaries BBEdit can use more than one dictionary to perform spelling checks Click Enable to add the selected dictionary to the set of active dictionaries or click Disable to deactivate the selected dictionary Software Update Preferences 169 170 Note You cannot enable or disable the User Dictionary using this list it will always be active as long as the appropriate file is present in the BBEdit Preferences folder If there is no User Dictionary file a new empty file will be created the first time you perform a spelling check Word Services When this option is selected BBEdit uses an external spelling checker when you choose the Check Spelling command from the Text menu The external spelling checker must support Apple s Word Services Suite To set the external spelling checker click the Set button and select the application s icon You can also drag the spelling checker icon to the path box to the left of the Set button Startup Preferences The Startup preferences control what BBEdit does when you launch it or when the application icon is double clicked and there are no open windows in BBEdit even if the application is already
287. ialog which are the same as for the Hard Wrap command described later and the quote markers are reinserted Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Note When you use the Rewrap Quoted Text command on a rectangular selection lines will be padded with spaces as necessary Increase and Decrease Quote Level This command inserts or deletes a standard Internet quote character gt from the selected hard wrapped text or on the current line if there is no selection Strip Quotes This command removes all Internet style quoting from the selected hard wrapped text or from the entire document if there is no selection Hard Wrap This command wraps long lines by inserting hard line breaks and can reflow fill paragraphs if desired See How BBEdit Wraps Text later in this chapter for more information Zap Gremlins This command removes or replaces non printing characters Use this command when you have a file that may contain extraneous control characters or gremlins Zap Gremlins Zap Action v Filter Line Feeds F Zap Non ASCII Characters v Zap Control Characters V Zap Null ASCII 0 Character Zapped Characters Delete Replace with Code rA o Replace with mE Cancel Zap The checkboxes in the top half of the dialog box determine which types of characters the Zap Gremlins command affects while the radio buttons determine what is done with gremlins that are found Filter Line Feeds When
288. ibution package The BBEdit Talk mailing list is also a good resource for learning more about scripting To subscribe to this list please visit the support section of our web site http www barebones com support lists html Beginning with version 6 0 many facets of BBEdit s scripting support changed substantially Regardless of whether you are new to scripting BBEdit or are familiar with scripting previous versions we strongly recommend that you carefully review the sections BBEdit and AppleScript and Working with Scripts in this chapter In this chapter ADDIe5eripE OVOervIey uw eke iS que d e P RUN Qo Nor T AGE 229 About Macintosh Scripting 230 Scriptable Applications and Apple Events 230 Recordable Applications 231 Saving Scripts 231 Using Scripts with Applications 232 Scripting Resources 232 DBEdiGand ADple5cHDE ressorteren nu Ta a eser E ee S 234 Recording Scripts for BBEdit 234 Reading an AppleScript Dictionary 236 Sample Scripts 240 AppleScript Pitfalls 240 Moving Scripts from Pre 6 0 Versions of BBEdit 241 Workine with Senpi eteris talea red ER ERA ERR RENTES ES 247 Scripts Menu 247 Scripts Window 248 Organizing Scripts 248 e Attaching Scripts to Menu Items 248 AppleScript Overview If you are familiar with AppleScript you should have little difficulty scripting BBEdit It has a robust and highly flexible object model If you do not know much about script
289. ich allows you to see and open files in hidden folders like bin and usr When you open a file for which you do not have write privileges BBEdit will display a slash through the pencil icon in the status bar To edit the file click the pencil icon BBEdit will prompt you to confirm whether you wish to unlock the file Option click the pencil icon to skip the confirmation dialog When you are finished editing simply choose Save from the File menu BBEdit will prompt you to authenticate as a user with Administrator privileges Type your short username and password to save the file Opening Existing Documents There are several ways to open existing documents with BBEdit e Double click any file with a BBEdit document icon e If BBEdit is running choose the Open Open Hidden or Open Recent command from the File menu e Select the name of a file in a BBEdit editing window then use the Open Selection command in the File menu e Double click a file name in a browser s file list See Chapter 9 Browsers Drag a file s icon to the Windows floating window See Chapter 6 Working with Windows Drag a file s icon to the BBEdit icon or to an alias of the icon There is a bug in the Mac OS 9 Finder that can cause drag and drop not to work if you try to drop icons onto an alias of BBEdit This behavior is usually triggered by moving BBEdit to another disk or rebuilding your desktop If this happens throw away your alias to
290. ie foe o sob yap CA ere aote deien Ave fug get adding to recent list boolean ai fe fos ans make adding to favorites list boolean x fos as save reef set Pistellaneous print Print the specified objectis copy print reference fio femi var with properties print settings fs sevo ast print dialog boolean xA fe ecco vu extended copy cut paste redo 1 revert vid Pes You may want to make the window bigger if you have room on your screen It is kind of small by default Down the left side is a list of every event and object supported by the application An event is a verb it tells the application what to do A class is a noun a piece of data or a structured collection of data inside the program In BBEdit for instance classes are things like files windows the clipboard browsers and so on Suites The first thing you will notice is that the events and classes are divided into suites A suite is just a collection of related events and classes Apple for instance has decreed that all applications should support particular events which together are called the Required Suite Another Apple defined suite is the Standard Suite if an application has certain common functions they should use these standard terms so that scripters do not need to learn a new term for each application they work with After that it is a free for all each developer is free to organize their events and classes however
291. ield can be used to tell browsers a text message to be displayed while the object is loading For more information on the lt OBJECT gt tag consult the HTML 4 specification Param To pass parameters to a Java applet ActiveX control or plug in the lt PARAM gt tag can be used between the lt OBJECT gt and lt OBJECT gt or APPLET and APPLET tags Each parameter to be passed to the object requires a separate PARAM tag You must specify the name and value of each parameter the actual parameter names and values required will vary depending on the object being embedded HTML Tool Descriptions 207 208 Note Script This tag begins a section of client side script code by default JavaScript although some browsers support other scripting languages You can choose to execute a script contained in an external file by entering a URL in the Source field click File to choose the file using an Open dialog You can also enter values for the TYPE of script the script LANGUAGE it is written in and the character set or CHARSET of the script Mark the DEFER checkbox to add a DEFER attribute You can choose which character sets appear in the Charset pop up menu by using the Text Encodings panel of the Preferences window Map This tag embeds a client side image map in the document You must enter a name by which the map can be referenced in the Use Map attribute of the Image tag Individual clickable areas within the image map
292. ify its name here as well If you will control the applet via a client side script enter a name for it You should always enter the desired size for the applet s display area You can also specify alignment and white space around the applet along with ALT text to be displayed if the applet cannot be used Object The lt OBJECT gt tag is a generic tag for including almost any type of data in a page including images and Java applets It can also be used to insert ActiveX controls and data intended to be used by plug ins However it is an HTML 4 tag and may not be supported in all popular browsers For this reason we suggest using lt IMG gt and lt APPLET gt for those types of objects and use lt OBJECT gt only for embedding other types of data such as that used by plug ins For an example of this see the Web Design Group s HTML Help reference page http www htmlhelp com reference html40 special object html The lt OBJECT gt tag like the lt IMG gt and APPLET tags allows you to reserve screen space in the browser window recommend an amount of white space between the object and surrounding text align the object set its border specify alt text to be displayed if the object cannot be displayed and so forth You will also need to specify at least the codebase and class ID of the object for ActiveX controls and fill in the Data field for embedded objects such as Shockwave animations which will be handled by plug ins The Standby f
293. ike Through Teletype Text Underline Markup gt Frames Frame Set Frame No Frames Markup gt Check Document Syntax Cmd Ctl Y Document Links Cmd Ctl K Folder Syntax Folder Links Site Syntax Site Syntax Opt Site Links Site Links Opt Markup gt Update Document Cmd Ctl U Folder Site Site Opt Document Images Document Images Opt Folder Images Site Images Site Images Opt Markup Includes Persistent Include Include Placeholders 296 Appendix A Command Reference Markup gt Utilities Format Cmd Opt Shift F Format Optimize Translate Cmd Opt T Remove Comments Remove Markup Comment Uncomment Normalize Tag Case Make Tags Upper Case Make Tags Lower Case Markup gt Misc Dreamweaver Document Size Index Document Index Folder Index Site Cmd Ctl X GoLive Cleaner HomePage Cleaner PageMill Cleaner Markup gt Preview With Preview as Text in All Running Browsers Installed browsers Listing by Menu and Command Name 297 298 Listing by Default Key Equivalents Key Command Cmd 1 to Cmd 0 Cmd A Cmd B Cmd C Cmd D Cmd E Cmd F Cmd G Cmd H Cmd l Cmd J Cmd K Cmd L Cmd M Cmd N Cmd O Cmd P Cmd Q Cmd R Cmd S Cmd T Cmd U Cmd V Cmd W Cmd X Cmd Y Cmd Z Appendix A Command Reference Window Open windows Edit Select All Text Balance Edit Copy File Open Sel
294. ility With Old Patterns Elimination of Old Limitations Mew Quantihiers Non Greedy Cuantifiers Backreferences Mew Character Classes Other Backslash Escapes Non Capturing Parentheses Fancy Pants Extensions E Cancel f Clear gt 2 Select the marker you want to delete 3 Click Clear to clear the marker BBEdit also offers a Clear All Markers command which clears all the markers in the document in one fell swoop You can access this command by holding down the Option key and using the Mark pop up menu 70 Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit new in 7 0 2 Using Grep to Set Markers You can use the Find amp Mark All command in the Mark pop up menu to mark text that matches a grep pattern To learn more about using grep patterns see Chapter 8 Searching with Grep To use a grep pattern to mark text 1 Choose the Find amp Mark All command from the Mark submenu BBEdit opens the Find amp Mark All dialog box Find amp Mark All Search For Patterns a Fram Mt 6 Mark With MW Clear Existing Markers Cancel Find amp Mark 2 Type the pattern in the Search For field and the marker names in the Mark With field You can also choose stored patterns from the Patterns pop up menu 3 Click Find amp Mark to mark the matching text BBEdit searches the active window for text that matches the pattern and marks it the way you specified The Insert Submenu In addition to
295. in subfolders of the selected folder mark the Search Nested Folders checkbox The Skip Folders checkbox skips folders whose names are enclosed in parentheses The Search Invisible Folders checkbox allows you to search inside invisible folders You can also choose to search only text files or to search all file types If you have graphics or other types of files in the search set it may be a good idea to restrict the search to only text files This setting is in addition to any file filter see next section and is in fact applied before the filter 106 Chapter 7 Searching Note Note File Filters If you do not want to search every file in the set you selected but want to include only those that meet certain criteria such as those created on a certain date or only those created by BBEdit and not some other program or those that are C source code you can use a file filter Mark the Use File Filter checkbox and then choose the desired file filter from the Filters pop up menu If none of the filters you have already defined meets your needs you can define a new one or create a temporary filter The process of creating and managing file filters has changed from its original incarnation in BBEdit 6 0 If you use file filters and are not already familiar with this feature from BBEdit 6 5 we suggest you read through this section again New Filter To define a new saved file filter select New Filter from the pop up menu BBE
296. indexing HTML documents 216 Info button 50 Inline Elements submenu 206 inline placeholder 226 INPUT tag 205 INS tag 202 210 Insert Glossary Entry command 225 Insert pop up menu 50 inserted text 202 inserting files 71 72 inserting folder listings 72 inserting page breaks 72 inserting project listings 72 inserting text 71 inserting Toolbox calls 72 insertion placeholder 226 insertion point 46 installing BBEdit 9 international text 25 27 81 85 176 178 318 Internet Helpers globe menu 65 invisible characters 58 invisible files 29 on FIP servers 33 Invisible Folders 106 Java applets 207 JavaScript 201 202 208 K KBD tag 210 key icon 50 keyboard shortcuts 280 290 303 in dialogs 4 188 L LABEL tag 205 language source code 58 Languages Preferences 168 language sensitive glossary 224 launching BBEdit 19 LEGEND tag 205 LI tag 203 line breaks 24 62 line feeds 63 line numbers 48 on printouts 42 link checker 212 LINK tag 191 200 list items HTML 203 Lists submenu 203 longest match issue 126 lower case 61 Machine Info plug in obsolete 286 Macintosh Drag and Drop 48 see also drag and drop Macintosh line breaks 24 MacPerl 256 Macromedia Dreamweaver 215 Make Prototypes plug in obsolete 286 MAP tag 208 Mark pop up menu 49 69 markers clearing 70 setting 70 Markup menu 188 menu list HTML 203 menus 3 META tags 190 191 201 Misc submenu 215 monospaced font 203 210 mouse shortcuts 3
297. ine 14 Unknown or malformed close element lt font gt Last Saved 10 08 01 01 22 23 PM X La File Path PS SRL Beo sr hr lt D0CTYPE HTML PUBLIC W3C DTD HTML 4 81 EN http uni sw ang TR 1999 REC Htm 4061 19991 224 strict dtd gt dhtml zhead ti tle BBEdi t Error Browsers titlet meta name generator content BBEdit 5 5 head body gt h12BBEdi t Error Browsers lt hi gt ip Implicitlu closed paragraph tags are frowned upon in HTHL 4 81 stric p gt font size z 18 colorz FF B B 5Font tags are not al lowed lt font gt lt p be html 4 3 Fez Each entry in the list pane corresponds to an error warning or note You can use the checkboxes for each type of item to suppress or display the associated results as desired If you click on a entry in the file list BBEdit displays the location of the error If you double click an item in the file list BBEdit opens the associated file into an editing window and selects the section of text related to the error 150 Chapter 9 Browsers CHAPTER Preferences You can use the Preferences command to customize much of BBEdit s behavior You can decide which windows are open when you launch BBEdit set the default options for windows set the default options for searches and so on This chapter describes BBEdit s extensive preference options In this chapter The Preferences Commanders 5 eto doe uS aed RA aces Ree 1
298. ine numbers displayed via the Show Line Numbers option in the Status Bar preference panel you can click in the line number as well The pointer changes to a right arrow when it is in the left margin Click and drag to select multiple lines Double click to select an entire paragraph double click and drag to select a range of paragraphs If this option is off clicking in the left margin moves the insertion point to the beginning of the clicked line as in previous versions of BBEdit Double Click to Balance When this preference is turned on you can double click any opening or closing parenthesis brace or bracket to select the entire range of text enclosed by a balanced pair Confirm Non Undoable Editing Actions To have BBEdit stop warning you when you are about to perform an action that cannot be undone turn this checkbox off Use Hard Line Numbering in Soft Wrapped Views If this switch is turned on the line number bar cursor position display and Go To Line commands in editing views will use line numbers that correspond to hard carriage returns in the document rather than to soft wrapped line breaks as in previous versions of BBEdit Use Emacs Key Bindings If turned on this option allows you to use the basic Emacs navigation keystrokes to move around in editing views It is not a full Emacs emulation mode rather it is more of a comfort blanket for individuals with Emacs key bindings hard wired
299. ing bracket For example Character Class Matches xyz any one of the characters x y z xyz any character except x y Z a z any character in the range a to z You can use any number of characters or ranges between the brackets Here are some examples Character Class Matches aeiou any vowel aeiou any character that is not a vowel a zA 20 9 any character from a z A Z or 0 9 aeiou0 9 any character that is neither a vowel nor a digit A character class matches when the search encounters any one of the characters in the pattern However the contents of a set are only treated as separate characters not as words For example if your search pattern is beans and the text in the window is lima beans BBEdit will report a match at the a of the word lima To include the character in a set or a range place it immediately after the opening bracket To use the character place it anywhere except immediately after the opening bracket To match a dash character hyphen in a range place it at the beginning of the range to match it as part of a set place it at the beginning or end of the set Or you can include any of these character at any point in the class by escaping them with a backslash Character Class Matches 10 9 any digit or aeiou a vowel or A 42 a dash orA Z A any character in the range from toA aeiou any vowel or aei ou any vowel or Chapter 8 S
300. ing though read on for an introduction to the necessary concepts 229 230 Note About Macintosh Scripting In System 7 Pro Apple introduced the Open Scripting Architecture OSA and with it AppleScript OSA and AppleScript became a standard part of the Macintosh experience and both have been with us ever since AppleScript is by far the most popular OSA language but there are others including UserLand Frontier and a relatively new JavaScript implementation Most OSA languages are capable of accomplishing more or less similar things although the actual commands to do so are usually very different from one language to the next In this chapter we will focus on AppleScript since it is the scripting language that comes with the Mac OS However BBEdit can be scripted by any OSA language and we will use OSA script and AppleScript interchangeably in this chapter just to remind you of that Unlike macro utilities such as QuicKeys or Keyquencer OSA scripts do not with occasional exceptions manipulate an application s user interface In other words an OSA script does not operate by pretending it is a user pulling down menus clicking with the mouse and typing on the keyboard It is technically possible for an OSA script to do so but this is not the primary use for scripts OSA scripts talk directly to a program s internals bypassing its user interface and allowing scripts to interact directly with its data or facilities If you
301. ing dialog is shown on the following page Note You set the default settings for most printing options in the Printing section of the Preferences window To print one copy of the active document without opening the print dialog box choose the Print One Copy command from the File menu Chapter 3 Working with Files Print Printer HP Laserjet 55i m Saved Settings Standard m _ BBEdit 6 5 oo 3 E Font Courier 10 4 spaces per tab C Use Document s Font Monaco 9 4 spaces per tab Rl Fractional Widths Options Print Selection Only Preview Cancel Print gt Options Available from the Print Dialog You can set the following options from the print dialog box Font Button Click this button to open a dialog box that lets you set the font size style and tab settings to use while printing Use Document s Font When this option is selected BBEdit uses the document s font when printing Fractional Widths When this option is selected BBEdit prints proportionally spaced fonts with better letter spacing This option works only on PostScript printers Options Button Click this button to open the Printing Options dialog box See The Printing Options Command below Print Selection Only When this option is selected BBEdit prints only the selected text Printing 41 42 Note The Printing Options Command The Printing Options command in the Edit menu lets you further specify how BBEdit p
302. ing it This allows glossary entries to be inserted in the middle of a line rather than as a block of text You can use the INLINE cookie in a glossary entry to achieve the same effect but only for that one entry Glossary Is Language Sensitive Mark this checkbox to make BBEdit s glossary language sensitive If this feature is active then each time you bring a window to the front BBEdit automatically selects the first glossary set whose name maps to the same language as that window For example if the front window is an HTML document BBEdit selects the first glossary set whose name ends in html or htm or any of the other file suffixes mapped to HTML in the Languages preference panel If there is no such entry the active glossary set is unchanged HTML Colors Preferences The HTML Colors preferences let you choose the appearance of the Web Safe Colors palette Color Palette Layout You can choose from four layouts 36 x 6 a horizontal layout 6 x 36 a vertical layout and two different VisiBone layouts which organize the colors in a sort of circular layout that places similar colors close together VisiBone 2 is a newer more compact representation Color Swatch Size You can choose the size of the swatches to be displayed in the palette The default is Small Chapter 10 Preferences Color Picker The Color Picker option allows you to choose whether the color swatch buttons in various HTML dialogs use BBEdit s Web safe
303. inning of word Delete Shift same as Forward Delete Forward Delete Deletes selection range or character after to the right of the insertion point Forward Delete Command Deletes all characters forward to end of the current line Forward Delete Option Deletes all characters forward to end of word Forward Delete Shift same as Forward Delete alone Note The meaning of the Command and Option modifiers listed above may be exchanged depending on which settings you have selected for Exchange Command and Option Key Behavior in the Text Editing panel of the Preferences window 304 Appendix B Editing Shortcuts Emacs Key Bindings The Text Editing panel of the Preferences window contains a checkbox labeled Use Emacs Key Bindings When this option is turned on BBEdit will enable the following Emacs style keyboard navigation commands The Escape key is specified in lieu of the Emacs Meta key to use these key equivalents press and release the Escape key followed by the specified letter key for example to type Esc V press and release the Escape key and then type the letter V Key Sequence Action Ctl A Ctl B Ctl D Ctl E Ctl F Ctl G Ctl K Ctl L Ctl N Ctl O Ctl P Ctl R Ctl S Ctl T Ctl U Ctl V Ctl W Ctl Y Ct beginning of line Move insertion point to start of current line backward char Move insertion point backward 1 place delete char Delete forward 1 character end of line Move insertio
304. ins you place directly in the Plug Ins subfolder of the BBEdit Support folder will appear as individual items in the Tools menu If you place them in subfolders within the main Plug Ins folder they will appear in submenus of the Tools menu that mirror this subfolder structure In the Tools window such subfolders will appear as separate sublists plug ins located at the top level of the Plug Ins folder will appear in the sublist named Plug Ins The Set Key Button The Set Key button in the BBEdit Tools floating window lets you assign key equivalents to a plug in You can use any combination of the Command Shift Option and Control keys in the key equivalents Assigning a Key to a BBEdit Tool To assign a key to a BBEdit plug in 1 Select the tool you wish to assign a key equivalent to in the Tools palette 2 Click the Set Key button to display the Set Key dialog Set Key Keystroke for Convert to ASCIL Reset no keystroke defined Cancel d OK 280 Chapter 15 BBEdit Plug Ins Warning 3 Type the key equivalent You can use any key combined with Command plus Shift Option or Control modifiers if desired The equivalent must use at least the Command or the Control modifier key to be valid You can also use Function keys with or without additional modifiers 4 Click Save If you try to assign a key sequence that is already used elsewhere BBEdit will warn you that there is a conflict and ask you whether you want to reas
305. ion shows or hides all of the icons in the status bar Button Puffiness On Mac OS 9 you can use this option to choose the degree of the 3D effect used on the status bar buttons from minimal to excessive In Mac OS X this option is not available Status Bar Preferences 173 174 Note Text Colors Preferences The Text Colors preferences let you select the colors that BBEdit uses when the syntax coloring option is on You can also select a default window background color and a default text color which will apply to all text windows although we feel compelled to point out that there are good reasons why the default Macintosh text color scheme is what it is You can turn on syntax coloring globally by e setting the Syntax Coloring option in the Editor Defaults preference panel You can turn on syntax coloring for any individual document window by e choosing Syntax Coloring from the Text Options pop up menu left e selecting the Syntax Coloring option in the Text Options dialog The color bars show the colors that BBEdit uses to display different language elements To change colors click the color box BBEdit will open the system Color Picker dialog box that you can use to select a new color To restore all the colors to their default settings click the Reset to Factory Colors button When the Color Attributes Separately checkbox is selected as is the default BBEdit lets you specify different colors for HTML attribute names att
306. irst argument and any variables in the include statement are passed as additional arguments All these can be retrieved via ARGV in your Perl script You can now include scripts written in any Unix scripting language that can be run from the Shebang menu Any text sent to STDOUT by the script will be taken as the value of the bbinclude operation and inserted into the HTML file If an error occurs while running the script the STDERR output if any will be inserted into the file along with the STDOUT and a single line indicating the error will be added to the error browser For example enter this directive in your HTML file lt bbinclude foo pl length 2 width 3 gt lt end bbinclude gt Then use this source code for foo pl and save it in the same folder as the HTML file or in the Templates and Includes folder specified in the HTML Web Sites panel of your BBEdit preferences usr bin perl w my file shift ARGV my args ARGV my Sarea Sargs length Sargs width print Filename file n print Area Sarea n 314 Appendix C Placeholders and Include Files When you run the Update command BBEdit will place the file name in the script s variable file and the length and width variables in the associative array hash args After the update the BBEdit file will look like this 1 bbinclude foo pl length 2 width 3 gt Filename Mac HD Desktop Fol
307. isplay and editing preferences for the current window as with the Text Options command in the Edit menu Chapter 10 Preferences Markers This option displays the Mark pop up menu which lets you define and locate named markers in a document File Options This option displays the File pop up menu which lets you set end of line and other compatibility options Insert Menu This option displays the Insert pop up menu which lets you insert the contents of another text file or a toolbox call template into the current document File Path This option displays the Path pop up menu which shows the location of the file being edited within the folder hierarchy You can choose any folder from this menu to open it in the Finder Get Info Icon This option displays the Info button which opens an Info window showing the file s path along with character word line and page counts for the file and the selection Super Get Info Icon This option displays the Super Get Info button which asks Super Get Info to display file information pertaining to the current document This option is available only if you are running on Mac OS X and have Super Get Info installed on your system Document Icon This option displays the Document Icon button which serves as a proxy for the document file You can click the icon to reveal the current file in the Finder or drag it anywhere the original file can be dragged Show All Hide All This opt
308. isting at the insertion point or replaces the selected text You can also use the Folder Listing command in the Insert pop up menu in the status bar to insert a folder listing or you can drag a folder s icon from the Finder into a BBEdit editing window to insert a folder listing Inserting Paths The Insert File Path command inserts the full path information for a selected file into the document you are editing and the Insert Folder Path command inserts the full path information for the contents of the selected folder hierarchy When you use these commands BBEdit opens a directory dialog box that lets you select the file or folder BBEdit inserts the path information at the insertion point or replaces the selected text You can also use the File Path or Folder Path command in the Insert pop up menu in the status bar to insert path information Inserting a Toolbox Call Template To paste a call template for a Toolbox function from THINK Reference select the function s name and choose Toolbox Call Template from the Insert submenu of the Edit menu BBEdit launches THINK Reference if necessary and replaces the selected text with a call template for the function If there is no selection when you choose this command BBEdit prompts you for the name of a function and inserts its call template at the insertion point You can also use the Toolbox Call Template command in the Insert pop up menu in the status bar to insert a Toolbox call template
309. ith it Consider an include file named footer html which contains the following HR IMG SRC MY_GRAPHIC ALT MY_ALT_DESC gt lt H1 gt MY_TITLE lt H1 gt lt BIG gt This document copyleft 1998 2002 by Sid Zookim lt BIG gt In your document the Include reference would look like this lt BODY gt lt bbinclude footer html MY_GRAPHIC test1l gif MY_ALT_DESC a test image MY_TITLE A Test Title E lt end bbinclude gt BODY Appendix C Placeholders and Include Files Note that the values of placeholders are specified inside the HTML comment of a persistent include using a PLACEHOLDER Value syntax The quote marks around the value are mandatory if you need to include a quote mark in the actual value escape it with a backslash Including AppleScripts BBEdit allows included files to be compiled AppleScript scripts The script should contain an on include handler which is passed two parameters a reference to the file from which the script is being called and a record containing one field for each variable passed in the bbinclude directive Scripts can of course also retrieve information from BBEdit other scriptable applications or the Mac OS The handler s return value is inserted into the file that included it Given the HTML document below html head lt title gt Include Test lt title gt lt meta name generator content BBEdit 7 0 gt lt head gt
310. ithin the window without truncation do not display a tool tip To create a glossary item type or paste the desired text or text and keywords into a BBEdit document window and then save the text into an appropriate place within the Glossary folder 223 224 Note You can create multiple levels of subfolders inside the Glossary folder to better organize different types of content The first level of such subfolders appear in the Set pop up menu of the Glossary window allowing you to reveal only the group of glossary items you wish to work with at a given time Any glossary items that are not placed in a subfolder are always shown in the Glossary window as are the contents of the Universal Items set Language Sensitivity of the Glossary If you have selected the Glossary Is Language Sensitive option in the Glossary preference panel BBEdit will select a glossary set to use with the current document according to the following rules If there is a glossary set whose name ends in the same suffix as the document that set will be selected If there is a glossary set with the same language mapping as the document as determined from the mappings in the Languages preference panel that set will be selected If there are multiple glossary sets with the same language mapping for example HTML Glossary html and HTML Glossary shtml the glossary set that appears first in the Set pop up menu will be selected You can control th
311. ition Font Settings When this option is selected BBEdit restores the font information stored with a document Otherwise it uses the default font settings Selection Range When this option is selected BBEdit restores the insertion point or selection range to the same position as when the file was closed Otherwise the insertion point is at the beginning of the file Scrollbar Position When this option is selected BBEdit restores the scroll bar position to the same position as when the file was closed Otherwise BBEdit opens the file with the top of the file showing Option Settings When selected BBEdit reads document specific options such as soft wrap show invisibles and line numbering from the saved state information Printing Settings When this option is selected BBEdit restores the printing information stored with a document Otherwise it uses the default printing settings Default State for New Documents The Default State for New Documents setting lets you choose the kind of state information that BBEdit adds when you create and save a file You can choose to save no state information MPW state information or BBEdit state information See the section Saving State Information in Chapter 3 for more details on the different types of states State Preferences 171 172 Always Add State When this option is selected BBEdit always adds state information when you save a file Otherwise BBEdit saves state informati
312. jector state information the Projector button displays a dialog box that shows the path to the current document as well as its revision status If a file does not contain such information this button will not be displayed The Info button displays a dialog box that lists the number of characters words lines and pages in the document Clicking this button is the same as choosing the Get Info command from the Window menu The Super Get Info button asks Super Get Info to display information regarding the current document This button is available only if you are running on Mac OS X and have Super Get Info installed on your computer Super Get Info is a Mac OS X file info utility from Bare Bones Software see our web site for more details Tr The Document button represents the current document Clicking this button is the same as choosing Reveal in Finder from the Window menu it opens the Finder window that contains the document You can also drag the Document button to any other application or you can drag it to the Trash which is the same as choosing Close amp Delete from the File menu The key control lets you show and hide the status bar on Mac OS 9 On Mac OS X the status bar display is toggled by the button in the top right corner of the window re The Function Pop Up Menu The Function pop up menu lists the functions defined in this file for a programming language source file or for an HTML document the tags des
313. k shown above Syntax Coloring When this option is selected and the editing window contains a document in a programming language BBEdit recognizes BBEdit displays keywords and other language elements in color BBEdit uses several methods to determine what language if any to use for a particular file The primary way to activate syntax coloring in a document is simply to save it with a file name extension that indicates what programming or markup language the file contains For example if you save your file with html at the end of the file name BBEdit will color your HTML tags and anchors Other common suffixes are tex for TeX files and c for C files For any file whose name does not have an extension or whose name has an extension that does not match any of the mappings in BBEdit s Languages preferences BBEdit will attempt to guess what language the file contains and apply the appropriate syntax coloring If BBEdit guesses wrong or is unable to guess you can resort to the Language submenu of the Text Options pop up menu in the status bar or the Language pop up menu in the Text Options dialog which gives you the ability to manually select any installed language to be applied to the document regardless of its name If the file is saved with BBEdit state the manual language selection will persist and override any suffix mapping By default BBEdit recognizes over 20 different languages and several dozen suffix mappings You c
314. king with Project Builder 269 Check In Checks the source file in the frontmost window or some other file into the project The local copy will be deleted The Check In dialog appears Check In mone selected l a n P File Task Description re L3 Keep Modifiable L Check In as Branch U Delete after Checking In E Fana J Touch after Checking In W Verify Contents File This field defaults to the frontmost window s file Click the File button to choose a different file or drag a file from the Finder to the rectangle displaying the file path Task Description A notes field that can be used to record the reason the file was checked out Keep Modifiable Check this box to allow you to continue to edit the file after it has been checked in Use this function when you wish to record a revision but are not yet finished working on the file Check In as Branch Check this box to start a new branch on the source tree for this file Delete After Checking In Check this box to delete the local copy of a file after checking it in Touch After Checking In Check this box to set the source file s modification date and time to the current date and time Verify Contents Check this box to make sure the file written to the database matches the local file before deleting the local file 270 Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Check Out Checks the source file in the frontmost window or some other file
315. l background information or more details on Unicode the Unicode Consortium web site is the best place to start http www unicode org Saving Unicode Files BBEdit lets you save documents that use character set encodings other than Mac Roman even multi byte character sets When saving a file you can choose to save text composed in any script with any encoding In addition to the standard character set encodings BBEdit also lets you save the files in a variety of plain Unicode files e UTF 8 e UTF 8 no BOM e UTF 16 e UTF 16 no BOM e UTF 16 byte swapped e UTF 16 byte swapped no BOM Here are details about what each of the above options means e UTF 8 UTF 8 encoding is a more compact variant of Unicode that uses 8 bit tokens where possible to encode frequently used sequences from the file This format makes it easier to view and edit content in non Unicode aware editors Unicode 85 86 e UTF 16 UTF 16 encoding always uses 16 bit tokens e no BOM When saving Unicode files you should always include a byte order mark BOM so that the reading application knows what byte order the file s data is in For maximum compatibility the BOM should be used whenever possible Use one of the no BOM options only if there is a specific reason to do so such as providing compatibility with software that malfunctions when a BOM is present For purposes of recognition when you use this option the UTF 16 BOM is FEFF and the UTF 8 BOM is
316. l not be available in the menu 87 88 Note Bring All to Front In Mac OS 9 each application s windows are all grouped together in a single layer In Mac OS X windows from different applications can be interspersed BBEdit s Bring All to Front command will bring all un minimized BBEdit windows to the front If you are not using Mac OS X this command will not be available in the menu Palettes The Palettes submenu provides quick access to all of BBEdit s numerous tool palettes and floating utility windows In previous versions of BBEdit the commands to access these items were scattered the HTML Tools palettes were in the Markup menu the AppleScript floating window in the Script menu and so on Choosing an item from this submenu toggles the visibility of the corresponding palette When moved or resized palettes and floating windows now automatically snap to the edges of the screen and the edges of other palettes You can override this behavior by holding down the Shift key while dragging or resizing ASCII Table The ASCII Table command opens a floating window that contains the 127 entries of the ASCII character set plus all of the standard extended 8 bit Macintosh character set MacRoman The decimal value for each character is displayed in the center column while in the right hand column the character value is displayed in either hexadecimal escape format or in URL encoded format based on the language mapping of the
317. lable only on Mac OS 9 this command exports the current document to a CGI Script a Droplet a drag and drop application or a Runtime a self contained script that does not require MacPerl installed to execute If additional export file format extensions are installed in the MacPerl Extensions folder in the same folder as MacPerl itself these will appear in this submenu as well These features are specific to MacPerl When asking MacPerl to edit a Perl runtime BBEdit will first check to see whether it is configured as the Editor helper in the Internet control panel If the Editor helper does not exist or does not point to BBEdit BBEdit will ask you if you want to change this helper setting If you choose Yes BBEdit will set the Editor helper to point to itself and proceed otherwise it will abort and not ask MacPerl to edit the runtime Find in Perl Reference Find in Reference Looks up the selected text using the appropriate reference application If there is no selection a dialog will open in which you can enter a search string On Mac OS 9 this command is named Find in Perl Reference and reference lookups are displayed in Shuck a POD viewer that comes with MacPerl Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools Note On Mac OS X this command is named Find in Reference and reference lookups are performed by command line tools perldoc for Perl pydoc for Python and displayed as text in a window in BBEdit The Find in Reference
318. launch BBEdit and open the Preferences window by choosing Preferences from the BBEdit menu on Mac OS X or from the Edit menu on earlier Mac OS versions For now we will only set the preferences for working with HTML Refer to the following sections of this manual for further details e HTML Colors Preferences on page 162 to choose a layout for the Web Safe Colors palette e HTML Markup Preferences on page 163 to choose options for formatting HTML tags and attributes Configuring the HTML Tools 187 188 Tip HTML Palette Preferences on page 164 to select the appearance of the HTML Tools palette HTML Tools Preferences on page 165 to tweak the function of the HTML Tools HTML Web Sites Preferences on page 166 to tell BBEdit where your web site is locally and on your server Using the HTML Tools There are two ways to use BBEdit s HTML Tools via the HTML Tools floating palette right and through the Markup pull down menu These two methods are functionally equivalent in most respects Most beginning users find it easiest to use the HTML Tools through the palette There are three basic types of buttons on the HTML Tools palette e Those you simply click to perform an action or bring up a settings dialog before performing an action for example New Document Those that provide pop up menus containing related options for example Heading Frames and Utilities e Those that contain both a clickable button and a po
319. lays a tool tip showing the full window title this is useful for names that have been truncated with ellipses because they are too long to fit within the width of the window If you hold down the Option key the tool tip will appear instantly with no hovering delay Holding down the Command key displays the full pathname for document windows or other relevant windows such as disk browsers and FTP browsers HTML Markup Tools The main HTML Markup Tools palette is a comprehensive listing of BBEdit s numerous HTML markup commands See HTML Tools Palette on page 217 in Chapter 11 for details on what these commands do You can choose which commands appear on the main HTML Tools Palette in the HTML Palette panel of the Preferences window Several other HTML palettes are available each with a specific focus These include Block CSS Entities Font Style Forms Inline Phrase Tables Utilities and Web Safe Colors For more information on these tools please see Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Perl Unix Tools Filters and Scripts On Mac OS 9 BBEdit offers integration with MacPerl the classic Mac OS port of the Perl programming language If you have a copy of MacPerl installed on your system and the Perl Integration checkbox is selected in the Tools panel of the Preferences window you will see Perl Tools Perl Filters and Perl Scripts menu items available at the bottom of the Palettes submenu MacPerl is freely available for more inf
320. lders whose names are enclosed in parentheses should not be checked Check Nested Folders indicates that nested folders should be included in the check If a Check Syntax or Check Links operation generates any errors or warnings BBEdit will display an error results browser listing For more details on the new error results browser format please refer to Chapter 9 Syntax A syntax check validates your HTML document to the specification defined in the lt DOCTYPE gt SGML prolog at the top of the HTML document Errors are displayed in an error results browser Scroll through the list at the top of the window to see the errors that have been found click to see the text that caused the error in the lower part of the window Double click an error message to open the file for editing Note that an HTML document can display the way you expect it to in a browser and still contain invalid HTML Browsers are designed to be lenient in the markup they accept so you can get away with a certain amount of sloppy markup However producing well formed syntactically correct HTML documents is the best way to assure that your document will display in some reasonable fashion in a wide variety of Web browsers even those you have not tested the page in Links This command causes BBEdit to scan your document or a folder of documents looking for links and object references such as images and Java applets that cannot be resolved Note that BBEdit only
321. le clicking the item directly Chapter 12 Using the Glossary new in 7 0 The Insert Glossary Entry command in the Edit menu brings up a dialog window in which you can select a glossary item and insert it at the insertion point or in place of the current selection with the Insert button You can move quickly to an item in this window by typing its first few letters from the keyboard or by using Tab and Shift Tab to navigate forward and backward through the list new in 7 0 Another way to insert a glossary item is with the Auto Complete Glossary command in the Edit menu If there is a current selection BBEdit will look for and insert a glossary item whose name begins with the selected text If there is more than one such item BBEdit will display the Insert Glossary Entry dialog to allow you to choose one if there are no matching glossary items it will beep to signal an error If no text is currently selected BBEdit will scan backward from the insertion point to the nearest non alphanumeric character and match that text in the same manner This allows you to quickly insert a glossary item on the fly by typing the first few letters of its name and choosing Auto Complete Glossary from the menu IMPORTANT For easier access you may want to assign key equivalents to these commands by using the Set Menu Keys command in the Edit menu on Mac OS 9 or in the BBEdit Application menu on Mac OS X Assigning Key Equivalents to Glossary Items
322. lication BBEdit 7 0 to get display font of text window 1 You can in fact just write get display font of window 1 AppleScript will figure out that window 1 is more specifically a text window and therefore has a display font property even though the generic window class does not have any such property All the properties of the object are available even if you did not use its specific class name You can set the properties using the set event like so tell application BBEdit 7 0 to set display font of text window 1 to Geneva Let s go back to the window class for a moment Most of the properties of this class are marked with the abbreviation r o That stands for Read Only In other words you can only get these properties not set them Sample Scripts BBEdit includes a selection of sample scripts in the BBEdit Documentation folder all of which contain descriptions of their own operation To learn more about a sample script just open it in your preferred script editor You can also check our web site for more sample scripts AppleScript Pitfalls Here are some things to watch out for when scripting BBEdit with AppleScript The Escape Issue AppleScript uses the backslash character as an escape character You can use r to indicate a carriage return or Vt to indicate a tab character More importantly you can use or to include a quote mark or apostrophe in a string that is delimited by quotes or apostrophes If you want
323. ll Line Breaks Unix HH _ Western Mac OS Ro Encoding Creating and Saving Documents 23 24 Note Setting the File Creator The file creator is the information stored with a file that tells the Finder which application created the file The default creator is naturally BBEdit but you can choose other types from this pop up menu If you save a file with a file creator other than BBEdit double clicking the file will launch the application that matches that file creator If you do not have that application installed you might get an error message You can still open the file in BBEdit by dragging it onto the BBEdit application icon or by using BBEdit s Open command You can add additional file types and set the default for this pop up menu with the File Types panel of the Preferences window Saving State Information The state information that BBEdit can save with a file includes the placement of the window the scroll bar position the font and size of the text and so on BBEdit stores either MPW state information or BBEdit state information The following table shows what information is saved Information MPW State BBEdit State Window position and size Font amp Tab E Scroll bar setting Current selection range Rectangular selection Printing options Text display options Manual language selection Character set encoding You can choose which state information to sav
324. ll beep after it finishes launching Modifier Function Option Suppress startup items only Shift Disable all plug ins tools external services and startup items 19 20 Note Startup Items When launched BBEdit will look for a folder named Startup Items in the BBEdit Support folder If this folder is found BBEdit will open any items it finds in the folder If the items present are documents of a type that BBEdit knows how to handle such as text files or file groups BBEdit will open them directly If you place a compiled OSA AppleScript or any other OSA compliant scripting language script in this folder BBEdit will execute the script If you place a folder alias here BBEdit will open a disk browser window based at that folder If you place other types of items in this folder BBEdit will ask the Finder to open them If you often edit HTML files for instance you may want to place an alias to your Web browser or your visual HTML editor in the BBEdit Startup Items folder so that it will start up automatically whenever you run BBEdit If you wish you may place the actual Startup Items folder in any convenient location create an alias to it and place the resulting alias in the BBEdit Support folder Be sure to name the alias Startup Items so that BBEdit can locate it Memory Considerations On Mac OS 9 BBEdit uses system memory often referred to as temporary memory for documents and for most editing operation
325. looks at pages on your site as defined in the HTML Web Sites preference panel not at any links that go offsite BBEdit will in fact generate warnings for offsite links unless you disable the Remote Links warning in the HTML Tools preferences Update The Update submenu contains commands for updating IMG tags includes and placeholders in the current document the selected folder or the current site as selected in the HTML Web Sites preference panel BBEdit displays a results browser after the operation so you can see what was changed Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools For more details on the results browser format that BBEdit displays please refer to Chapter 9 Choose the Document Folder or Site command from the Update submenu to update all includes and placeholders in the selected set of file s Appendix C contains information regarding the use of placeholders Choose the Document Images Folder Images or Site Images command from the Update submenu to update the HEIGHT and WIDTH attributes of image tags and optionally to insert empty ALT attributes when missing in the selected set of file s When you are updating a folder or a site using either of these sets of tools a dialog like the one below appears Update Folder none selected fs C Skip Folders wi Check Nested Folders Update The pop up menu to the right of the path box includes all of the web sites that you have specified in the HTML Web Sites p
326. lorer Netscape Navigator or Communicator Mozilla and OmniWeb available These are the most widely used browsers but they often do not display pages the same way A general purpose FTP client such as Fetch or Interarchy While BBEdit does have built in FTP tools such dedicated applications are naturally more powerful and of course also allow you to upload things other than text files You will find them useful in creating and managing your web site Access to a Web server either your own or someone else s where you will publish your pages on the Web Your Internet provider is a good place to start and can help you find the answers to questions about obtaining your own domain name setting up your own dedicated server and so on You will also want to be familiar with BBEdit s basic capabilities The other chapters in this manual will help you learn more about editing and searching text using BBEdit Configuring the HTML Tools Before using the HTML Tools you should prepare your source documents and your copy of BBEdit Although you can change your settings at any time we suggest visiting the Preferences window before starting First create a folder to contain working draft copies of your HTML documents Put the HTML documents you are working on in this folder either copying them from your web site or moving them from elsewhere on your hard drive then upload them to your Web server when you are satisfied with them Next
327. ls CodeWarrior to issue a make command to recompile and link all modified files in the open project Debug Tells CodeWarrior to run the open project in the CodeWarrior debugger Run Tells CodeWarrior to run the open project without using the source debugger If choosing this command causes CodeWarrior to recompile files compiler errors may not be reported to BBEdit If that happens use Make instead and then select Run 268 Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools new in 7 0 Note Note Note Note Working with Project Builder Project Builder is Apple s native development environment for Mac OS X If you have version 2 1 or later of Project Builder installed you can configure it to use BBEdit as an external editor Earlier versions of Project Builder do not incorporate external editor support To enable this integration first turn on the Project Builder option in the Tools panel of BBEdit s Preferences window Then switch to Project Builder open its Preferences window and select the file node in the File Types section Use the popup menu for the Preferred Editor field of this node to choose External Editor and the attached submenu to select BBEdit from the list of available editors Once you have completed these steps Project Builder will automatically ask BBEdit to open any files you select and BBEdit will notify Project Builder whenever you save a file that it asked BBEdit to open Project Builder 2 1 is
328. lters act like plug ins for text manipulation There are two ways to run filters through the Filters list palette or the Filters submenu at the bottom of the MacPerl Shebang menu To open the Filters list palette select it from the Palettes submenu in the Window menu You can run a filter by selecting it from the list and clicking the Run button or you can simply double click the filter name in the list Hold down the Option key while double clicking a filter or selecting it from the menu to open the file for editing instead of running it Optionally filter output can be sent to a different window instead of overwriting the selection hold down the Command key while selecting a filter from the Filters list palette or from the Filters submenu to open the Filter Options dialog Changes made in the Filter Options dialog affect all filters and remain in effect until you make changes in the Filter Options dialog again Using Filters with Multi Byte Text Filters are now two byte savvy If the front window is Unicode the selection is written out as big endian Unicode with a byte order mark Your filter is responsible for handling the input correctly If the front window contains 8 bit text the input is written out as usual Perl Python and Shell Scripting 261 262 Scripts Scripts are similar to filters but do not operate on the text of the frontmost window Like filters you can run scripts from either a submenu at the bottom of the
329. ly available for Perl scripts Run Runs the script in the frontmost window by default Any output from the script is displayed in a new BBEdit window On Mac OS 9 this output window is titled Perl Output and the file is created in the MacPerl Support folder in the BBEdit Support folder On Mac OS X the output window is titled Unix Script Output and the file is created in the Unix Support folder in the BBEdit Support folder By default errors for Perl and Python scripts are displayed in an error browser errors for other languages are displayed as text in the output window Hold down the Option key while choosing Run to display the Run a Script dialog which allows you to set options that will be used when the command is executed Run a Script Selection Only C Use Debugger C Save Before Running C Run in Terminal 3 chdir to Script s Folder Output to Output Options New Window C Clear Before Writing Unix Output File C Save After Writing Hello World pl log f Cancel Selection Only Check this box to execute only the selected text in the frontmost document window Save Before Running Check this box to save the source file before running the script Output to Choose to display output in a new window to direct it to the Perl Unix Output file or to write it to a file in the Logs folder in the Perl Unix Support folder Perl Python and Shell Scripting 259 260 Note Use Debugger Check
330. m Options 3 P lUse File Filter 3 L current criteria m f Edit gt BBEdit waits briefly before displaying the Command key equivalents so that you can type a sequence quickly without making the dialog flicker Human Interface Notes 5 Changes from Previous Versions BBEdit 7 0 builds on the strengths of versions 6 0 and 6 5 and extends its reach even further into the realm of Mac OS X while also bringing important new capabilities to users of both Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X Major features and enhancements added in this version include e Integrated access to CVS allows you to transparently work with source files from multiple repositories Mac OS X e Menu driven and key bindable Glossary item selection makes inserting frequently used text even faster and easier Easily configure multiple web sites via the HTML Web Site preferences and work with them via the HTML Tools e Close Current Tag command speeds and simplifies HTML tag creation and editing e Expanded character set handling capabilities introduced in BBEdit 7 0 2 e Support for rectangular text selections including copying pasting and application of many text transformations e Completely redesigned Sort Lines and Process Duplicate Lines plug ins offer grep pattern support for sorting extracting and handling text more flexibly than ever before Bring on your log files e Enhanced syntax coloring now includes ASP VBScript support and upda
331. m part of the dialog determine how the Zap Gremlins command zaps the offending characters These options do not affect the line break characters that the Filter Line Feeds option filters Delete This option removes the zapped character completely from the text It is useful if you are only interested in destroying gremlins and you do not care where they were in the text Replace with Code This option replaces the gremlin character with an escaped hexadecimal code The escape code is in the convention used by the C programming language and Apple s Rez resource description language 0x followed by the character code in hexadecimal base 16 This option is useful for identifying both the value and the location of gremlin characters Later you can search for occurrences of 0x to locate the converted characters Searching for the grep pattern of V VOx will select the entire character code for easy modification or deletion Replace with This option replaces the gremlin with the character you type in the text field next to the radio button It is useful for identifying the location of gremlins but not their value Selection Only If this checkbox is marked only the selection is processed otherwise gremlins will be zapped throughout the entire document Entab This command converts runs of spaces into tabs according to the setting in the Font amp Tabs dialog box This transformation is useful when you are downloading text from a mai
332. man even multi byte character sets This menu determines which character set encoding to use when BBEdit cannot determine the proper encoding by examining the file This also establishes the default setting of the Read As pop up menu in the Open dialog Warn of Malformed UTF 8 Files When this option is selected BBEdit warns you if you open a UTF 8 file that contains an invalid UTF 8 character sequence Previous versions of BBEdit contained a Soft Wrap SimpleText Documents preference setting it has been removed Now SimpleText documents are always soft wrapped when opened unless they contain saved BBEdit state that says otherwise Chapter 10 Preferences new in 7 0 Text Files Saving Preferences The Text Files Saving preferences control BBEdit s behavior when it saves files including file backup settings Force New Line at End When this option is selected BBEdit will always add a line break at the end of the file if it does not already end with one Default Line Breaks These options let you choose what kinds of line breaks BBEdit writes when you save the file You can choose Macintosh line breaks ASCII 13 if you are using the file only on a Macintosh Unix line breaks ASCII 10 if the file resides on a Unix file server or if you are sending it to someone who uses Unix e DOS line breaks ASCII 13 10 if the file resides on a DOS file server or if you are sending it to someone who uses a DOS system
333. ment this command transposes the two characters on either side of the insertion point e If the insertion point is at the beginning of a line or document this command transposes the two characters following the insertion point e If the insertion point is at the end of a line or document this command transposes the two characters before the insertion point e If there is a selection this command transposes the characters at either end of the selection If you hold down the Option key as you choose this command Exchange Characters becomes Exchange Words Exchange Words behaves like Exchange Characters except that it acts on entire words rather than individual characters Change Case This command lets you change between uppercase and lowercase characters or capitalize word line or sentence starts You can choose to change the text in the current selection or in the whole document When you choose the Change Case command the following dialog appears Change Case Upper Case Lower Case Capitalize Words Capitalize Sentences Capitalize Lines Form Words Form Sentences election Only Change 278 Cancel The radio buttons let you choose how to change the case of the text To limit the change to the selection click the Selection Only option The following table explains the function of each radio button in this dialog This button Changes the text like this Upper Case Every cha
334. mmand you can write it on one line like this tell application BBEdit 7 0 to count windows If you are sending several commands to the same application it is more convenient to write it this way tell application BBEdit 7 0 count windows repeat with x from 1 to the result save window x end repeat end tell Apple s Script Editor automatically indents the lines inside the tell block for you so you can more easily follow the organization of the script Recordable Applications Once an application accepts Apple Events it actually makes a good deal of sense for an application to be designed in two parts the user interface that you see and the engine that does all the work An application designed this way is sometimes said to be factored The user interface then communicates with the engine via Apple Events The design of the Apple Event system makes it possible to record events into a script This feature not only lets you automate frequently performed tasks with little hassle it also can be an enormous aid in writing larger and more complicated scripts because the application tells you what events and objects to use for the kind of task you record Because of the important recording functionality they enable applications that have been factored and use Apple Events to let the two halves communicate are said to be recordable It is important to note that not all scriptable applications are recordable Saving Scripts Any
335. mmand Shift V This command enabled whenever the last operation was a paste and the previous clipboard is non empty replaces the pasted text with the contents of the previous clipboard The previous clipboard becomes current and will be used for any further paste operations repeated applications of the command cycle backward through the available clipboards For compatibility with international text content the Clipboard window displays text in the font and font size that it was put on the clipboard with Changing the display font in the Clipboard window does not change the font of the underlying data Basic Editing 48 Drag and Drop Another way to move text from one place to another is by drag and drop If you drag and drop text from one window to another BBEdit copies the text to the target window without removing it from the original window In addition you can drag and drop an item from the Finder onto an editing window in BBEdit If the item is a text file the file s contents are inserted If the item is a folder a listing of the item s contents is inserted If you hold down the Command key while dragging a folder the path of the item is inserted instead Multiple Undo BBEdit provides the ability to undo multiple edits one action at a time The number of edits that may be undone is limited only by available memory The practical limitation is determined by the extent of the edits and the amount of free memory BBEdit
336. n Reference to search the Carbon API help book Default Shell The Default Shell pop up menu available only on Mac OS X lists all Unix shells currently known and available on your system allowing you to choose one as your preferred shell for use with shell worksheets Shell worksheets are discussed in detail in Chapter 14 Install bbedit Tool The Install bbedit Tool button available only on Mac OS X installs the current version of the bbedit tool for invoking BBEdit from the Unix command line The first time you run BBEdit after installation it offers to install the bbedit tool for you If you choose not to do so you can use this button in the Tools preference panel to install the tool at a later time If the tool is already installed the button will update it to a newer version if one is available it will not overwrite an existing version of the tool with an older version See Chapter 14 for further details on the bbedit command line tool Unix Scripting Preferences This preferences panel contains a switch to control whether BBEdit sends Perl and Unix scripts to the interpreter as UTF 8 the default behavior as of BBEdit 7 0 or as Mac Roman the default behavior for pre 7 0 versions Windows Preferences The Windows preferences control the size and appearance of both newly created windows and windows that do not contain their own display state information See the State panel to tell BBEdit how to store
337. n do not break the package seal or install the software and return the package for a full refund License You may use the program and documentation on a single machine and copy the program and documentation into any machine readable or printed form for backup or support of your use of the program and documentation on the single machine provided that no more than one copy of the program and documentation may be used on a single machine by no more than one user at a time You may not use copy modify or transfer the program or documentation or any copy thereof in whole or in part except as provided in this Agreement If you use copy modify or transfer the program or documentation or any copy thereof in whole or part except as expressly provided for in this agreement your license is automatically terminated The license is effective on the date you accept this Agreement and remains in effect until terminated as indicated above or until you terminate it If the license is terminated for any reason you agree to destroy the program and documentation together with all copies thereof in whole or in part in any form and to cease all use of the program and documentation Limited Warranty and Limitation of Remedies The program documentation and any support from Bare Bones Software Inc are provided as is and without warranty express and implied including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a p
338. n point to end of current line forward char Move insertion point forward 1 place keyboard quit cancel pending arguments kill line Delete to end of current line recenter Scrolls the current view so the selection is centered on screen next line Move insertion point down one line open line Inserts line break without moving insertion point previous line Move insertion point to start of line above current isearch backward Quick Search with the Backwards option isearch forward Quick Search transpose chars Exchange Characters universal argument See note below scroll up Page down kill region Cut yank Paste undo Undo Emacs Key Bindings 305 new in 7 0 306 Key Sequence Action Ctl X Ctl C Ctl X Ctl F Ctl X Ctl S Ctl X Ctl W Esc Esc gt Esc Q Esc V Esc W Esc Y save buffers kill emacs Quit find file Open file save buffer Save current document write file Save As beginning of buffer Move insertion point to start of document end of buffer Move insertion point to end of document fill paragraph Hard Wrap with current settings scroll down Page up copy region as kill Copy yank pop Paste Previous Clipboard The yank pop action corresponding to the Paste Previous Clipboard command is new for this version of BBEdit Using universal argument The universal argument command Ctl U does not work quite the same way as it does in Emacs In BBEdit iti
339. nces of the search string Use the Find in Next File command Find in Next File Looks for the search string in the next file in the set of files to be searched Find amp Replace Replaces every occurrence of the search string with All Matches the replace string in each of the files being searched See Find amp Replace All Matches in the Search Menu Reference section at the end of this chapter 102 Chapter 7 Searching new in 7 0 Specifying the Search Set When the Find amp Replace dialog is expanded the controls in the bottom part of the dialog let you specify which files BBEdit should consider in the multi file search The pop up menu just below the Multi File Search checkbox controls which files BBEdit should search You can search e the files in a given folder e the list of files returned by an OSA script e all open text documents the files listed in any results browser such as a search results browser an HTML syntax errors browser or a compile errors browser e the files in a file group e the files in a defined web site folder You can further restrict which of these files will be searched by applying a file filter See File Filters on page 107 for more details Some of the other options change depending on what you select from this pop up menu Searching the Files in a Folder To search the files in a folder 1 Choose Folder from the pop up menu mW Batch Find Exclude Matches D M Oth
340. nd To Back Exchange With Next Synchro Scrolling Open windows see next page Opt Opt Cmd Ctl Cmd 1 to Cmd 0 Window Palettes ASCII Table Glossary Plug In Tools Scripts Stationery Windows HTML Markup Tools Block CSS Entities Font Style Forms Inline Phrase Table Utilities Web Safe Colors Perl Unix Tools Perl Unix Filters Perl Unix Scripts CVS Mac OS X only Get Revision Update File Update File Shift Update Folder Commit File Commit File Opt Commit Folder Commit Parent Folder Commit Parent Folder Opt Find Lurkers Compare Arbitrary Revisions Get Revision History Get CVS Status Add Remove Go to Previous Conflict Go to Next Conflict Export Project Open Log File MacPerl Open MacPerl Open Shuck Check Syntax Check Selection Syntax Run Run Run in MacPerl Run in Debugger Run File Export To CGI Script Droplet Runtime Find in Perl Reference View POD Perl Filters Perl Scripts Shebang t Check Syntax Check Selection Syntax Run Run Run in Terminal Run in Debugger Run File Find in Reference View POD Unix Filters Unix Scripts Mac OS 9 only Opt Opt submenu submenu submenu Mac OS X only Opt Opt submenu submenu Listing by Menu and Command Name 293 Compiler CodeWarrior IDE Absoft Tools Compile Check Syntax Debug S
341. nd use the Open Selection command to open that file When you click a file name BBEdit displays the contents of the file in the text pane To open a folder or disk and display its contents in the file list pane do one of the following e double click it select it and click Open in the status bar e select it and press Command Down Arrow To go up one level to the enclosing folder or disk do one of the following choose the enclosing folder from the directory pop up menu e press Command Up Arrow When the list pane has input focus the browser window s AppleScript selection property will return a list of the files currently selected See BBEdit and AppleScript on page 234 for further details Using the Text Pane in Disk Browsers When you select a folder or disk in the file list pane BBEdit displays the names of all the files and folders contained in that folder or disk in the text pane When you click on a file name BBEdit displays the contents of the file in the text pane if the file is of a type that BBEdit recognizes TEXT utxt or UTF8 You can search the contents of the text pane with the Find command or with the Quick Search window and you can copy text from the text pane You cannot edit a file s contents in the text pane To edit a file use the Open button in the status bar to open it in an editing window 148 Chapter 9 Browsers Search Results Browsers If you selected the Batch Find option when
342. ndows Tip If the selected text in a document is the name of a file hold down the Option key as you open the File menu and choose the Reveal Selection command to have BBEdit open the Finder folder that contains that file Zoom There is no longer a Zoom command in the Window menu but the key equivalent Command which users of earlier versions of BBEdit may be accustomed to still works Zoom will produce the same effect as clicking a window s zoom box it makes the active window larger if it is small or returns it to its original size if it was previously enlarged by a Zoom command When zooming windows BBEdit will move the window as little as possible consistent with maximizing the window s size This behavior is similar to what the Finder does when zooming a window The Move as Little as Possible switch in the Windows preference panel controls this behavior turning this switch off will revert the behavior to be the same as previous versions of BBEdit Send to Back This command sends the front window behind all the other windows Exchange with Next This command makes the second window the active window Choose this command repeatedly to alternate between the front two windows Synchro Scrolling When you have two or more windows open Synchro Scrolling makes both files scroll when you scroll one This feature is useful to look over two versions of the same file Window Names The last items in the Window menu are th
343. nformation but they do not and cannot tell what the final results of your markup will be There is no substitute for knowing HTML Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Tag Maker Tag Maker is BBEdit s context sensitive HTML authoring tool When you choose it from the menu or the palette or invoke it by pressing Command M it provides a list of the tags that are valid in the current HTML context of the insertion point and then lets you insert and configure one For example if the insertion point is positioned inside the document s header section delineated by the lt HEAD gt and lt HEAD gt tags Tag Maker displays the following list of tags Insert Tag En l Cancel f inser Choosing for example BASE inserts a lt BASE gt tag at the insertion point Choosing TITLE inserts a lt TITLE gt lt TITLE gt pair with the insertion point positioned between the two tags for easy entry of a title If you hold down the Option key while clicking the Insert button Tag Maker automatically displays a follow up dialog for editing the attributes of the new tag if the tag takes attributes and BBEdit has a tag editing dialog for it When there is only one tag permitted in the current context Tag Maker does not display the Insert Tag dialog but simply inserts the appropriate tag at the insertion point Choose Undo from the Edit menu if this tag is not what you expected If there are no valid tags in the current context Tag Maker sounds the s
344. nframe computer or online service when the document uses spaces to line up columns of text If you do not use a monospaced font columns usually will not line up unless you entab the text first Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Note Note Note Tip Detab This command converts tabs into runs of spaces according to the setting in the Font amp Tabs dialog box This command is useful when you are uploading text to a mainframe computer or online service that has no concept of tabs as column separators Resolve URL To resolve a URL Uniform Resource Locator place the insertion point anywhere in the URL and choose this command Alternatively you can Command click anywhere in the URL or Control click to bring up the contextual menu and choose Resolve URL from it BBEdit examines the URL and launches the appropriate Internet helper application If the URL is not valid or the helper application cannot be found BBEdit beeps The Internet Helpers globe menu has been removed entirely from BBEdit 7 0 Some Web browsers cannot resolve URLs if the request is sent when the browser is starting up If your Web browser does not properly resolve the URL wait until the browser has finished starting up and then try again Bare Bones Software gratefully acknowledges John Norstad for providing the URL parsing code How BBEdit Wraps Text BBEdit wraps text in one of two ways soft wrapping or hard wrapping Soft wrapping is like the w
345. ng AppleScript with BBEdit Stationery The Stationery List is a floating window that displays all the stationery pads you have placed inside the Stationery folder in the BBEdit Support folder You can create a new document from any of these pads by double clicking it in this list Although the document created will have the content and all the state information from the stationery pad it is anew untitled document separate from the stationery pad To create a stationery pad click the Save As Stationery checkbox when saving the file from BBEdit Alternately any document can be changed into a stationery pad in the Finder by clicking the Stationery Pad checkbox in the document s Get Info window By default items in the Stationery List are displayed in alphabetical order However you can force them to appear in any desired order by including any two characters followed by a right parenthesis at the beginning of their name For example 00 Web template would sort before 01 HTML Template For such files the first three characters are not displayed in BBEdit You can also insert a divider by including an empty folder ending with the string The folder can be named anything so it sorts where you want it These conventions are the same as those used by the utilities FinderPop and OtherMenu In the Glossary Tools Stationery or any of the Scripts floating windows the Set Key button allows you to assign key equivalents to a
346. ns can be used in conjunction with lookbehind assertions to specify efficient matching at the end of a line of text Consider a simple pattern such as abcds when applied to a long line of text which does not match in other words a long line of text that does not end with abcd Because matching proceeds from left to right the grep engine will look for each a in the subject and then see if what follows matches the rest of the pattern If the pattern is specified as abcds Chapter 8 Searching with Grep the initial matches the entire line at first but when this fails because there is no following a it backtracks to match all but the last character then all but the last two characters and so on Once again the search for a covers the entire string from right to left so we are no better off However if the pattern is written as 2 abcd there can be no backtracking for the item it can match only the entire line The subsequent lookbehind assertion does a single test on the last four characters If it fails the whole match fails immediately For long strings this approach makes a significant difference to the processing time When a pattern contains an unlimited repeat inside a subpattern that can itself be repeated an unlimited number of times the use of a once only subpattern is the only way to avoid some failing matches taking a very long time literally millions or even billions of yea
347. ns this version In order for CVS commands to be operative you will need to have configured your CVS setup and repository access from the command line The details of how to do this vary from one system to another consult your local CVS expert for specifics BBEdit no longer supports Kodex MPW ToolServer MPW 411 or the THINK C THINK Pascal and Symantec C environments Mac OS API Reference To select a viewer application for displaying reference information on the Mac OS application programming interface do one of the following e Click the Set button next to the Mac OS API Reference path box and select the desired viewer application in the resulting dialog Drag the icon of the viewer application directly into the path box Chapter 10 Preferences Note new in 7 0 If the Use Mac OS X Developer Help checkbox is selected and you are running on Mac OS X BBEdit will always hand off API lookups to the Mac OS X Developer Help Center in preference to the viewer application specified in the path box If you spend time working in both Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X this allows you to use the Developer Help Center for your API references in OS X while still retaining your preferred viewer application setting on the Mac OS 9 side without having to change preference settings each time you switch from one platform to the other The Mac OS X Developer Help option is available only on Mac OS X With this option turned on you can use Find i
348. nstalled Python elsewhere you must create a symbolic link in usr local bin pointing to your copy of Python in order to use pydoc and the Python debugger While BBEdit does not entirely depend upon the accuracy of the shebang line for Perl and Python files if you have the correct language mapping set for the file contents it is a good practice for these and necessary for any other shell scripts that the shebang line given must be a correct full path to the executable Starting with BBEdit 6 5 the Shebang menu completely supersedes the Camel menu and encompasses the same commands although some of the commands are not applicable to every scripting language as noted below Language Resources Perl is an acronym for Practical Extraction and Report Language or alternatively Pathologically Eclectic Rubbish Lister and was developed by Larry Wall If you are interested in learning Perl the quintessential Perl references are Learning Perl 3rd Edition by Randal L Schwartz amp Tom Phoenix O Reilly and Associates 2001 ISBN 0 596 00132 0 Programming Perl 3rd Edition by Larry Wall Tom Christiansen Jon Orwant O Reilly and Associates 2000 ISBN 0 596 00027 8 Perl Python and Shell Scripting 257 258 The following are excellent Internet resources for the Macintosh implementation of Perl and Perl in general Perl com from O Reilly and Associates http www perl com MacPerl org http www macperl org Perl and M
349. ny item contained in that window You can use combinations of the Command Shift Option and Control keys plus any single other key to create such equivalents except that any equivalent must contain either the Command or Control keys or both You can also map Function keys directly to items with or without the use of a modifier Windows The Windows floating window displays the names of all open windows ordered either by name by creation order or by window kind as determined by the settings your Application preference panel see Chapter 10 You can open a file by dragging its icon from the Finder or from a file group window into the Windows window Document windows which correspond to text files have a document icon next to them display windows such as browsers and search results windows do not A solid diamond to the left of a window s name means that the window s contents have been modified and have not yet been saved while a hollow diamond indicates that the window s state has been modified but not yet saved Window Menu 89 new in 7 0 To bring any window to the front double click its name in the Windows window The buttons at the top of the window perform Save Close or Print commands on the selected windows Holding down the Option key changes these buttons to Save AII Close All and Print All which apply to all listed windows for which the given command is possible Hovering the mouse over a window name disp
350. o save paper 1 Inch Gutter When this option is selected BBEdit leaves a one inch margin along the left edge of the paper Use this option if you usually put your pages in three ring binders Chapter 10 Preferences Note Print Color Syntax If this checkbox is marked BBEdit prints colorized text in color You should generally use this option only on color printers as colorized text may come out in difficult to read dithered shades of gray on black and white printers Time Stamp The Time Stamp options let you choose whether the date that appears in the header is the date that the file was last modified or the date that the file was printed Text Search Preferences The Text Search preferences let you set default options to use with the Find command In BBEdit 6 0 the Text Search preference panel contained checkboxes for Wrap Around Use Grep Case Sensitive and Entire Words These preferences were used only to establish the defaults for parameters not supplied by AppleScript find and replace operations but their presence caused confusion In all later versions the value for any of these parameters not explicitly supplied in script commands is false and these settings have been removed from the panel Report Single File Replace All Results When this option is selected BBEdit displays a dialog telling you how many replacements it made when you perform a Replace All operation on a single file Remember Find Dialo
351. ollows e Text Document Opens an empty text window e with selection Opens a new text window containing any text selected in the active document and having the same display font saving you the trouble of copying and pasting it with Clipboard Opens a new text window and automatically pastes the contents of the current clipboard into it e HTML Document Brings up a dialog with options for creating a new HTML document see Chapter 11 for more information on working with HTML documents File Group Opens a new file group see Using File Groups later in this chapter for more information e Disk Browser Opens a new disk browser see Chapter 9 for more information FTP Browser Opens a new FTP browser see later in this chapter for more information Shell Worksheet Mac OS X Opens a new shell worksheet using your default shell as set in the Tools panel of the Preferences window Shell Worksheet Mac OS X Opens a dialog listing all the Unix shells installed on your system choose from the list and a new shell worksheet will be opened using that shell Creating and Saving Documents 21 When you want to save the new document you have created 1 Choose the Save or Save As command from the File menu BBEdit opens the Save dialog On Mac OS X Save BBEdit Where Documents ES a Ki BBSW WebSites kI config info Acrobat User Data TI TI LS Bookmarks gt iChats E E Library
352. on only for files that already have state information Status Bar Preferences The Status Bar preferences let you choose which icons and pop up menus appear in the status bar of BBEdit document windows Show Status Bar Mark this checkbox to display the status bar by default You can always show it or hide it independently for each window Show Philip Bar This option displays the Philip Bar which represents the usable width of the screen on a 9 inch classic Macintosh monitor in the status bar Show Tab Stops This option displays tab stops in the status bar using the tab width set in the Font amp Tabs dialog Show Line Numbers This option displays line numbers along the left edge of the window Show Cursor Position This option adds a panel at the bottom left corner of the window that displays the location line and column of the insertion point or the endpoint of a just changed selection range if the cursor has not been moved yet after the change Show Current Function This option displays the name of the function the insertion point is in if any at the bottom left corner of the window Function Popup This option displays the Function pop up menu which lists the functions for source code files or named anchors for HTML files in the document allowing you to jump directly to any function or anchor Text Options This option displays the Text Options pop up menu which allows you to set wrapping d
353. on range that you can name If a document contains any markers you can select them from the Mark pop up menu to move quickly to the specified section of the file BBEdit uses the MPW marker format which is supported by most Macintosh text editors If you are programming you may be tempted to use markers to mark functions in your source code However if BBEdit supports the language you are using this is usually unnecessary your functions will automatically appear in the Function pop up menu in the document window The Mark Submenu 69 Setting Markers To set a marker 1 Select the text you want to mark 2 Choose the Set Marker command from the Mark pop up menu identified by the icon shown at left or Control click the selected text and choose Set Marker from the contextual menu BBEdit opens the Set Marker dialog box so that you can name the marker If you have selected a range of text the dialog box will contain the first characters of the selection Set Marker Marker Name 3 Click Set to set the marker Tip If you hold down the Option key as you choose Set Marker BBEdit sets the marker using the leading characters of the selected text as the name of the marker without displaying a dialog box Clearing Markers To clear a marker 1 Choose the Clear Markers command from the Mark pop up menu BBEdit displays the list of markers Clear Markers Markers to Clear What s Mew in BBEdit 6 5 s Grep Engine Compatib
354. ona 6 x 6x 6 color cube that adds red green and blue in 20 increments o Web Safe Colors Click or drag to insert the HTML color code Use a color from this palette for Web page backgrounds and text to reduce the chance that the incorrect color possibly dithered will be used instead of a pure color There are four layouts available horizontal vertical and VisiBone and VisiBone 2 You can choose a layout in the HTML Colors preference panel Click a color swatch to insert the color s RGB value in HTML format that is RRGGBB at the insertion point You can also drag a color swatch into a document window to place the color value The HTML Tools Palette 219 220 The Web Safe Color palette is CSS aware and will insert color values in CSS format that is unquoted and minimized when appropriate HTML Translation The following options are available in the Translate tool available in the Utilities submenu of the Markup menu Remove Tags When converting HTML to TEXT the Translate tool will remove all HTML tags and comments Paragraphs When converting TEXT to HTML the Translate tool finds paragraphs in the same way the Paragraph tool does and then adds opening and closing paragraph tags around them When converting HTML to TEXT it makes sure there are line breaks around each paragraph in the resulting text HTML Entities When converting TEXT to HTML the Translate tool converts characters from t
355. ontext sensitive HTML 193 194 control characters 64 322 Index Convert to ASCII plug in 281 Convert to Client Side Map command 208 Convert to Table command 204 Copy amp Append command 47 Copy command 4 47 creating documents 21 from templates 221 HTML documents 21 189 with clipboard 21 with selection 21 creator 24 CSS 196 import 196 format 196 cursor movement 51 using arrow keys 52 cursor position 48 58 custom markup 221 Cut amp Append command 47 cut and paste 46 Cut command 4 46 Cut Copy Clear Lines Containing 286 date placeholder 226 DD tag 203 defined term 210 definition list 203 DEL tag 202 209 Delete key 46 54 304 deleted text 202 deleting text 46 Detab command 65 development environments 251 configuring BBEdit for use with 252 source and header files 253 DEN tag 210 dialog keyboard shortcuts 4 188 dictionary AppleScript 236 Differences command 74 Differences Preferences 155 directory list HTML 203 Disassemble command 268 disk browsers 14 20 21 26 146 file list panel 148 status bar 147 text panel 148 DIV division tag 202 DOCTYPE 190 documents comparing 73 creating 21 double clicking 24 editing text 46 icon 50 inserting text 71 modification indicator 49 on FIP servers 32 revealing in Finder 92 saving 21 22 window anatomy 48 DOS line breaks 24 double clicking 24 26 drag and drop in document windows 48 to BBEdit application icon 24 26 to Windows floating window 26 with H
356. op up menu to have BBEdit treat all new unsaved text windows as the indicated language This allows you to see syntax coloring and use the Function pop up menu in the window s status bar before you name and save the file Default Language The language selected with this pop up menu tells BBEdit what language to assume for files that do not have any of the listed suffixes so that syntax coloring and the Function pop up menu will be available for those files This setting replaces both the default and no suffix gt entries presented by the suffix mapping list in previous versions Software Update Preferences The Software Update preferences control the integrated version checking capability built into BBEdit The Check Automatically checkbox controls whether BBEdit automatically looks to see if there is a new version available from Bare Bones Software Regardless of the setting of the checkbox you can always check manually by clicking the Check Now button The version checking mechanism used by BBEdit protects your privacy It works by requesting information about the currently available version from Bare Bones Software s web server The server will log the date time and originating address of the request and which versions of the OS and BBEdit you are using This information is used to guide the future development of BBEdit it is not personalized and will not be disclosed Spelling Preferences The Spelling preferences control whet
357. open a file in BBEdit that appears to consist of a few very long lines you should select the soft wrapping option for that file How BBEdit Wraps Text 65 IMPORTANT This table summarizes the commands to soft wrap and hard wrap text The sections that follow give details about using the wrapping commands To do this Do this Soft wrap text as you type Choose Soft Wrap Text from the Text Options pop up menu left or select the Soft Wrap Text option from the Text Options dialog Convert hard wrapped text to soft Use the Remove Line Breaks command wrapped text in the Text menu and activate soft wrapping Convert soft wrapped text to hard Use the Add Line Breaks command in wrapped text the Text menu Hard wrap text to a specific margin Use the Hard Wrap command in the reflowing paragraphs as needed Text menu Users of very old versions of BBEdit or BBEdit Lite will note that the Wrap while Typing option which hard wrapped text automatically by inserting a Return when you reach the right margin has been relegated to the dustbin of history It has been superseded by soft wrapping Soft Wrapping To turn on soft wrapping for the active window do one of the following e Choose Soft Wrap Text from the Text Options pop up menu left in the status bar e Select the Soft Wrap Text option from the Text Options dialog by choosing Text Options from the Edit menu To specify the wrapping margin use the Text Options comman
358. or readers with prior experience this is essentially like the syntax used for regular expressions in the Perl programming language However you do not need to understand anything about Perl in order to make use of BBEdit s grep searching Most Characters Match Themselves Most characters that you type into the Find amp Replace dialog match themselves For instance if you are looking for the letter t Grep stops and reports a match when it encounters a t in the text This idea is so obvious that it seems not worth mentioning but the important thing to remember is that these characters are search patterns Very simple patterns to be sure but patterns nonetheless Escaping Special Characters In addition to the simple character matching discussed above there are various special characters that have different meanings when used in a grep pattern than in a normal search The use of these characters is covered in the following sections However sometimes you will need to include an exact or literal instance of these characters in your grep pattern In this case you must use the backslash character before that special character to have it be treated literally this is known as escaping the special character To search for a backslash character itself double it V so that its first appearance will escape the second For example perhaps the most common special character in grep is the dot In grep a dot character will m
359. or by clicking the Folder button to select a folder on your hard disk A set of radio buttons offer the choice of full root or relative addressing The Target field determines the frame in which hyperlinked documents will appear by default Both fields are optional Link The LINK tag tells the browser about a document related to the current document The most common use for this tag is to point to an externally defined CSS stylesheet document You can choose to indicate whether this link defines a REL forward relation or REV reverse relation the type of the relation for example a stylesheet the media the URL of the referenced file including full root or relative addressing and optional Type Hreflang Target and Charset attributes Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Meta META tags are used to define browser specific or optional information that is not a part of the HTML specification You can choose to create either a NAME or an HTTP EQUIV variation of the META tag The latter is frequently used for client pull applications in browsers that support it but more generically it makes most browsers behave as if the specified line was received as part of the HTTP protocol header After choosing the type of META tag and the desired value of the NAME or HTTP EQUIV field enter a value for the tag s CONTENT attribute and optionally its SCHEME attribute You can choose from some common values for the NAME field by using the pop up menu
360. or the questioned word in the Guesses list box The first one appears in the Replace With box 4 If the Questioned Word is a misspelled word choose the correct word from the Guesses list or type it yourself in the Replace With box You can click the Questioned Word box to copy it to the Replace With box and then make the correction in the Replace With box This technique is useful if the questioned word is only slightly misspelled and the correct word is not in the Guesses list 5 Click one of the buttons along the right side of the dialog box to handle the questioned word Click Skip All to ignore every instance of the questioned word without adding it to the User Dictionary Click Add to add the questioned word to the User Dictionary Click Replace to replace this instance of the questioned word with the text in the Replace With text field Click Replace All to replace every instance of the questioned word with the text in the Replace With text field Click Skip to ignore this instance of the questioned word Using the Spelling Checker 77 78 WARNING Selecting Active Dictionaries BBEdit uses the American English dictionary by default However you can use multiple dictionaries at a time To configure the built in spelling checker to use additional dictionaries 1 Open the Preferences window by choosing Preferences from the BBEdit menu on Mac OS X or from the Edit menu on Mac OS 9 and select the Spelling panel
361. ord wrapping found in most word processors When the insertion point reaches a right margin as you type the word processor automatically moves the insertion point to the beginning of the next line You never need to type a carriage return that is press the Return key at the end of a line but only to start a new paragraph If you place the insertion point in the middle of a paragraph and start typing the text reflows so that words that are pushed out beyond the right margin end up on the next line Usually you use soft wrapping when you are editing memos mail messages and other prose It is also useful for HTML documents With soft wrapping you generally do not have to scroll the window horizontally to see all the text in the file Unlike soft wrapping hard wrapping requires a carriage return at the end of every line When soft wrapping is turned off BBEdit lets you type as far as you like on a line and never automatically moves the insertion point to the beginning of the next line You have to manually type a carriage return to start a new line You usually use hard wrapping to write programs tabular data resource descriptions and so on With hard wrapping each line of source code or data appears on its own line in the window although you may have to scroll the window horizontally to see the entire line if it is long When you use the Hard Wrap command on a rectangular selection lines will be padded with spaces as necessary If you
362. ormation see the MacPerl web site http www macperl com On Mac OS X BBEdit integrates directly with any Unix scripting language including Perl shell scripts and any other scripting languages you install such as Python or Ruby On Mac OS X these menu items are named Unix Scripting Tools Unix Filters and Unix Scripts The Tools palette contains a subset of the commands available in the MacPerl Shebang menu The Filters palette displays shell scripts that read the selection of the current document window as STDIN and replace the selection with STDOUT For more information on these tools see Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools 90 Chapter 6 Working with Windows Arrange The Arrange command gives you several ways to organize BBEdit windows When you choose the Arrange command BBEdit opens the Arrange Windows dialog box Arrange Windows Arrange Windows on f Main Screen Largest Screen C Smallest Screen Ji cdi The radio buttons at the top of the dialog specify which screen the windows will be arranged on You can choose the main screen the largest screen or the smallest screen Icon Description Stacks every window so that some part is visible no matter which window is frontmost If you select the Leave Room for Finder options in the Windows section of the Preferences window BBEdit leaves room along the right side or bottom of the screen for Finder icons BBEdit offers four different ways
363. ormation about each file s script system if the file has it If the file does not contain any information about its script system and the preference for Allow File Script Guessing is set in the Text Search panel BBEdit assumes it is in the same script as the text you are searching for Unicode The various script systems Apple introduced to handle non Roman scripts served well enough for years However with the increased rate of data exchange brought about by the growth of computer networks the shortcomings of trying to deal with the hundreds of extant character encoding systems became clear This led to the development of a new international standard for character encoding dubbed Unicode Like existing Asian encodings Unicode uses two bytes to represent each character of text However as the name implies Unicode is a single code that contains characters from Roman Cyrillic Asian Middle Eastern and various other scripts Asian languages get short shrift unfortunately There simply is not room for all the characters of Korean Japanese and Chinese in a single two byte code Only the most frequently used characters from each are included Fortunately most speakers of Asian languages do not use anywhere near all the symbols which are remember words and not letters available in their language Apple began supporting Unicode in Mac OS 8 1 and all versions of Mac OS and Mac OS X include this capability For obtaining additiona
364. ory Revision 1 79 Add When you choose this command BBEdit will add the current file to the appropriate CVS repository if it is not already present Note that after using this command you must also perform a Commit in order to store the file s contents to the repository Remove When working with a file that is in a CVS repository you can choose this command to remove the file from the repository Note that after using this command you must also perform a Commit Parent Folder or a Commit Folder on the repository as a whole before the file will actually be removed Chapter 14 Working with Development Tools new in 7 0 2 Note Go to Previous Next Conflict When you perform a CVS update on one or more files if there are conflicts between your revisions and those in the repository CVS will add markers in the affected file s at the appropriate points If you update a single file and one or more conflicts result BBEdit will automatically jump to the first conflict and you can use these commands to move to other instances if any exist If you update multiple files and conflicts result you can choose either of these commands to move between instances of conflicts in a file If there are no conflicts in the current file BBEdit will beep when you select either command Export Project This command creates a copy of a project at the selected location When you choose this command BBEdit displays a dialog that lets you choose a CVS
365. ost what you want it to and repurpose it Even if you cannot find a script that does anything close to what you want reading others scripts is a good way to learn how AppleScript thinks and how BBEdit s particular AppleScript implementation behaves In addition to the basic AppleScript documentation included with a standard Mac OS installation You may find the following resources useful in your quest to understand scripting Books Danny Goodman s AppleScript Handbook Second Edition Danny Goodman ToExcel 2000 ISBN 0 96655 141 9 AppleScript in a NutShell Bruce W Perry O Reilly and Associates 2001 ISBN 1 56592 841 5 Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit Mailing Lists AppleScript Users http www lists apple com applescript users html The official list for AppleScript users run by Apple Computer BBEdit Talk BBEdit Scripting http www barebones com support lists html The discussion lists for BBEdit often cover BBEdit specific scripting topics and are a good place to ask questions about BBEdit s AppleScript implementation Mac Scripting http www its unimelb edu au hma pub macscrpt Unofficial list covers AppleScript and other Macintosh scripting languages with occasional forays into peripheral topics Web Sites AppleScript at Apple Computer http www apple com applescript This is the starting point for AppleScript from the people who invented it Includes a tutorial and a good amount of technical information T
366. oup T one selected f Options gt i i ff i E current criteria p M BERG S 1 Use File Filter Multi File Searching 105 new in 7 0 2 Choose the group from the second pop up menu This menu lists all open file groups To search in a file group that is not open click the Other button on the right hand side of the Find amp Replace dialog and select the desired file group using the standard Open dialog Searching the Files on a Web Site You can limit your multi file search to the files for a specific web site folder as defined in the HTML Web Sites preference panel To search the files in a web site folder 1 Choose Web Site from the pop up menu iM Batch Find C Exclude Matches FFETFTETETITITETETETETETITETETETETETETETETETIT TUse File Filter current criteria 2 Choose the site from the second pop up menu This menu lists all of the local site root and Templates amp Includes folders that you have specified for the web sites in your HTML Web Sites preference panel If you have not designated such a folder for a site the site name appears dimmed in the menu and cannot be selected Multi File Search Options Click the Options button to display the Multi File Search Options dialog shown here Multi File Search Options MW Search Nested Folders Ul Skip Folders U Search Invisible Folders File Type T H Text Files Only All File Types To search all the files
367. ource to prompt for the comment for each file or to use a single comment for all checked in files Batch Check In Options Task Comment Options Use Comment in CKID Cancel V Ask if Empty Ask for Each File Use This Comment PF Cd Check In Options After Checking In C Keep Modifiable 1 Touch File 1 Check In as Branch C Delete File kal Verify Contents After you have set the options using one of these dialogs click OK to check in the files The Check In Folder dialog will remain on the screen after check in is complete You can check in sets of files using different check in options by choosing other files and then clicking Check In again Click Done when you have finished checking in files Check Out Folder Use this command to check out an entire folder of files at once The Check Out Folder dialog below appears Check Out Folder Users admin Desktop Files Other ry Options Checking Out 3 Report Empty Projects Latest Revisions W verify Contents Update Existing W Delete Obsolete Files O Everything 1 Put History in CKID C Don t Touch Mod Date Cancel ox Click the pop up menu to select the folder to be checked out or drag a folder from the Finder The menu contains a list of recently used folders Working with Projector SourceServer 275 276 Report Empty Projects Check this box to have BBEdit notify you if it finds an empty project during the check
368. own line in the resulting HTML otherwise cells will be placed on a single line Forms This submenu contains commands that help you build HTML forms which are used for accepting user data for processing by a client side script or a server side CGI program or other server side technology such as Active Server Pages Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Form This tag defines a form The Method can be either GET encoding the form data in the URL or POST sending the form data separately after the HTTP transaction header The Action should be the URL of the CGI program or other server side script such as ASP Enctype and Accept Charset define the encoding type and character set for the transaction usually you will not need to use these fields Use the On Submit and On Reset fields to enter the names of JavaScript handlers to be used for the Submit and Reset buttons respectively The Target field sets the frame to be used for the page returned by the CGI Button This tag creates a form button Choose a type Submit Reset or Button specify a name and value for the form element and set optional attributes such as Disabled Tab Index the order in which the button will be reached by the Tab key and Access Key the key the user can press to activate the button in the browser The latter two options are HTML 4 features and may not work on all popular browsers You can also enter the names of JavaScript onFocus and onBlur handlers for th
369. own the Command and Option keys as you click or double click triggers special actions Option Command Command Option Click Open URL Double click look up selected select word and search word in program for next occurrence of ming reference the word 303 Arrow and Delete Keys You can use the arrow keys to move the insertion point right left up and down You can augment these with the Command and Option keys to move by word line or screens or with the Shift key to create or extend selections For example pressing Shift Option Right Arrow selects the word to the right of the insertion point You can hold down the Control key while using the arrow keys to scroll through editing windows without moving the position of the insertion point Key Modifier Action left right Arrow Move 1 character left right left right Arrow Option Move 1 word left right left right Arrow Command Move to beginning end of line left right Arrow Control Scroll view left right up down Arrow Move up down 1 line in file up down Arrow Command Move to top bottom of file up down Arrow Option Move to previous next screen page up down Arrow Control Scroll view up down any of the above Shift Make or extend a selection range Delete Deletes selection range or character preceding to the left of the insertion point Delete Command Deletes all characters backwards to beginning of line Delete Option Deletes all characters back to beg
370. p up list for example List Table and Preview Buttons containing a grip strip a double vertical bar on the left side may be used via drag and drop For example the Image button may be dragged into a document window to display the Image tool dialog Subsequently the specified lt IMG gt tag is placed at the point where the button was dropped You can Command click a pop up menu to bypass the menu display the tool will perform the last used action again HTML Tools New Document Body Properties Black Elements Inline Elements Frames hull Check Syntax Includes TET Utilities F mel 7 Preview all Browsers The second means of using the HTML Tools is from BBEdit s Markup menu This allows you to make your own choice between the drag and drop convenience of palettes and the less screen intensive menus either way you will still be able to access all of the HTML Tools capabilities Every HTML Tools function is available through an item on the Markup menu or one of its submenus Key equivalents if assigned are displayed next to the menu item On Mac OS 9 you can change or assign keyboard shortcuts to menu commands by choosing Set Menu Keys from the Edit menu on Mac OS X the Set Menu Keys command is in the BBEdit menu Many tool dialogs offer keyboard shortcuts for activating buttons Hold the Command key down when a dialog is open to see these shortcuts Chapter 1
371. pplication Support where is the customary Unix shorthand to indicate the user s home directory e When running on Mac OS 9 BBEdit will look for the BBEdit Support folder in its own folder To prevent alias loops BBEdit will not follow aliases to folders that are placed inside any of the subfolders within the BBEdit Support folder We also recommend that you do not try to share plug ins or scripts between BBEdit and other applications and that you not make aliases to plug ins or scripts located on remote server volumes In some earlier versions of BBEdit all of these support folders some with slightly different names were individually located in the same folder as the BBEdit application Later versions gathered them together as subfolders within the single BBEdit Support folder which was required to be present in the same folder with the BBEdit application if BBEdit did not find such a folder at launch time it would create an empty one automatically The current version of BBEdit no longer requires the presence of a BBEdit Support folder and will not create one automatically The spelling dictionaries are now stored in the BBEdit application package and not in the BBEdit Support folder That means you can check a document s spelling even when there s no BBEdit Support folder present Support Folder Setup for Non Admin Users Under Mac OS X depending on where BBEdit s application folder is located users who do not have admin pri
372. r green HTML Markup Preferences 163 164 new in 7 0 4 The Allow Short Hex Color Notation checkbox controls whether hex color codes which can be expressed in a 3 digit collapsed form are inserted that way or are inserted in the normal 6 digit format Close Current Tag This option allows you to control how the Close Current Tag command inserts the appropriate closing tag e Context Sensitive places the closing tag according to various contextual clues such as whether the opening tag is a block element or an inline element and whether there are line breaks in a block element s contents if the tag is a block element This is the factory default and is consistent with previous versions of BBEdit with some improvements to the context sensitivity e Before Insertion Point always places the closing tag immediately before the insertion point thus leaving the insertion point outside of the tag container e After Insertion Point always places the closing tag immediately after the insertion point This leaves the insertion point inside the tag container HTML Palette Preferences The HTML Palette preferences determine how the HTML tools floating palette is displayed Palette Width Choose normal or narrow buttons The names of some buttons may be truncated when using narrow buttons Button Height Choose normal or short buttons Using short buttons allows the palette to require less space vertically Buttons on
373. r so it backs up and sees if it can find a match for gt Lo and behold it can the last character is a greater than symbol Success In other words the pattern matches our entire sample line at once not the two separate HTML tags in it as we intended More generally the pattern matches all the text in a given line or paragraph from the first lt to the last gt The pattern only does what we intended when there is only one HTML tag in a line or paragraph This is what we meant when we say that the regular quantifiers try to make the longest possible match Non Greedy Quantifiers To work around this longest match behavior you can modify your pattern to take advantage of non greedy quantifiers Quantifier Matches one or more zero or more 2 zero or one COUNT match exactly COUNT times MIN match at least MIN times MIN MAX match at least MIN times but no more than MAX 126 Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Note Astute readers will note that these non greedy quantifiers correspond exactly to their normal greedy counterparts appended with a question mark Revisiting our problem of matching HTML tags for example we can search for lt gt This matches an opening bracket followed by one or more occurrences of any character other than a return followed by a closing bracket The non greedy quantifier achieves the results we want preventing BBEdit from overrunning the closing angle b
374. r 4 eco hoo PER gece ERES ER 11 Support Folder Setup for Non Admin Users 11 Glossary 12 Help 12 e HTML Templates 12 Language Modules 12 MacPerl Support 13 Menu Scripts 13 Plug Ins 13 Scripts 14 Search Scripts 14 e Shutdown Items 14 Startup Items 14 Stationery 14 Unix Support 15 Other BBEdit Files and Folders 0 ccc eee eens 16 BBEdit Preferences Folder 16 e BBEdit Prefs Data 16 BBEdit FTP Bookmarks 16 Clipboards 16 File Filters 16 e BBEdit Grep Patterns 16 Recent Files amp Favorites 17 Recent Folders amp Favorites 17 User Dictionary 17 vi Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Working with Files 19 Launching BBE CIE 4 uode etui d t de teo teens buda etu mte eter efte 19 Startup Items 20 Memory Consideratiotis u 2x3 40995 413098 0 ro bp o UR e Ee d 20 Creating and Saving Documents 0 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee 21 Saving a Copy of a File 23 File Saving Options 23 Long File Names 26 Saving with Authentication 26 Opening Existing DOCcumellts 24 52 s c5ieocie x VOTES Paredes 26 Choosing the Encoding for a Document 27 Using the Open Command 28 Using the Open Hidden Command 29 Using the Open Recent Command 29 Using the Open Selection Command 30 Invoking BBEdit from the Command Line 31 Opening from and Saving to FTP Servers 4 32 EI
375. r Set CSS Body Properties Head Elements Anchor Image Break Font Paragraph Div Heading Dreamweaver Block Elements Inline Elements List Table File New HTML Document Markup Tag Maker Markup Edit Tag Markup Document Type Markup Character Set Markup CSS submenu Markup Head Elements Body Properties Markup Head Elements submenu Markup Inline Elements Anchor Markup Inline Elements Image Markup Inline Elements Break Markup Inline Elements Font Markup gt Block Elements gt Paragraphsub Markup Block Elements Div Markup Block Elements submenu Markup Misc Dreamweaver Markup Block Elements submenu Markup Inline Elements submenu Markup Lists List Markup Lists submenu Markup Tables Table Markup Tables submenu The HTML Tools Palette 217 218 Tool Menu Based Equivalent Forms Markup Forms submenu Phrase Elements Markup Phrase Elements submenu Font Style Elements Markup Font Style Elements submenu Frames Markup Frames submenu Check Syntax Markup Check Document Syntax Check Links Markup Check Document Links Update Markup Update Document Balance Tags Markup gt Check gt Balance Tags Check Markup Check submenu Update Markup Update submenu Includes Markup gt Includes submenu Utilities Markup gt Utilities submenu Misc Markup gt Misc submenu Preview Markup gt Previ
376. r example lt P gt to close a paragraph as well as an opening tag for example lt P gt If text is selected when one of these commands is chosen these opening and ending tags are placed before and after the selection Paragraph This command begins a new paragraph element You can specify alignment ID a class for obtaining formatting cues from a stylesheet and inline CSS style information If a selection exists each paragraph in the selection has lt P gt and lt P gt tags inserted around it HTML Tool Descriptions 201 202 Div This command begins a new division A division is a generic block of text containing one or more paragraphs or other block elements that all have some type of structural attribute in common Use lt DIV gt when no predefined block type is appropriate You can specify alignment ID a class for obtaining formatting cues from a stylesheet and inline CSS style information Horizontal Rule This command inserts a lt HR gt tag You can specify the alignment the thickness size of the rule its width and whether it contains a three dimensional shade Heading This command inserts a heading of any level and allows you to specify the alignment of the heading H1 through H6 These commands insert a heading of the specified level The alignment attribute used will match the last one chosen when using the Heading tool Address This command inserts an lt ADDRESS gt block The formatting o
377. r reading In stand alone CSS files if there is a selection range only the selected text is formatted If there is no selection range the whole file will be formatted In HTML files with embedded CSS if there is a selection range only the selected text will be formatted If there is no selection range BBEdit will format all CSS in the lt style gt lt style gt tag pair that encloses the insertion point If the insertion point is outside a lt style gt lt style gt tag pair or if the selection range spans a lt style gt lt style gt tag pair the formatter will simply beep When formatting CSS embedded into HTML BBEdit will indent the CSS based on the indent level of the opening lt style gt tag plus one additional tab stop for better readability Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools There are two preference settings in the HTML Markup preference panel that control how the CSS formatter and markup tools place the braces for block markup e The New Line Before Block Start checkbox controls the placement of opening braces If the checkbox is on you get this style H1 color green If it s off you get H1 color green e The Put Simple Rules on One Line checkbox will format a single line of CSS like this H1 color green BBEdit s CSS markup tools listed below use the same rules for formatting as does the Format command Box The Box dialog allows you to specify a selector s width and height prope
378. r web site send email to supportGbarebones com Chapter 1 Welcome to BBEdit CHAPTER IMPORTANT Installing BBEdit This chapter tells you how to install BBEdit on your Macintosh It also describes the files BBEdit creates where it puts them and how to install or remove optional components of BBEdit In this chapter Basie dans tall lati Rr m 9 System Requirements 9 e Installing BBEdit 9 Updating an Existing Copy 10 DBEdIt Support Folder 1 5 4278 oan VOS Rex at Ora RPG EE C Io eR Re HA e 11 Support Folder Setup for Non Admin Users 11 Glossary 12 Help 12 HTML Templates 12 Language Modules 12 MacPerl Support 13 Menu Scripts 13 Plug Ins 13 Scripts 14 Search Scripts 14 Shutdown Items 14 Startup Items 14 Stationery 14 Unix Support 15 Other BBEdit Files and Polders s o8 24 oo ee wags PES REA RM ERES S Des 16 BBEdit Preferences Folder 16 e BBEdit Prefs Data 16 BBEdit FTP Bookmarks 16 Clipboards 16 File Filters 16 e BBEdit Grep Patterns 16 Recent Files amp Favorites 17 e Recent Folders amp Favorites 17 User Dictionary 17 Basic Installation BBEdit is supplied as a single application file that runs on both Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X Specific system requirements and installation instructions are described below and the organization of BBEdit s supporting files is described in subsequent sections System Req
379. ra Nons vs dte Saee mc dee Rate e ep ferr v RA 20 Creating and Saving Documenti s bacs dad eee eo a Meese RERO 21 Saving a Copy of a File 23 File Saving Options 23 Long File Names 26 Saving with Authentication 26 Opening Existing Documents 34 43 294 S AREE E 9 ERA SEVERE 26 Choosing the Encoding for a Document 27 Using the Open Command 28 Using the Open Hidden Command 29 Using the Open Recent Command 29 Using the Open Selection Command 30 Invoking BBEdit from the Command Line esee 31 Opening from and Saving to FTP Setvers a dece yes Ae e Ge es 32 PEE BrOWSets prsni Y S dre DC I RUE CEP UU AU ade Pa VOL qued uS 35 Usine Stationery e cease Ss Wee EUER cU Ser UR EG essa te n RO dae LR MDC pt 35 Usine Pile GTOUDSI p Ro RE DOOR et bun ace wee an edi doc d 36 Creating a File Group 36 Using File Groups 37 Removing Files from a File Group 38 Making Backups a cae CE AGORA Gee ROI Wd RR Was EN oh i 38 Automatic Backups 39 Manual Backups 39 Pr tlg LER cnp at ast TERIS DM edd idea E Ei es Eget 40 Options Available from the Print Dialog 41 The Printing Options Command 42 Launching BBEdit To launch BBEdit double click the BBEdit application icon or a BBEdit document Holding down the following keys at launch has the indicated effects overriding any options set in the Startup panel of the Preferences window When one of these keys is held down BBEdit wi
380. racket and matching across several tags A slightly more complicated example how could you write a pattern that matches all text between lt B gt and lt B gt HTML tags Consider the sample text below lt B gt Welcome lt B gt to the home of lt B gt BBEdit lt B gt As before you might be tempted to write lt B gt lt B gt but for the same reasons as before this will match the entire line of text The solution is similar we will use the non greedy quantifier lt B gt lt B gt Writing Replacement Patterns Subpatterns Make Replacement Powerful We covered subpatterns earlier when discussing search patterns and discussed how the parentheses can be used to limit the scope of the alternation operator Another reason for employing subpatterns in your grep searches is to provide a powerful and flexible way to change or reuse found information as part of a search and replace operation If you do not use subpatterns you can still access the complete results of the search with the amp metacharacter However this precludes reorganizing the matched data as it is replaced Pattern Matches amp the entire matched pattern replacement only p the pattern p and remembers it search only Nig N25 eg the nth subpattern in the entire search pattern 499 BBEdit will now remember up to 99 backreferenced subpatterns Versions prior to 6 5 were limited to 9 subpatterns Writing Replacement Patterns 127 128
381. racter changes to uppercase Lower Case Every character changes to lowercase Capitalize Words The first character of every word changes to uppercase other characters remain unchanged Capitalize Sentences The first character or every sentence changes to uppercase other characters remain unchanged Text Transformation 61 62 This button Changes the text like this pT AA ro Di Capitalize Lines The first character of every line changes to uppercase the other characters remain unchanged Form Words The first character of every word changes to uppercase other characters change to lowercase Form Sentences The first character of every sentence changes to uppercase other characters change to lowercase Shift Left and Shift Right These commands indent or outdent the selected text by one tab stop If you hold down the Shift key while choosing one of these commands the selected text will be indented or outdented by one space instead of one tab stop BBEdit will also now entab and detab on the fly as you shift text For example if the selected text is indented one tab stop and you apply Shift Left One Space the tab will be converted to spaces and the text will be outdented one space If you then apply Shift Right One Space the spaces will be converted back to a single tab Add Line Breaks This command once named Insert
382. racters This is very useful when you are looking for runs of digits or single letters but often that is not enough However by combining these patterns you can search for more complex items As it happens you are already familiar with combining patterns Remember the section at beginning of this discussion that said that each individual character is a pattern that matches itself When you search for a word you are already combining basic patterns You can combine any of the preceding grep patterns in the same way Here are some examples Pattern Matches Examples d d a string of digits followed bya 442 literal plus sign followed by 123445829 more digits d 4 t B C four digits followed by a tabor 2152 B C a space followed by the string B C Writing Search Patterns 123 124 Pattern Matches Examples 0 9 d an optional dollar sign 1 234 56 followed by one or more digits 4 296 459 19 and commas followed by a 3 5 6 4 0000 period then zero or more digits 0 oops Note again in these examples how the characters that have special meaning to grep are preceded by a backslash and when we want them to match themselves Creating Subpatterns Subpatterns provide a means of organizing or grouping complex grep patterns This is primarily important for two reasons for limiting the scope of the alternation operator which otherwise creates an alternation of everything to its left an
383. rch errors warnings and results use the checkboxes at the top of the browser The Open button opens the selected items using BBEdit To open the selected items using the Finder hold down the Option key while clicking the Open button To see the contents of a file click a line in the list of matched searches The part of the file that contains the search string appears in the lower pane You cannot edit text in a search results browser To edit the file double click the line that contains the match you want to edit After you have opened the file you can use the Find Again Replace Replace All and Replace amp Find Again commands in the Search menu to continue searching it as if you had chosen a File by File search See Chapter 7 for more information on searching Search Results Browsers 149 Error Results Browsers When you use the HTML syntax checker link checker or update tool BBEdit will open an error results browser to display any errors generated by the command BBEdit will also open an error results browser to list compilation errors generated by commands issued to CodeWarrior from the Compiler menu or errors generated by Perl scripts eoo8 HTML Syntax Errors kal 2 Errors kal 1 Warning Mates Open Warning File enror_browser hitmil Line 13 Element lt p gt implicitly closed here Error File error browser html Line 14 Unknown or malformed element lt font gt Error File errar browsar html L
384. re information about the input methods for installed multi byte script systems in the Mac OS Help Center Script Systems in BBEdit As a text editor BBEdit supports only one font per document window To begin writing text in a supported non Roman script simply choose an appropriate font from the Font menu or from the Font amp Tabs dialog which you can open from the Text menu If you have turned off Font and Keyboard Synchronization in the Keyboard control panel on Mac OS 9 or in the Options dialog of the International section of the System Preferences on Mac OS X you will also need to select the correct input method from the keyboard menu We recommend leaving this option on so that BBEdit can automatically switch to the correct input method when you change document windows On Mac OS X BBEdit 7 0 supports use of the Roman Japanese Traditional Chinese Korean Cyrillic Simplified Chinese and Central European scripts Although BBEdit can display and edit text in only one script system at a time keep in mind that many script systems allow entry of Roman text without switching scripts It is also possible to create text files that contain text in more than one script with BBEdit although not all the text will be readable at the same time Simply change the font and input method as necessary and begin entering text in the new script The text you have already entered will appear as gibberish but it is still there and will be sav
385. reaks option from the Text Files Opening panel of the Preferences window Read As When opening a file you can tell BBEdit what encoding it uses Usually BBEdit will correctly auto detect the encoding but if it does not you can close the file and try again manually specifying the desired format Chapter 5 includes more information on encodings Using the Open Hidden Command The Open Hidden command in the File menu presents a dialog with the same appearance and behaviors as the standard Open dialog except that it shows invisible files including on Mac OS X files whose names begin with a period Using the Open Recent Command The Open Recent hierarchical submenu contains a list of files you have opened recently To open one of these files choose it from the Open Recent submenu Opening Existing Documents 29 new in 7 0 To set the number of items in the Open Recent list use the Remember the most recently used items option on the Application panel of the preferences window Using the Open Selection Command The Open Selection command lets you open a file that is referenced in the text of a document It is particularly useful for opening include files or any document referenced by another file To open a file whose name is referenced in the text of a document 1 Select the file name within the body of the document 2 Choose Open Selection from the File menu If a suffix of the form x follows the name BBEdit will au
386. reating and using file filters see Chapter 7 If you have the Preferences window open you will not be able to add filters in the Find amp Replace dialog To work around this close the Preferences window before using the Find amp Replace dialog to add new filters File Search Preferences The File Search preferences control the way BBEdit searches for files when you use the Open File by Name or Open Selection command from the File menu Find All Matching Files When this option is selected BBEdit looks for all the files that match the entered or selected text Otherwise BBEdit stops looking as soon as it finds the first file that matches the selected name Skip Folders When this option is selected BBEdit does not search folders whose names are enclosed in parentheses File Filters Preferences 158 Note Note Note Follow Folder Aliases When this option is selected BBEdit follows folder aliases when searching for a file matching the specified name Otherwise BBEdit ignores folder aliases and searches only regular folders If the Follow to Remote Volumes option is on BBEdit will follow folder aliases even if the target folder is on a file server Using this option can substantially increase the length of time required to perform a search Default lt gt Directory The path box displays the default path that BBEdit uses to locate files whose names are enclosed in angle brackets when you use the Open Fil
387. rectory for new worksheet windows is the user s home directory This directory is also used as the search directory for any Open Selection or Open File by Name operations executed from within the worksheet New shell windows are colored using the Unix Shell Script language New shell worksheets initially run in normal user mode as the currently logged in user This is indicated by the locked padlock icon on the rightmost button at the top of the worksheet window You can switch to superuser mode by clicking the padlock button you will be prompted to enter your administrator password This is equivalent to executing the command sudo s in a terminal window the worksheet s status area will indicate this with a sudo prefix to the current state and the padlock icon will change to unlocked Clicking the button again locks the padlock and returns to normal user mode If you are not familiar with Unix command line tools we strongly urge you to obtain and read an introductory guide to using a Unix shell Command line tools can be very useful but if used incorrectly they can render files or even your entire system unusable Default Worksheet Stationery When creating a new worksheet window BBEdit will look for a worksheet stationery file named Default Worksheet Stationery This file is located in the Stationery subfolder of the BBEdit Support folder See Chapter 2 for more information regarding the BBEdit Support folder If the d
388. refer to all the various attributes used by a particular way of writing In other parts of this manual we often use script to refer to a sequence of instructions written in the AppleScript scripting language or another language such as Frontier Perl or JavaScript In this chapter we use script specifically to refer to a writing system Among other things a script defines e The alphabet actual character shapes or ideograms used in the form of one or more TrueType fonts This is why the TrueType standard allows fonts to contain thousands of different characters e The direction of writing e One or more keyboard layouts for allowing input of text if the writing system being used has few enough letters to reasonably fit on a standard keyboard Chapter 5 Working with International Text e If the language being supported requires many different characters the script system also defines an input method a special floating window or other software help that allows you to specify the symbol you want phonetically or from a short list of symbols that sound like what you typed e Routines that programmers can call to display alphabetize and otherwise manipulate text in the selected writing system Just as the Macintosh allows you to use different type styles and fonts in a single document a program that supports international text may let you use these different writing systems in a single document The computer keeps track o
389. reference panel choosing any of these selects its designated site root folder for updating The Other entry on the pop up menu displays an Open dialog allowing you to navigate to and choose any other desired folder You can also drag a folder from the Finder directly into the path box The Skip Folders checkbox specifies that subfolders whose names are enclosed in parentheses should not be updated Check Nested Folders indicates that nested folders should be included in the update Updating Files with Projector CKIDs During an Update operation whenever BBEdit attempts to modify a file containing a Projector ckid resource that is designated Read Only it will display the following dialog asking you how to handle the file Kavier Users admin Desktop Files 6 5 Notes is checked out as Read Only Do you want to Modify Read Only the file and do the replace or skip this file LJ Don t Ask Again t Cancel to Skip MRO amp Replace Clicking Cancel will stop the Update operation and leave the current file untouched Clicking Skip will cause BBEdit to skip this file only leaving it untouched and continue the multi file replace operation Clicking the MRO amp Update button will cause BBEdit to mark the file Modify Read Only update the file and continue the Update operation HTML Tool Descriptions 213 214 Note If you select the Don t Ask Again option before clicking Skip or MRO amp Update BBEdit will apply th
390. rences 181 text transformation 60 text wrapping 65 TEXTAREA tag 206 TFOOT tag 204 TH tag 204 THEAD tag 204 THINK Reference 72 time placeholder 227 328 Index time stamps 43 Toolbox Call Template command 72 Tools Preferences 182 TR tag 203 transformations case 129 Translate Line Breaks 177 translation 281 HTML 215 220 TT tag 210 two up printing 42 typing text 46 typographer s quotes 282 U U underline tag 210 UL tag 203 Un Comment plug in 286 Undo command 48 Unicode 25 27 81 85 176 178 318 universal argument 306 Unix line breaks 24 Unix shell scripts 256 unordered lists 203 Update submenu 212 upgrading to BBEdit 7 11 upper case 61 user interface 3 UTF 8 25 85 Utilities submenu 214 V validation 211 212 VAR tag 210 variables 312 VisiBone 219 VOODOO Shim plug in 286 W watermark 43 Web Safe Colors palette 219 Web Site Settings dialog 167 wildcards 118 window list 89 windows arranging 91 exchanging with next 93 Info button 92 sending to back 93 split bar 51 status bar 48 Windows floating window 26 Windows menu 87 Windows Preferences 183 worksheets shell 254 wrap around 98 Wrap while Typing option 66 wrapping text 57 65 X XML declaration 189 Y yank pop 306 Z Zap Gremlins command 63 Index 329
391. replaced subsequent updates do not update the substituted text Although this command is part of the HTML Tools it can be used in any document whenever you want to use placeholders When a file is included in another file using the bbinclude directive or a related directive any placeholders in the included file are replaced with their current values before the text is included The include file itself is not changed only the included text is substituted All of the above methods of invoking placeholders can also invoke included files which can have placeholders of their own The placeholders described in this chapter are only available for use with the HTML Tools Update command They cannot be used with BBEdit s Glossary command nor can Glossary placeholders be used in include or template files 307 BBEdit supports the following placeholders Placeholders are not case sensitive Placeholder ABBREVDATE BASE Replaced By Abbreviated date e g Sun Oct 27 2002 The BASE tag as entered using the New HTML BASENAME Document command The name of the file stripped of its rightmost period delimited portion For example if the file is named test html the base name is test while if the file is named test foo html the base name is test foo The value of the BASE URL specified in an HTML BASE_URL BODYTEXT document s header useful if you want to refer to the document s loc
392. ribute values and processing instructions in addition to anchor image and other tags When it is turned off HTML attributes are colored the same as the tag as in previous versions of BBEdit Text Editing Preferences The Text Editing preferences control some of BBEdit s optional text editing features Many of these preferences were located in the Editor Defaults preference panel in previous versions of BBEdit Enable Shift Delete for Forward Delete When this option is selected holding down the Shift key with the Delete key makes the Delete key work the same way as the Forward Delete key on extended keyboards This feature is particularly useful on PowerBooks Use Numeric Keypad for Cursor Movement To use the numeric keypad to move the insertion point select this option start of line 3 scroll up show selection Chapter 10 Preferences end of line scroll down You can use the Shift key with the keys on the numeric keypad to extend a selection You can use the Command and Option keys with the 2 4 6 and 8 keys as you would the arrow keys To toggle the behavior of the keypad between moving the cursor and entering numbers hold down the Option key and press the Clear key in the upper left corner of the keypad This key is also labeled Num Lock on some keyboards Allow Single Click Line Selection If the checkbox is turned on clicking in the left margin of an editing window selects an entire line If you have l
393. ring in Soft Wrapped Text Views option in the Text Editing panel of the Preferences window Go to Center Line Will move the insertion point to the beginning of the middle or center line of the displayed text Go to Previous Next Error If an error browser is open this command will open the listed error which came before or after the selected error See Chapter 9 for more information on error browsers Go to Previous Next Placeholder When you use a glossary file that contains multiple INSERTION cookies the second and subsequent cookies are replaced with the string e You can use the Go To Previous Next Placeholder commands to jump back and forth between these special strings from the keyboard For example you might use this command when filling in the parameters of a function call or a series of tag attributes Search Menu Reference 113 114 Find Differences Finds the differences between two files or all of the files contained in two folders See Chapter 4 for more details Apply to New Applies the currently selected difference to the New version of two files which are being compared See Chapter 4 for more details Apply to Old Applies the currently selected difference to the Old version of two files which are being compared Compare Again Find the differences between two files using the same settings that were used in the last time you used the Find Differences command See Chapter 4 for more details
394. rints your documents You can set the defaults for most of these options in the Printing panel of the Preferences window When creating a new document or when opening a text document that does not have BBEdit saved state or with the Printing Settings option turned off in the State preferences BBEdit will obtain print options for the document from the preferences just before printing Thus for these types of documents you can use the Printing preferences to control behavior globally instead of having to change print settings on a per document basis Note that if you change the options in the print dialog the document settings will be divorced from the preferences You can also open the Printing Options dialog box by using the Options button in the main print dialog box Printing Options C Print Backwards C Print Full Pathname Frame Printing Area Time Stamp T Print Page Headers O Date Last Saved Print Line Numbers Date of Printing U Print Two Up 1 1 Inch Gutter U Print Rubber Stamp Text Confidential Font Helvetica m F L 3 l Cancel d OK 3 Print Backwards When this option is selected BBEdit prints documents last page first This option is useful if you are printing to a printer that does not arrange pages in the proper order Frame Printing Area When this option is selected BBEdit draws a frame around the printed text Print Page Headers When this option is selected BBEdit prints the page number th
395. ripts to be run when certain things happen in the program For example an application might let you define a script to be executed when the user chooses any menu item The script might then perform some pre processing and then exit by telling the application whether to continue with the menu command or to cancel it As a simple example a script might check to see what printer is selected when the user chooses the Print command If it is the expensive color dye sublimation printer on which printing a page costs several dollars the script could remind the user of that fact and confirm their intention through an alert before continuing with the print operation An application that supports such a feature or any method of integrating user written scripts seamlessly into its user interface is said to be attachable because the scripts become attached to the features of the program BBEdit is now attachable more details about using this feature are provided later in this chapter Scripting Resources Covering all the details you might need to write your own AppleScripts is not something we can reasonably do in this manual AppleScript despite its deceptively simple English like syntax is a sophisticated object oriented language with many subtleties For this reason we suggest you consult supplemental documentation and resources if you are a beginning scripter A good place to start is with someone else s script find a script that does alm
396. ro ROLE d Aou erg aca TUR 171 Stalls Dat Preferences ise Lu warte dde tib MIROR ihe s pte a ae aoa gs 172 Text Colors Preterences uiae duces dece ga o epe d WOSCRQU P aa s oam 174 Text EdiBing Preterences oa aus qur oe yr Oa edes he ee PERPE RR bas 174 lext Encodimps D TelerenceS oua qe o sce eos dev e Sele hoe a Cree 176 Text Files Opening Preferences 4 qure ia I RADAR a 177 Text Piles Saving Preferences eue s ede wee as e CPV Y a eot ane a e aie 179 Text Parmting Prererences i edes etes o ie dq ie Eq erbe s 179 Text oearehPrefeterces sa eese e woe Intt eS o dst 181 Tools Preferentes qua os et o ered anes Coe wl e Pues ace oco ao A 182 Unix 5cnplhing l Teferentce s 51s dic rt VAR e oper ara ep 183 Windows Preferentes 6o as roce wire Ea qoe SR eie Sa d dor eus 183 151 152 Note The Preferences Command To open the Preferences window on Mac OS X choose the Preferences command from the BBEdit menu On Mac OS 9 choose Preferences from the Edit menu e e BBEdit Preferences These settings control miscellaneous aspects of BBEdit s appearance Revert Save and behavior Apnlication Optional Mac OS Services Optional Application Services Browser Display Differences wi QuickTime Translation M BBEdit Plug Ins Editor Defaults M Don t Translate PDFs M Font Menu File Filters File Search File Types Fonts FTP Settings Function Popup Glossary HTML Colors wi QuickTime Playback wi Show Full Paths in Open Recent
397. rs in some cases The pattern D lt d gt matches an unlimited number of substrings that either consist of non digits or digits enclosed in lt gt followed by either or When it matches it runs quickly However if it is attempts to match this line of text aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa it takes a long time before reporting failure So long in fact that it will effectively freeze BBEdit This is not really a crash per se but left to run on its own it might take years before it finally fails We are not sure frankly because much like determining how many licks it takes to get to the center of a Tootsie Pop we do not feel like waiting long enough to find out The reason this takes so long to fail is because the string can be divided between the two repeats in a large number of ways and all have to be tried before the grep engine knows for certain that the pattern will not match The example used rather than a single character at the end because both PCRE and Perl have an optimization that allows for fast failure when a single character is used They remember the last single character that is required for a match and fail early if it is not present in the string If the pattern is changed to 2 gt D lt d gt sequences of non digits cannot be broken and failure happens quickly Advanced Grep Topics 143 144 Recursive Patterns Consider the problem of mat
398. rs during the backup process BBEdit will now report a descriptive error rather than just an OS result code The usual cause of such an error is that the defined backup directory has been deleted 38 Chapter 3 Working with Files Automatic Backups To make automatic backups of a document follow these steps 1 Choose the Backup Options command from the File menu BBEdit opens the Backup Options dialog box Backup Options Options for Wrap Music C Make Backup Before Saving Back Up To Document s Folder Preferred Backup Folder Other none selected 7 l Set Cancel c OK b 2 Specify the folder in which you want BBEdit to save the backups You can choose the document folder the preferred backup folder set in BBEdit s preferences or some other folder In the latter case click Set or drag a folder icon from the Finder to the path box 3 Select the Make Backup Before Saving option BBEdit will make a backup before you save the file The backup will contain the previously saved version of the file 4 Click OK Manual Backups To make backups manually follow the same steps as above but do not select the Make Backup Before Saving option To make a backup at any point choose the Make Backup Now command from the File menu BBEdit opens a standard directory dialog box so that you can change the location and the name of the backup file The default folder is the folder you specified in the Backup
399. rties as well as the properties for float clear and display Box Selector BODY e a Float Default m Clear Default m Display Default m Cancel f Apply gt HTML Tool Descriptions 197 Border The Border dialog allows you to edit the border width border color and border style properties for a selector The first row lets you specify values that apply to all four sides The color buttons let you select colors from your preferred Web color palette as specified in the HTML Colors preference panel the pop up menus next to them let you select colors by name The icons on the left side of the dialog represent from top to bottom the entire border top right bottom and left Border Selector BODY IE C18 ES 8 Orr A A Ez f Dera A O A Ez f Oera W O A A Oera W O A A erar W Cancel Apply gt o fc fo Background The Background dialog allows you to edit background image background color background repeat background position and background attachment properties The Image field allows you to select an image file by clicking the File button or by using drag and drop from the Finder Background Selector BODY f File gt Addressing Full Root Relative coor 8 Repeat Default m Left a Attach i Default m Top 198 Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Padding Margins These similar dialogs allow you to edit the padding and margin properties In both cas
400. running Do Nothing This option specifies that BBEdit should not open any windows or perform any other actions New Text Document This option specifies that BBEdit should open a new empty text editing window New Disk Browser This option specifies that BBEdit should open a disk browser starting at the desktop New FTP Browser This option specifies that BBEdit should open an FTP browser Open This option specifies that BBEdit should bring up the standard Open dialog allowing you to select and open a file Open from FTP Server This option specifies that BBEdit should bring up the Open from FIP Server dialog allowing you to connect to an FTP server and open a file You can hold down the following modifiers during launch to override these actions Modifier s Function Option Suppress startup items only Chapter 10 Preferences Modifier s Function Shift Disable all plug ins tools external services and startup items State Preferences The State preferences control how BBEdit reads and writes state information in text files Honor Saved State When this option is selected BBEdit honors state information that may be stored in a file The following suboptions let you fine tune which state information BBEdit honors Window Position When this option is selected BBEdit restores the window of the document to the same position as when the file was closed Otherwise BBEdit opens the window in its default pos
401. s BBEdit can open files directly from and save them to any available FTP server To open a file choose Open from FTP Server from the File menu The following dialog appears Bookmarks a www barebones com m Server Passive FTP index html New Dir gt www barebones com index2 html poe T press I Go To User Name press html foo I products products html word z 3 E area Password a robots txt f Get Info sitemap html C Remember Password special_ofter html Delete Auto ionnect s a U Show Files Starting with o Disconnect Cancel il Show Document Icons Enter the name of the server and specify your user name and password in the appropriate fields then click the Connect button to initiate an FTP transaction You can also click the Go To button to bring up a dialog in which you can type the exact pathname of a directory to view BBEdit allows you to open an FTP connection on ports other than the default port 21 To specify an alternate port place it on the end of the host name separated by a colon for example ftp example com 1111 Alternatively you can choose an item from the Bookmarks pop up menu to fill in a predefined server user name and password Bookmarks can be set by entering the appropriate information in the FTP dialog and choosing Add from the Bookmarks pop up menu or by using the bookmark list in the FTP Settings preference panel To store FTP passwords B
402. s In BBEdit a multi file search is a simple extension of the find scripting command To search a single file or folder for all occurrences matching the search parameters specify the file or folder as the searching in parameter of the search For example to find all occurrences of index html in a web site one might use the following scripting command find index html searching in alias Files WebSite Likewise to find JavaScript line comments find S searching in alias Files WebSite options search mode Grep To search in a single file find crash searching in alias Files WebSite index html Scripting the Clipboard BBEdit now has multiple clipboards These are fully accessible via the scripting interface Most operations due to the way Mac OS works with respect to clipboard data require the application to be frontmost Here are some examples count clipboard e Returns the number of clipboards supported by the application clipboard 1 e Returns index 1 contents Files WebSite length 14 is multibyte false display font ProFont display font size 9 style plain clipboard 1 as text Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit Note e Returns Files WebSite clipboard 1 as reference e Returns clipboard 1 of application BBEdit 7 0 current clipboard e Returns the current clipboard as a record you can coerce it to reference or text or get individual properties To set the text in a given clipbo
403. s Mark these checkboxes to have BBEdit insert these tags automatically Give BBEdit Credit This option generates a lt META NAME generator CONTENT BBEdit 7 0 tag in the document indicating that you used BBEdit to create it Title Enter the HTML title for the document which can be different from the file name here This text will appear in the title bar of a browser s window when this document is opened Lang This option indicates the language this document is written in This information can be used by search engines and translation software to help Web users find pages in their own language Charset This option indicates the character set used by the document If you do not specify a character set the character set chosen in the user s browser will be used You can choose which character sets appear in this pop up menu by using the Text Encodings panel of the Preferences window Base Enter the URL for this document s BASE tag The BASE tag indicates the actual location of the document on a server and all relative URLs specified in the document will be resolved by the browser relative to this location No BASE tag is created if you leave this field blank Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools Note new in 7 0 Meta Enter the META tag to be included at the top of the document here if any META tags can be used for client pull techniques for indicating search keywords and for a wide variety of other purposes Link
404. s so that you can open large files without having to increase BBEdit s memory partition If you have a large document open you may not be able to launch other applications until you close it You should generally increase BBEdit s memory partition only if you use third party plug ins that require more memory to load These operations all use memory in BBEdit s application partition A good starting point would be to add 500K to BBEdit s Preferred memory size ordinarily you should never need to add more than 1000K Mac OS X deals with memory very differently than do previous versions of the Mac OS On Mac OS X you no longer need to set memory partitions on a per application basis Chapter 3 Working with Files Creating and Saving Documents To create a new document window within BBEdit pull down the File menu and open the New submenu Since BBEdit allows creating several kinds of documents you will see several options as follows Text Document N with selection 86 N Open a0 with Clipboard C4 38N Open Hidden HTML Document ASN Open from FTP Server 0 Open Selection D File Group Open Kecent P Disk Browser CEN Close W FTF Browser Save 365 Save As Shell Worksheet bin tcsh Save a Copy Shell Worksheet Save to FTP Server OS mm Save a Copy to FTP Server C4885 Revert Backup Options Make Backup Now Page Setup Print 86P The document types and their effects are as f
405. s a simple repeat count For example if you type Ctl U then a 3 and then Ctl N the insertion point will move down three lines There is no visual feedback as you type the number and no way to backspace or otherwise edit the number If you make a mistake the best you can do is type Ctl G keyboard quit and start over Appendix B Editing Shortcuts APPENDIX Note Placeholders and Include Files This appendix lists the placeholder tokens used by BBEdit templates and include files and describes the use and capabilities of include files In this appendix PlaceholdegSg o 3s ear pected nur het ke tetris Se RO PUE a T tu et che n 307 Using the RELATIVE Placeholder 310 Ihchude PIleS2 22 wid teh ove Soe aan des lera ew dew a ea eh a 311 Simple Includes 311 Persistent Includes 311 Include Files with Variables 312 Including AppleScripts 313 Including Perl or Python Scripts 314 Other Include Notes 316 Placeholders Placeholders are processed under the following circumstances e When a new HTML document is created from a template the placeholders in the template are replaced with their current values The new document receives the substituted text the original template file is not modified When the Update Document command part of the HTML Tools is invoked any placeholders in the documents being updated are replaced with their current values Since the placeholders are
406. s all the matches into a search results window To learn more about multi file searching see Multi File Searching later in this chapter Chapter 7 Searching Note Exclude Matches When this checkbox is selected and you are doing a multi file search BBEdit finds all the files that do not contain the search string rather than the files that do Search Field Input Script The Find dialog matches the font used to the input method For example if you have Japanese installed or are on a Japanese localized system and Japanese is the selected input method then the contents of the Search For and Replace With fields will be displayed using the Japanese font that you have selected in the Fonts panel of the preferences When the selected input method is US the designated Roman font will be used instead Special Characters You can use the following special characters to search for line breaks and other non printing characters as well as hexadecimal escapes to search for any desired 8 bit character Character Matches r line break carriage return n Unix line break line feed t tab AT page break form feed XNN hexadecimal character code NN for example xOD for CR NA backslash X The form of a hex escape is xNN where N is any single hex digit 0 9 A F The x may be upper or lower case You can use the ASCII Table in the Window menu to find the hex value for any 8 bit Macintosh character You can
407. s at the top of the dialog box determine what action the plug in takes You can choose whether to convert only the selected text if there is a selection in the active window whether to convert the text right in the window and whether to also place the results on the clipboard The radio buttons in the dialog provide options for converting the specified 8 bit characters to their ASCII equivalents This plug in also automatically converts typographer s quotes and to straight quotes and This plug in was originally written by Jamie McCarthy based on a prototype Prepare Usenet Posting plug in by Rich Siegel This plug in can be used to reverse the effects of the Educate Quotes plug in Educate Quotes The Educate Quotes plug in converts straight quotes and to typographer s quotes and in the text of the active window You should not use this plug in to prepare text for posting on a web page or use in an email as typographer s quotes in the Mac character set will generally not be properly displayed by applications on other platforms Hex Dump The Hex Dump plug in provides a hex dump for a file that you choose Prefix Suffix Lines The Prefix Suffix Lines plug in adds or removes a prefix from all the lines of the text of the active window or of the selected text Chapter 15 BBEdit Plug Ins new in 7 0 Important Process Duplicate Lines The Process Duplicate Lines plug in locates duplicate
408. s inherits all the properties of the item class this means that the text window class also has the properties property defined by the item class BBEdit and AppleScript 239 240 Note To make explicit what you might have already gathered classes in AppleScript form a hierarchy That is classes can be based on other classes Such a class is called a subclass and the class on which a subclass is based is referred to as its parent class In AppleScript classes can only have one parent Multiple inheritance is a feature found in more complex languages The idea of a class hierarchy makes it easier for us to add new features to BBEdit since when we want to create a new kind of window half the work is already done However when scripting you may need to flip back and forth between two or more class definitions to find all the properties of the object you are working with This is technically speaking a limitation of Apple s Script Editor There is no reason the inherited properties could not automatically be included in a subclass listing by a smarter editor for example Script Debugger which does this Now that we have the class hierarchy under control let s look at the properties themselves more closely we will stick with the text window class at this point Properties of an object are referred to using the preposition of For example the following line of script returns the font of the frontmost text editing window tell app
409. s of window disk browser window provides a way to reference windows corresponding to open disk browsers A disk browser window does not present any properties beyond the basic window class but provides a way to differentiate disk browser windows from other types of window results browser provides a way to reference results generated by a batch operation A results browser does not present any properties beyond the basic window class but provides a way to differentiate results windows from other types of window search results browser a subclass of results browser referringspecifically to the results of a single file Find All command or a multi file search Classes of Document As with windows there are various classes of document e document the basic document class contains properties that apply to any sort of document whether it has unsaved changes the alias to the file on disk and so on text document text documents contain information specific to text files opened for editing in BBEdit The text document class provides much greater access to document properties than before a text document s Projector state is now accessible for example and properties are generally much more consistent e group document refers to a document corresponding to an open file group A file group document does not present any properties beyond the basic document class but provides a way to differentiate file group documents from other types o
410. s palette Choosing Edit Tag displays a dialog appropriate to editing the most common attributes used with the current tag The dialog shown is for a BODY tag dialogs for other tags will look different Body Properties Background Fr File Addressing Full 2 Root Relative B BGColor F3 Text mum FFFFFF 000000 0000FF 00FF00 FF00FF i Cancel Edit Tag also works with CSS Choose Edit Tag while the insertion point is within a selector s property or value and BBEdit will display an appropriate dialog for editing many common properties Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools new in 7 0 Note Note Close Current Tag The Close Current Tag command inserts a closing tag to match the nearest opening tag preceding it If the closing tag is placed on a new line it will use the same indent level as the opening tag For instance if the insertion point is preceded by a lt P gt Paragraph tag plus some text content Close Current Tag will insert a matching lt P gt tag to close the paragraph If you frequently work with HTML documents you may want to assign a key equivalent to this command using Set Menu Keys Balance Tags When Balance Tags is chosen BBEdit expands the selection to encompass the content of next outermost set of enclosing tags The easiest way to understand how this works is to see it in action Place the insertion point in an HTML document s lt TITLE gt element and choose Balance Tags Th
411. s to their default values as listed in this Appendix Available Key Combinations All menu key combinations must include either the Command key or the Control key or both except function keys which may be used unmodified Additionally the key combinations Command 0 through Command 9 are reserved for file entries on the Window menu There may also be other key combination which the operating system preempts such as Command Tab on Mac OS X The Help Home End Page Up and Page Down keys can now be used in menu key combinations as well The Help key can be assigned without modifiers the others must be used in combination with at least either the Command or Control key 290 Appendix A Command Reference Listing by Menu and Command Name Apple Menu About BBEdit BBEdit Menu About BBEdit Plug In Info Preferences Set Menu Keys Services Hide BBEdit Hide Others Show All Quit BBEdit File New New With Stationery Open Open Hidden Open from FTP Server Open Selection Open File by Name Reveal Selection Open Recent Close Close All Windows Close All Documents Close amp Delete Save Save All Save As Save As Selection Save a Copy Save to FTP Server Save a Copy to FTP Server Revert Revert Backup Options Make Backup Now Page Setup Print Print All Print One Copy Quit Mac OS 9 Mac OS 9 only Mac OS X only Cmd submenu none or Cmd H
412. s window Optionally if the current document is an XML document you can insert an XML Declaration either alone or in addition to the Meta Tag by checking the XML Declaration box and clicking Apply HTML Tool Descriptions 195 196 CSS Submenu This submenu allows you to create edit and format Cascading Style Sheet markup BBEdit has built in support for CSS When you are editing stand alone CSS files or HTML files with embedded CSS syntax coloring is available and the Function pop up menu in the status bar lists CSS selectors as well as CSS files referenced by import directives and link tags Choose an external stylesheet from the Function pop up and BBEdit will open that stylesheet for editing The CSS function parser supports the following syntax for laying a mark in the function menu bbmark string to appear in the menu import The import directive instructs a Web browser to load an external style sheet This dialog box allows you to select a file or drag and drop one from the Finder and choose whether to use the optional url notation for specifying the location of the style sheet Remember that import must come before other CSS rules inside a lt style gt tag or ina stand alone CSS document otherwise it will not work import D File Addressing Full Root 3 Use url Notation Relative Media a Cancel d Apply 3 Format The CSS Format command will reformat your CSS markup for easie
413. sary item The script itself can either be located in the same folder as the glossary item that invokes it in which case you need only specify its name such as MyDateScript or you can supply a full pathname to a script on any mounted volume such as Hard Drive My Project Scripts MyDateScript An instance of a placeholder referencing the latter would be Script Hard Drive My Project Scripts MyDateScript The script must return a text string or a value that can be coerced to a string This result string can itself contain additional glossary placeholders which will be interpreted before the item is inserted in the current document Note that this makes it possible for one script to invoke another Take care not to create a script execution loop which would hang your system Using OSA Scripts with the Glossary 227 228 Chapter 12 Using the Glossary CHAPTER IMPORTANT Scripting BBEdit BBEdit offers access to nearly all of its features and commands via any OSA compliant scripting language such as AppleScript or UserLand s Frontier This chapter provides a brief overview of AppleScript discusses BBEdit s scripting model and explains how you can use scripts within BBEdit An excellent way to learn how to script BBEdit is to look at the scripts others have written for it or to turn on recording in your script editor while you perform actions in BBEdit A number of example scripts are included in the standard distr
414. se the line start and line end operators as necessary You can delete the duplicate lines from the original document Kill Matches copy them to the clipboard Matches on Clipboard or to a new untitled window Matches in New Window or do the same with the lines that are rot duplicated Remainder on Clipboard Remainder in New Window Since each of these options is an independent checkbox you can select any combination of them that you wish For example selecting both Kill Matches and Matches on Clipboard would delete the duplicate lines from the document and copy them to the clipboard for pasting elsewhere Supplied Plug Ins 283 new in 7 0 284 Note Process Lines Containing The Process Lines Containing plug in searches the active window for lines containing a specified search string and then removes those lines or copies them to the clipboard The options on the left side of the dialog box control how the search is performed and the options on the right side control what happens to the lines that are found Process Lines i Find Lines Containing Mi Selected Lines Only M Copy to Clipboard _ Case Sensitive _ Copy to New Window C Use Grep Delete Matched Lines Report Results Patterns fs E Cancel j Process To specify a search pattern enter it in the Find Lines Containing text field To process only the lines in the current selection select Selected Lines Only If you do not want BBEdi
415. see the Fonts panel of the Preferences window BBEdit also displays a Fonts menu in its menu bar by default as a alternative to opening the Font amp Tabs dialog to change the font This menu is especially useful when you are working with multi byte text documents for which you need to choose specific display fonts If you do not need this menu use the Application panel of the Preferences window to turn it off On Mac OS X additional font size choices of 11 and 13 points are available on the Fonts menu These sizes are not shown on Mac OS 9 although you can set them using the Font amp Tabs dialog if you desire Text Transformation BBEdit provides several commands that transform text in useful ways All of these commands are in the Text menu Balance This command locates the pair of parentheses braces brackets or smart curly quotes that surround the insertion point or the current selection If there are unmatched delimiters within this area BBEdit beeps You can also double click a delimiter character to invoke this command When syntax coloring is active for a document Balance including auto balance will ignore balance characters that appear inside strings or comments Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Exchange Characters This command once named Twiddle swaps two characters according to the following rules e If there is no selection and the insertion point is not at the beginning or end of a line or of the docu
416. selection range is extended to include the new placement of the insertion point This is the same effect as typing the arrow key combination and then holding down the Shift key and clicking at the original placement of the insertion point or at the end of the original selection range Scrolling the View When holding down the Control key the arrow keys will scroll document windows without moving the insertion point Accelerated Scrolling When clicking the arrows in a scroll bar you can use the Command and Option keys to accelerate the scrolling On Mac OS X these shortcuts also apply if you use a mouse with a built in scroll wheel Modifier Scroll Speed none Normal Command 2x accelerated Option 3x accelerated Command Option 6x accelerated Cursor Movement and Text Selection 53 54 Note The Delete Key The Delete key deletes the character to the left of the insertion point If you have selected text the Delete key deletes all the text in the selection You can use the Command and Option keys to modify the way the Delete key works Modifier Action none Deletes character to the left of the insertion point Option Deletes to the beginning of the word to the left of the insertion point Command Deletes to the beginning of the line Command Option Deletes to the beginning of the document Holding down the Shift key with the Delete key makes the Delete key work the same way as the Forward Delete key on extended keyboar
417. set with the Character Set markup command will adjust the file s encoding to match as indicated on the Encoding submenu of the File Options popup in the status bar and changing the file s encoding will adjust the character set declaration if one exists This option is on by default When this option is off then BBEdit does not attempt to use the character set specified in the HTML meta tag or XML declaration but will follow the usual procedure for determining the file s character set See Choosing the Encoding for a Document on page 27 The only reason you might want to turn this option off is if you routinely put characters into your document that cannot be represented in the declared character set e g if you will be post processing the file by some other means which modifies these characters BBEdit 7 0 2 BBEdit 7 0 2 is a maintenance update released in February 2003 to resolve issues reported with previous releases and to provide several important new features and feature enhancements as described below Expanded Character Set Handling When opening documents BBEdit will automatically recognize and appropriately handle files that use character set encodings other than Mac Roman even multi byte character sets Likewise you can now save documents using your choice of character set encodings For details on opening files with various character set encodings see Choosing the Encoding for a Document on page 27 and for inform
418. sign that key sequence to the new item Removing a Key Assignment To remove a key assignment from a BBEdit plug in 1 Choose the Tool from the Tools palette 2 Click Set Key 3 BBEdit opens the Set Key dialog 4 Click Reset BBEdit removes the key assignment from the plug in Supplied Plug Ins This section describes the standard BBEdit plug ins installed with BBEdit Add Remove Line Numbers The Add Remove Line Numbers plug in applies or removes line numbers to each line of the text in the active window or in the selection Configure TeX Coloring The Configure TeX Coloring plug in brings up a dialog box that allows you to choose whether math strings should be colored in TeX documents The factory default is for these strings not to be colored Convert to ASCII The Convert to ASCII plug in converts all eight bit Macintosh characters in the active window to their 7 bit ASCII equivalents This plug in is useful for preparing text for an email message or for posting to an information service that does not handle 8 bit characters Supplied Plug Ins 281 282 Note Note When chosen from the Tools menu it opens this dialog box Convert 8 bit Text to 7 bit Text vi Selection Only Mi Convert Text In Place Converted Text on Clipboard R becomes B B becomes ss f becomes J becomes lt lt gt gt f becomes J becomes o P 34 all Cancel j The checkboxe
419. single byte with octal value 7 equivalent to x07 N8 will match a literal 8 character In Replacement Patterns Modifier Effect NNN If more than two decimal digits follow the backslash only the first two are considered part of the backreference Thus 111 would be interpreted as the 11th backreference followed by a literal 1 You may use a leading zero for example if in your replacement pattern you want the first backreference followed by a literal 1 you can use 011 If you use 11 you will get the 11th backreference even if it is empty ANN If two decimal digits follow the backslash which taken together represent the value N and if there is an Nth captured substring then all three characters are replaced with that substring If there is not an Nth captured substring all three characters are discarded that is the backreference is replaced with the empty string AN If there is only a single digit N following the backslash and there is an Nth captured substring both characters are replaced with that substring Otherwise both characters are discarded that is the backreference is replaced with the empty string In replacement patterns O is a backreference to the entire match exactly equivalent to amp Chapter 8 Searching with Grep POSIX Style Character Classes BBEdit now provides support for POSIX style character classes These classes are used in the form CLASS an
420. sired case upper lower or normalized which is either upper or lower depending on your HTML Markup preference settings Misc The Misc submenu contains a motley assortment of commands that simply did not seem to fit anywhere else in the command hierarchy including commands related to using BBEdit with other HTML editors Dreamweaver Choose Dreamweaver to open the current HTML document in Macromedia Dreamweaver or to return to Dreamweaver if you opened a page in BBEdit from there Document Size This command displays a report about the document s size and the amount of time it will require to download at various connection speeds HTML Tool Descriptions 215 216 Index Document This command generates a list of links to all the lt A gt anchor tags in the current document that have a NAME attribute providing a clickable index of all these anchors If you have used the lt A gt tag to mark your main topics for example all lt H2 gt headers this produces an instant topic level index of the current document The index is placed after the lt BODY gt tag unless the insertion point is in an already existing index in which case the old index is replaced with the new one Do not remove the comment markers around the index if you want to be able to update it in the future Index Document also adds A name gt tags to all heading tags that do not already have them Index Folder This command works like Index Document but produ
421. spaces or tabs to indent the new line to the same level as the previous line To temporarily invert the sense of the Auto Indent option hold down the Option key as you press the Return key Balance While Typing When this option is selected BBEdit flashes the matching open parenthesis brace or bracket when you type a closing one This option is useful when you use BBEdit to edit source files to ensure that all delimiters are balanced Smart Quotes When this option is on BBEdit automatically replaces straight quotes with typographer s quotes If you need to type a straight quote when this option is selected or to type a typographer s quote when the option is not selected hold down the Control key as you type the or key Smart quote marks should not be used in HTML documents since they will not display correctly you must use straight quotes or entity codes instead We recommend leaving this option turned off if you are editing HTML content or program code Smart Editing The Smart Editing option has been removed as of BBEdit 6 5 It wasn t smart enough Auto Expand Tabs When this option is selected BBEdit inserts an appropriate number of spaces when you press Tab rather than inserting a tab character Soft Wrap Text When this option is selected BBEdit soft wraps the text in the file to the right margin that you choose the Philip Bar the window width or a specific number of characters The Philip Bar
422. splaying the resulting URL Hret http www exam ple com foo bar flapdoodle target html File 3 Addressing f Full 5 Root 5 Relative The URL can be expressed in any of three ways selected by radio buttons below the text field e Full addressing specifies the complete URL including the scheme http the server s domain name and the complete directory path leading to the file within that server e Root addressing specifies just the file s location within its host server e Relative addressing specifies the file s location relative to that of the HTML document referring to it Using the HTML Tools 191 new in 7 0 192 Note For example if the web site resides on a server named www example com in directory foo bar and you are creating a document in that directory named index html with a link to file target html in subdirectory flapdoodle the full address would be http www example com foo bar flapdoodle target html the root address would be oo bar flapdoodle target html and the relative address would be flapdoodle target html If you have designated a folder on your local disk as the site root for your web site in the HTML Web Sites preference panel the HTML tools will recognize files within that folder and substitute the server domain and site path in its place For instance if your local site root for the web site above is the folder HD HTML Documents Main Site th
423. st time a persistent include is processed it is handled much like a simple include However since the include directives remain in place and because they mark the beginning and end of the inserted text the Update tool can rip out the obsolete included text and replace it with the updated file Using persistent includes and the Update Folder or Update Site commands you can easily make these sorts of changes to entire sites in moments Any changes you have made to the included text after its initial inclusion will be discarded when the persistent include is updated even if you have not changed the include file Include Files with Variables Include files can be extended even further through the use of variables which provide a means of inserting arbitrary text when the included file is processed so that not all instances of the included file are exactly the same Variables are essentially placeholders that you make up yourself Some possible uses are to insert names taglines alt strings for images or file names for files other than the current document into documents A variable name consists of a string of alphanumeric characters enclosed in number signs the character Spaces are not allowed in variable names but underscores may be used to represent word breaks Variables can be placed anywhere in an include file just like placeholders When you include that file in a document you specify the variable names and values w
424. stall a plug in drag and drop it directly onto the BBEdit application icon in the Finder BBEdit will launch if necessary and present an alert asking you to confirm that you want to install the plug in If there is already a plug in with the same name in your Plug Ins folder you will be further prompted whether to replace it with the version you are dragging If you confirm the operation the plug in you dragged will be placed at the top level of your Plug Ins folder and the one it replaced will be moved to the Trash You will need to quit and relaunch BBEdit in order to use the newly installed plug in When installing a plug in if there is no BBEdit Support folder available an appropriate folder will be created in Library Application Support on Mac OS X or in the same folder as the BBEdit application on Mac OS 9 The Tools Menu and Floating Window The floating Tools window can be displayed by choosing Plug In Tools from the Palettes submenu of the Window menu Any plug ins you have installed will appear both in this Tools window and in the Tools menu itself Names that are too long to fit within the width of the window are truncated with ellipses Hovering the mouse over such a truncated name displays a tool tip showing the full name If you hold down the Option key the tool tip will appear instantly with no hovering delay Names that fit entirely within the window without truncation do not display a tool tip Any plug
425. stem source control package when running on Mac OS X CVS Information http www cvshome org In order to use BBEdit s CVS integration you will need to turn on the appropriate option in the Tools preference panel and configure your local CVS setup and repository access from the command line How this is done varies from user to user and from organization to organization The below article on Apple s web site provides a general overview of using CVS with Mac OS X for more details you should consult your local CVS guru as necessary Mac OS X Version Control with CVS http developer apple com internet macosx cvsoverview html Once you have configured CVS you can proceed to work with files and folders in your local repository using the commands on BBEdit s CVS menu Get Revision When working with a file that is in a CVS repository you can choose this command to bring up a dialog box listing all the different revisions of the file and select any of these to replace the contents of the current file Update File This command replaces a file with the latest revision of that file from the CVS repository To update the file in the front most window choose Update File from the CVS menu To update any file on disk hold down the Shift key while choosing Update File from the CVS menu and choose a file from the Open dialog that appears Update Folder When you choose this command and select a folder in the Update Folder dialog BBEdit
426. t support barebones com BBEdit is a trademark and It Doesn t Suck is a registered trademark of Bare Bones Software Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the copyright holder The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement This document may not in whole or in part be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without prior consent in writing from the copyright holder Warranty and license information is printed on the CD ROM package and included on the next page of this user manual Frontier is a trademark of UserLand Software THINK C THINK Pascal and THINK Reference are trademarks of Symantec Corporation CodeWarrior is a trademark of Metrowerks Inc Macintosh Mac OS Mac OS X Power Macintosh AppleScript MPW and ToolServer are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc PowerPC is a trademark of International Business Machines Corp All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners License Agreement You the Licensee assume responsibility for the selection of the program BBEdit to achieve your intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from the program Breaking the package seal and installing the program constitutes your acceptance of these terms and conditions If you do not accept these terms and conditions the
427. t 81 form sentences 62 FORM tag 204 205 form words 62 Format command 214 Forms submenu 204 Forward Delete key 54 56 fractional widths 41 FRAME tag 211 Frames submenu 211 FRAMESET tag 211 freezing line endings 66 Frontier 221 FTP 32 alternate ports 32 FTP Browsers 35 FTP Settings Preferences 160 function keys 55 function placeholder 226 Function pop up menu 49 50 Function Popup Preferences 161 G Get Info command 50 92 Get Revision command 272 Glossary 12 88 223 Index 323 language sensitivity 224 manually sorting 224 substitutions 226 Glossary palette 4 289 Glossary Preferences 161 Go To Center Line command 113 Go To Line command 55 113 Go To Previous Error command 113 gremlins 63 grep 98 alternation 125 backreferences 133 character classes 120 comments 137 complex patterns 123 conditional subpatterns 141 entire matched pattern 128 escape codes 117 121 examples 130 excluding characters 120 longest match issue 126 lookahead assertions 139 lookbehind assertions 139 marking a mail digest 132 marking structured text 131 matching delimited strings 131 matching nulls 133 matching white space 130 matching words and identifiers 130 non capturing parentheses 135 non printing characters 121 non repeating subpatterns 142 once only subpatterns 142 pattern modifiers 137 positional assertions 139 POSIX character classes 135 quantifiers 122 ranges 120 rearranging name lists 132 recursive patterns 144 r
428. t Dictionary peri reference window Class window an open window pragin info window gt Plural form preferences window windows picture document Elements Picture Med text by numeric index Mr nme Properties punc lt inheritance gt item l bounds bounding rectangle e jesse EE A SSS irse recent folder B per closeable boolean k ues foe ee Agi gant fly search results browser index integer Aas cer iv eoe sre shell document modal boolean MA Av 53S ieAeMecxxxRS Shell window file alias fo fae Gee Hym wy AS RUE C gs tent document 0 modified boolean ro Au fae exse Asso OU aes fs foal gi teat window name international text fae ODE ar Ee soe feo window position point sms Jef ony tioata of ihe aoe web site resizable boolean fo 47 fe pini remate O widow selection reference fae sss dia contents anything saofeote ar fae eevee Oe aa PE text text ie senos fart ad ject n aos Projecto state titled boolean r o Mues re egt Are gore sy Result Entry visible boolean r oa 5 prai py Search Options Zoomable boolean ro fie sre cae 2D Search Maroh Zoomed boolean Az Aad kon WWW Search String Properties Text Suite Tex object i ne int 1r 3 ae All windows in BBEdit belong to this class A class defines a particular kind of object a particular example of an object belonging to the class is said to be an instance of that class or just an object of that class So here we are looking
429. t can figure out whether the file is text or not BBEdit will first attempt to map the file name to the list of suffix to language mappings specified in the Languages preference panel If a file name matches up with a language even if the language is None the file is assumed to be a text file Thus you can use BBEdit s own suffix mappings to convince it to recognize as text any files whose suffixes are not in Mac OS X s built in list of file suffix to file type mappings If no match is found in the Languages preferences BBEdit will next apply the Internet Config file name mappings On Mac OS 9 you can configure these mappings with the Internet control panel On Mac OS X a set of default mappings is present but there is no direct interface for configuring them however you can use Internet Explorer s File Helper preferences for this purpose Text Files Opening Preferences 177 new in 7 0 2 new in 7 0 3 new in 7 0 2 178 Note This setting is now treated separately for Mac OS X and Mac OS 9 On Mac OS 9 the factory default remains Assume it s Text However on Mac OS X the factory default setting is now Map the File Name which should provide for more desirable default behavior when performing operations such as multi file searches with the Text Files Only option selected Regardless of the OS you are running BBEdit on you should select whichever setting makes the most sense for the sorts of files you work with if the
430. t from the Palettes submenu in the Window menu BBEdit remembers which palettes you had open when you quit so if you open the HTML Tools palette it will remain open until you close it again even on subsequent uses of BBEdit You can choose the buttons to be displayed on HTML Tools palette in the HTML Palette preference panel Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools HTML Tools Palette Tips A list of all the tools that are available on the HTML Tools palette appears below In most cases their behavior corresponds obviously with the tool descriptions in the previous section In the few cases where there are significant differences these are noted Many of the tools also work with drag and drop Those that do are marked with grip strips two vertical slashes at the left side of the button You can drag these tools into your document to have them take effect wherever you drop them Some palette buttons are actually pop up menus Clicking a pop up menu button while holding down the Command key invokes that menu s last selected menu option Try pressing the Option key and watch how the palette changes By holding down Option as you click you can force many buttons that normally display a settings dialog to use their previous settings instead The Preview button previews your document in a new browser window when you Option click HTML Tools Palette Tool Menu Based Equivalent New Document Tag Maker Edit Tag Document Type Characte
431. t menu or with their Command key equivalents in any dialog that has a text field Chapter 1 Welcome to BBEdit To see the other key equivalents for a particular dialog hold down the Command key After a brief delay the key equivalents appear next to the buttons in the dialog For example this is the Find amp Replace dialog without the Command key equivalents showing Find amp Replace Search For a ZR amp Use Grep Patterns a Fnd f Find All y f Replace j Start at T Search Selection Onl Start at Top as search Selection Only Replace All C Wrap Around C Extend Selection 5 h Backward U Search Backwards U Case Sensitive C Match Entire Words f Cancel j Replace With a L3 Multi File Search MW Batch Find F Exclude Matches Folder m ione selected Other d Other m Options 1 Use File Filter current criteria m f Edit This is the Find amp Replace dialog with the Command key equivalents visible Find amp Replace Search For a amp Use Grep G Patterns a f FindAM f Replace R U Start at Top 3T E Search Selection On ly 365 M C Wrap Around W 0 Extend Selection I Search Backwards B U Search Backwards a C Case Sensitive N U Match Entire Words E f Cancel 4 Replace With f s O Multi File Search 3M MW Batch Find Exclude Matches U Folder PW none selected f Other 0 T Other
432. t the end of the pattern makes this conditional match optional even if 2 is set to blue Here s an example that uses an assertion for the condition and the if then else form Let s say we want to match a run of digits of any length followed by either is odd or is even depending on whether the matched digits end with an odd or even digit d lt 13579 is odd is even Advanced Grep Topics 141 142 This pattern starts with d to match the digits Next comes a conditional subpattern with a positive lookbehind assertion as the condition to be satisfied The lookbehind assertion is true only if the last character matched by d was also in the character class 13579 If that is true we next try to match is odd if itis not we try to match is even Thus this pattern will match 123 is odd 8 is even and so on but will not match 9 is even or 144 is odd Once Only Subpatterns With both maximizing greedy and minimizing non greedy repetition failure of what follows normally causes the repeated item to be reevaluated to see if a different number of repeats allows the rest of the pattern to match Sometimes it is useful to prevent this either to change the nature of the match or to cause it to fail earlier than it otherwise might when the author of the pattern knows there is no point in carrying on Consider for example the pattern d oo when matching against the text 123456bar Aft
433. t to match text when the letters in the text differ from the letters in the search string only by case upper case versus lower case select Case Sensitive To search using a grep pattern select Use Grep and enter the pattern in the text field You can also select a predefined search pattern from the Patterns pop up menu or click the grab selection 8 button to use the current selection as the search pattern If the selection ends in a trailing carriage return the carriage return will be omitted from the search string copied into the text field The checkboxes on the right of the dialog control the way lines containing the specified search pattern will be processed By selecting the appropriate combinations of these options you can achieve the effect of applying various editing commands to each line e Setting both Copy to Clipboard and Delete Matched Lines on is equivalent to applying the Cut command e Setting Copy to Clipboard on and Delete Matched Lines off is equivalent to applying the Copy command e Setting Copy to Clipboard off and Delete Matched Lines on is equivalent to applying the Clear command The Copy to New Window option opens a new untitled window containing copies of all lines matching the search pattern whether or not they are deleted from the original window You can use this option together with turning Copy to Clipboard off to collect all of the matching lines without affecting the previous contents of the clip
434. t window clipboard Class item an OSA object Properties properties record a of fas ohet S prugerfres ID integer r o eiwit gorge ar Q container reference r o eme S Con Rer CC aoi O You will see three properties properties ID and container The first entry properties is a record containing all the object s properties In other words because a window is an item it has in addition to all its listed properties another property which returns all the other properties as a record a single piece of data that can be stored in a variable Every class in BBEdit is part of a hierarchy with the item class at the top so every object in BBEdit inherits the properties property This catch all property can be handy for making exact duplicates of objects among other uses You may realize that BBEdit has several kinds of windows you can see their classes listed in the dictionary clipboard window differences window disk browser window file group window text window tool window and the like Let s look at text window e o o hell window text document joe window web site wind Compare Getions Compare Results ETE info Projector state Result Enry Search prions Search Matoh Search Siring Properties Text Suite texi object insertion point character werd line display lire dex HTML Scripting balance tags check links check syntax GoLive cleaner find tag format generate tag text get html preferences Home
435. tch Find on BBEdit displays the results in a search results window Batch Find off BBEdit opens all files that contain matches Replace Not available when the multi file search option is selected Replace All Finds all the occurrences of the search string in all the files in the set and replaces them with the replace string Don t Find Saves the settings of the Find amp Replace dialog without doing a search Cancel Does not do the search and restores the settings of the dialog box If you selected the Batch Find option read the following section Multi File Search Results Batch Find If you did not read the section Multi File Search Results File by File below Multi File Search Results Batch Find If you selected the Batch Find option BBEdit displays every occurrence of the search string in the set of files searched using a search results browser 0098 Search Results 1 W 785 Notes Open 785 occurrences of handle found in 98 files gt OtherApps html one occurrence found gt carbon html 3 occurrences found 0 gt Custom_Def__Procedures html one occurrence found X MULAC OD R Last Saved 08 07 01 04 51 29 PM hd viL vil vii File Path Developer Documentation Carbon carbon html lt td valign NIDDLE colspan 2 height 15 gt a lt p gt lt p gt lt td gt lt td width 196 valign top height 15 gt lt font face Geneva Helvetica size 2 gt lt span id bodytext
436. ted text to the existing contents of the clipboard hold down the Shift key as you choose the Cut or Copy command When you hold down the Shift key BBEdit changes these commands to Cut amp Append and Copy amp Append Multiple Clipboards BBEdit supports six separate clipboards Each time you use the Cut or Copy command BBEdit automatically switches to the next clipboard wrapping back around to the first clipboard after the sixth This way the last six things you copied or cut are always available for pasting sort of a clipboard history By default the Paste command pastes text from the most recently used clipboard so if you do nothing special BBEdit works just like any other Macintosh program However by using the Previous Clipboard command in the Edit menu you can access the previous clipboard contents Next Clipboard moves forward through the clipboard history There are also buttons in the Clipboard window below that let you move back and forth through the clipboards Clipboard a m es 2 6 45 characters one line had one grunch but the eggplant over there Once you have selected a clipboard using one of these methods the next Cut Copy or Paste command will use the clipboard you chose Subsequent Cut or Copy commands will advance to the next clipboard Paste never advances automatically Holding down the Shift key changes the Paste command to Paste Previous Clipboard or you can use the key equivalent Co
437. tering numbers hold down the Option key and press the Clear key in the upper left corner of the keypad This key is also labeled Num Lock on some keyboards Go To Line Command To move the insertion point to a specific line use the Go To Line command in the Search menu When you choose this command BBEdit opens the Go To Line dialog box Go To Line Line E Cancel d Go To 3 Type the number of the line you want to move to and click Go To The Go To Line command honors the Use Hard Line Numbering in Soft Wrapped Views option in the Text Editing panel of the Preferences window Function Keys If your keyboard has function keys you can use the following key equivalents for cutting and pasting to scroll and to move the insertion point No Modifier Option Command Shift F1 Undo Redo F2 Cut Cut amp Append F3 Copy Copy amp Append F4 Paste Cursor Movement and Text Selection 55 Note No Modifier Option Command Shift del forward delete delete to delete to end of word end of line Home scroll to top of move insertion document point to start of document End scroll to end of move insertion document point to end of Pg Up scroll page up Pg Dn scroll page down document Holding down the Command and Option keys as you press the forward delete key deletes to the end of the document Text Options You can use the Text Options command formerly Window Options to change the way BBEdit edits
438. ters 61 e Change Case 61 Shift Left and Shift Right 62 Add Line Breaks 62 Remove Line Breaks 62 Rewrap Quoted Text 62 Increase and Decrease Quote Level 63 Strip Quotes 63 Hard Wrap 63 Zap Gremlins 63 e Entab 64 Detab 65 Resolve URL 65 How BBEdIEWESDS TOXE iunio Sarah a apa weaned e enis au ue oa 65 Soft Wrapping 66 Hard Wrapping 67 Table of Contents Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 The Mark SubMen cre uada root Epod v de Rs Setting Markers 70 Clearing Markers 70 Using Grep to Set Markers 71 The Insert SubDIMGNU become IRE PERLE E EVI s EE et Inserting Files 71 Inserting a Folder Listing 72 Inserting Paths 72 Inserting a Toolbox Call Template 72 Inserting a Page Break 72 Comparing Iext les vos sucks COR ero bote tread ait ed uiuos eS Multi File Compare Options 75 Using the Spelling Checker 0 0 cece eee eee eee es Checking Spelling 76 Selecting Active Dictionaries 78 Editing the User Dictionary 78 Using an External Spelling Checker 79 Working with International Text An International Text Primer 5 2 ecco es LHOWDOrIpESySLtems WORK 55d me deve ESU paesi Eod dn Using Script SV StCINS 353 4354 Dori Wr atwa sen Sene uude eed rod diga Script Systems in BBEdit 84 npo e rH pad nase oa pn aie cen a ernie ae te ata le acd Gasca a gts Saving Unicode Files 85 e Opening Uni
439. tes 316 Table of Contents xiii xiv Appendix D Changes Since 7 0 BBE HCO erecti acuusd Gitastedu ibas cca S rrt c eta o cns ieu Close Current Tag 317 DBEGIUZDJ 1d ed SX de deae bp ERU AE PA oie as Link File s Encoding to HTML XHTML Character Set 318 bbEdIU 0 25 ion cue iota oe et eed qure puris ea qaum dert Expanded Character Set Handling 318 Application Packaging Changes 319 Mac OS 9 1 Support 319 Insert Multiple Files 319 Save a Copy 319 New Menu Key Combinations 319 CVS Export Project 319 Unix Script Support for Include Files 319 DBEGIEZ O T acutis etr Hb e vele edes Index Table of Contents CHAPTER Welcome to BBEdit This chapter introduces you to BBEdit a high performance HTML and text editor for the Macintosh In this chapter Getin Startede iien AU que ane hd b uim debuisse end o du i S beoe fees 1 Whare BDEGIE S neidet bie gb tent ass aont aN EaR ENS 2 How Can T Use BBEL ereit rnek aqaa S Ow ios qub EO Ae 2 Working with Development Environments 2 Writing HTML Documents 2 Human Interface Notes wis 29 ea RR Ded dae oe EG PR ER EE 3 Dynamic Menus 3 Bypassing Options Dialogs 3 Keyboard Shortcuts for Commands 3 Contextual Menus 4 Snappy Palettes 4 e Dialog Box Key Equivalents 4 Changes from Previous Versions 4 cem mr rp a 3 A EET RES 6 Info on New Features 7 Support 5erviCeS6 ees dus Gok ewe Tu
440. tes for recent PHP4 usage e XHTML 1 1 support in the HTML Tools and syntax checker e Editing views now offer Quartz text smoothing support Mac OS X e Insert File Contents command now allows selection amp insertion of multiple files introduced in BBEdit 7 0 2 e External editor support for use with Project Builder Mac OS X e bbedit command line tool now offers go to line number support Mac OS X e Shell worksheet improvements include a current process indicator and allow interruption of the current process Mac OS X e Window resizing is now palette savvy and a new atop stacking option is available Highlights of some key features added in BBEdit 6 x which BBEdit 7 0 also benefits from include e International text support that lets you edit documents in any left to right script system supported by your Macintosh including multi byte scripts such as Chinese and Japanese using inline input Additionally BBEdit can read and write Unicode files Chapter 1 Welcome to BBEdit new in 7 0 new in 7 0 2 e Enhanced scripting support that allows recording of commands and enables any BBEdit menu command to be replaced or augmented by a script In other words BBEdit is now recordable and attachable Greatly improved regular expression matching using the PCRE engine to bring new power and flexibility to BBEdit s search and replace capabilities including the use of back references within search patterns non gr
441. text and the way it displays text and additional elements in its windows Text Options Options for index html Editing W Auto Indent MW Balance While Typing C Smart Quotes Cl Auto Expand Tabs al Soft Wrap Text to Philip Bar to Window Width to Character Width Language HTML m Display Cl Line Numbers Cl Cursor Position Cl Current Function W Status Bar W Philip Bar 3 Tab Stops Cl Show Invisibles Snow Spaces T Syntax Coloring l Cancel d OK b The Text Options dialog box is divided into two parts the Editing options on the left control the way BBEdit behaves while you type and the Display options on the right control the appearance of the BBEdit window You can also change many of the text options through the Text Options pop up menu left in the status bar Changes you make in the Text Options dialog box affect only the active document window To make changes that apply to all new windows that you open use the Editor Defaults and Status Bar sections of the Preferences window 56 Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Tip Note Note Editing Options These options control the way BBEdit behaves as you type text in the active document window Changes you make here affect only that window To change editing behavior in windows that you open in the future use the Editor Defaults section of the Preferences window Auto Indent When this option is selected pressing Return automatically inserts
442. that you want to alphabetize If the names appear last name first you can easily put these names in a BBEdit window and use the Sort tool But if the list is arranged first name first a simple grep pattern can be used to put the names in the proper order for sorting A grep pattern also known as a regular expression describes the text that you are looking for For instance a pattern can describe words that begin with C and end in 1 A pattern like this would match Call Cornwall and Criminal as well as hundreds of other words In fact you have probably already used pattern searching without realizing it The Find amp Replace dialog s Match Case and Entire Word options turn on special searching patterns Suppose that you are looking for corn With the Match Case option turned off you are actually looking for a pattern that says look for a C or c Ooro R or r and N or n With the Entire Word option on you are looking for the string corn only if it is surrounded by white space or punctuation characters special search characters called metacharacters are added to the search string you specified to indicate this What makes pattern searching counterintuitive at first is how you describe the pattern Consider the first example above where we want to search for text that begins with the letter C and ends with the letter I with any number of letters in between What exactly do you put between them that means
443. ther file matches the filter the files will not be compared See Chapter 7 Searching for more information on creating editing and using file filters Comparing Text Files 75 new in 7 0 76 Note When comparing folders with the Find Differences command BBEdit applies any specified file filter to the contents of the resulting Only in new and Only in old lists so that only those files that match the filter criteria will appear in the lists Previous versions of BBEdit had an Only Compare if Contents field in the Find Differences dialog This option has been superseded by the ability to apply File Filters which can perform much more powerful queries on the contents of a file Using the Spelling Checker The Check Spelling command in the Text menu lets you check the spelling of the text in your documents You can use BBEdit s built in spelling checker or use an external spelling checker that supports Apple s Word Services Suite BBEdit s spelling checker is only capable of working with MacRoman text so the Check Spelling command will be disabled for non Roman documents if the built in checker is selected If you are using a Word Services spelling checker that is capable of handling non Roman content it should work normally Checking Spelling The Check Spelling command in the Text menu opens either BBEdit s built in spelling checker or an external spelling checker to check the spelling of words in the active document
444. they think best In addition to the Required and Standard suites BBEdit has a Miscellaneous suite a BBEdit Suite a Text suite and an HTML Scripting suite If you have the appropriate software installed you will also see the MacPerl Scripting suite and the Projector Scripting suite Additionally if you have any scriptable plug ins installed as many of the supplied ones are you will see additional suite entries for each such plug in Chapter 13 Scripting BBEdit Within each suite events verbs are displayed in normal text while classes nouns are italicized Most commands sent to BBEdit will start with one of the verbs In some cases get might be implied Events Let s look more closely at one of the events Save is a good one to start with It is shown below eos BBEdit Dictionary Required Suite 4 fave Save a window s contents in text format open Save reference saute f asse print to alias ie 9 even i agva fie sinds a cuntenta ait saving as stationery boolean sse 65e ve as ee rey one settings add to rece nt list boolean ce fe fas Ed 3 feet fe Di Standard Suite add to favorites list boolean cet fe fae aaa hae sive close count delete duplicate exists move get make save set Miscellaneous copy THB DF The right side of the window shows the syntax of the selected event as well as a brief description of its function The boldface words are keywords they must be included exactly as sho
445. this box to run Perl or Python scripts in the interpreter s debugger Run in Terminal Run in MacPerl On Mac OS X this command runs the script in a new Terminal window On Mac OS 9 it runs the script in MacPerl and brings the MacPerl application to the foreground Chdir to Script s Folder Check this box to set the working directory to the folder that contains the script before running it Output Options Mark these checkboxes to clear the output file before writing and to save it after writing respectively Run in MacPerl Available only on Mac OS 9 this command will run the script in MacPerl regardless of the most recent settings in the Run Perl Script dialog above Run in Terminal Available only on Mac OS X this command will run the script in a new Terminal window regardless of the settings in the Run Perl Script dialog Run in Debugger Runs the script in the interpreter s debugger regardless of whether the Use Debugger option is set for the Run command also any output options set in the Run command will be ignored The Run in Debugger command is only available for Perl and Python Run File Runs a script from an arbitrary file rather than from a BBEdit window The Run a Script File dialog appears You can select a file by clicking the File button or by dragging a file to the path box at the top of the dialog from the Finder The options are the same as the ones described above for the Run a Script dialog Export To Avai
446. tinues in the Dock tayp ivo div gt aif af k moa Differences Maw Fia Lari acerero Deri ack Por P f q appr toe 3 5 apply to Dia p Dd Fla Library Aib Sere Deuter Li rr Fm Homrancheng Lines File cea bri Ling 5 Fle index hrmb Lire 5 Extra Ereg in Mra befe Z5 in Cid File index irri Line Z3 30 File unas hmi Line 29 2 diferencas found E You can change this arrangement with the Arrange command in the Window menu To change the default arrangement use the Differences section of the Preferences window The Differences window lists all the differences between the new file and the old file To see the differences in context click a line in the Differences window BBEdit scrolls and selects that spot in both files Use the Apply to New and Apply to Old buttons in the Differences window to make the new file look like the old file or vice versa After you use one of these buttons BBEdit italicizes the line in the Differences window to indicate that you have already applied that change If a Differences window is open and is the frontmost window the Compare Again command in the Search menu will recompare the two files being compared and refresh the list of differences accordingly The small button with the circular icon between the Apply to Ne
447. tions are available e The Philip Bar option shows or hides a thin gray line in the status bar e The Tab Stops option shows or hides tick marks in the status bar that indicate the tab stops in the window Line Numbers This option displays line numbers along the left edge of the window Cursor Position This option adds a panel in the bottom left frame of the window that displays the location line and column of the insertion point or the last changed end of the selection range Current Function This option adds a panel in the bottom left frame of the window that displays the name of the function that contains the insertion point or current selection Show Invisibles This option shows or hides non printing characters in the window Select this option when you want to see line breaks tabs and gremlins other invisible characters BBEdit uses these symbols Symbol Meaning A tab 0 space non breaking space A line break Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Note new in 7 0 Symbol Meaning q page break other non printing or special characters When the Show Invisibles option is selected the Show Spaces suboption is available letting you turn off the visually noisy spaces Starting with version 6 5 BBEdit no longer hides the form feed character which was invisible in older versions However when the Show Invisibles option is active form feeds will still be replaced by the special character mar
448. tivate it the specified template and other applicable Document values will be inserted into the currently open document so as to enclose the document s contents within the template s lt BODY gt tags The contents of the document are inserted at the template s BODYTEXT placeholder so each template to be used in this manner must contain this placeholder Regardless of whether you use a template to create a new document or to impose HTML markup on an existing document the template file itself is never changed Rather its contents are simply copied into the document that the template has been used on Templates can make full use of placeholders and include files which are fully documented in Appendix C Custom Markup Neither the Custom Markup tool supplied in versions of BBEdit prior to 5 0 nor any plug ins created with this tool will work in BBEdit 7 0 The types of functions performed by the Custom Markup tool may be accomplished more effectively with OSA AppleScript or Frontier scripts BBEdit s Glossary command or via some combination of these Custom Markup 221 222 Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools CHAPTER new in 7 0 Using the Glossary This chapter describes BBEdit s powerful Glossary command The Glossary provides an easy way to store and access frequently used text of any sort whether sections of program code HTML markup or just about anything else The Glossary s language sensitive set selection and its
449. tly COUNT p s where COUNT is an integer P MIN MAX match at least MIN p s but no more than MAX Note that the repetition characters and match zero or more occurrences of the pattern That means that they will always succeed because there will always be at least zero occurrences of any pattern but that they will not necessarily select any text if no occurrences of the preceding pattern are present Chapter 8 Searching with Grep For this reason when you are trying to match more than one occurrence it is usually better to use a than a because requires a match whereas can match the empty string Only use when you are sure that you really mean zero or more times not just more than once Try the following examples to see how their behavior matches what you expect Pattern Text Matches sx Fourscore and seven years Fourscore and seven years 0 9 l ve been a loyal member 1983 since 1983 or so d I ve got 12 years on him 12 A BAAAAAAAB AAAAAAA A 3 BAAAAB AAA first three A s A 3 BAAAAB AAAA A 1 3 BAAAAB AAA on the first match the remaining A on the second match c andy andy likes candy andy on the first match candy on the second A Ted joined AAA yesterday AAA on the first match a from yesterday on the second Combining Patterns to Make Complex Patterns So far the patterns you have seen match a single character or the repetition of a single character or class of cha
450. to open the data fork of any file as a text file Given that Mac OS X does not set the file type of any text file created by a Unix program to a useful value you may find it helpful to turn on the Map the File Name option in the Text Files Opening panel of the Preferences window With this preference turned on BBEdit will inspect the file s name to see if it can determine whether the file is text or not BBEdit will first attempt to map the file name to the list of suffix to language mappings specified in the Languages preferences If a file name matches up with a language even if the language is None the file is assumed to be a text file Thus you can use BBEdit s own suffix mappings to convince it to recognize as text any files whose suffixes are not in Mac OS X s built in list of file suffix to file type mappings If no match is found in the Languages preferences BBEdit will next apply the Internet Config file name mappings See Chapter 10 Preferences for more details Translate Line Breaks When this option is selected BBEdit translates DOS or Unix line breaks when opening a file Otherwise BBEdit leaves the original line breaks untranslated The setting of this option is not preserved between uses of the Open command unlike the other options in the Open dialog Generally you will want to change this option only temporarily e g to read in a particular file To change the default setting of this option use the Translate Line B
451. to save them without the BOM due to a bug in Microsoft Internet Explorer for the Macintosh This may be addressed in a future version of Internet Explorer Here are details about what each of the above options means e UTF 8 UTF 8 encoding is a more compact variant of Unicode that uses 8 bit tokens where possible to encode frequently used sequences from the file UTF 16 UTF 16 encoding always uses 16 bit tokens no BOM When saving Unicode files you should always include a byte order mark BOM so that the reading application knows what byte order the file s data is in For maximum compatibility the BOM should be used whenever possible Use one of the no BOM options only if there is a specific reason to do so such as providing compatibility with software that malfunctions when a BOM is present e byte swapped Since UTF 16 uses two bytes to represent each character this leaves the question of which of the two bytes comes first whether it is little endian or big endian By default BBEdit writes UTF 16 big endian the standard However by choosing the appropriate option you can write little endian files instead which some Windows software requires When you use an encoding that requires a Unicode file format you can also choose Unicode as an option from the Line Breaks pop up menu in this dialog Unicode has its own line ending standard Files saved as Unicode from BBEdit are given a type of ut
452. to the right of that field If the HTTP EQUIV value is content type you can also choose from among some common values for the Content field by using the pop up menu to its right Script This command begins a section of client side script code by default JavaScript although some browsers support other scripting languages You can choose to execute a script contained in an external file by entering a URL in the Source field click File to choose the file using an Open dialog You can also enter values for the TYPE of script the script LANGUAGE it is written in and the character set or CHARSET of the script Mark the DEFER checkbox to add a DEFER attribute Note You can choose which character sets appear in the Charset pop up menu by using the Text Encodings panel of the Preferences window Noscript This command begins a section of HTML to be displayed only if the Web browser does not support client side scripting often used to provide alternate content following a SCRIPT block A matching lt NOSCRIPT gt tag is also inserted Style This command begins a stylesheet declaration You will be prompted to enter the type and title of the stylesheet and optionally select the Media type it is to be used with Block Elements This submenu lets you add HTML elements that behave as paragraphs or other types of text blocks Since many block elements can be containers for other elements most have an explicit or implicit ending tag fo
453. tomatically expand the selection to include the suffix BBEdit also understands the Unix style line number specifications that can be appended to a file name This type of specification is generated frequently by Unix command line tools For example selecting the text main cp 210 and choosing Open Selection will open the file main cp and automatically select line 210 If the file is already open this command will simply select the designated line In searching for the requested file BBEdit will look in the following locations in order e If the selected file name is surrounded by angle brackets BBEdit will start its search in the folder that you have specified under Default lt gt Directory in the File Search preference panel e If the Open Selection is being done from a shell worksheet BBEdit will search the shell s current working directory followed by any subdirectories within it e Otherwise BBEdit will look first in the same folder as the file containing the selected file name and then in any subfolders within that folder If the file containing the selection is contained within one of the web sites defined in the HTML Web Sites preference panel BBEdit will next search the Templates amp Includes and site root folders if any associated with that site followed by those for the default site designated in the preference panel If the CodeWarrior IDE is running and a project is open BBEdit will ask the I
454. ts are HTML elements that can appear as part of a paragraph such as anchors images applets client side scripts image maps and more Anchor This command inserts an HTML anchor A tag Anchors can either be hyperlinks or be used as the target of hyperlinks to provided multiple targets on a single page The anchor must have an associated URL in the HREF field to be a link it must have a name in the Name field to be a target The Target field is used to specify which frame the linked page should appear in When specifying a URL you can choose a recently used URL from the Recent URLs pop up menu or choose another file from the same folder as the current document using the Current Folder pop up menu If you hold down the Option key the Recent URLs pop up menu will turn into a pop up menu containing Internal Anchors in the current document If you click the File button you will be prompted to choose a file from an Open dialog Normally all types of files will be displayed here However if you select the Only Show HTML and Image Files checkbox at the bottom of the Anchor dialog you will only see images and files whose names match those defined as HTML in BBEdit s Languages preference panel Alternatively you can drag and drop a file into the HREF field in order to insert its path and name BBEdit displays a warning message when the URL does not exist on your computer or is outside the scope of your site these warnings can be disabled
455. turn their corresponding behavior on when preceded by a hyphen they turn the behavior off Setting and unsetting options can occur in the same set of parentheses Example Effect imsx Turn all four options on imsx Turn all four options off i msx Turn i on turn m s and x off The scope of these option changes depends on where in the pattern the setting occurs For settings that are outside any subpattern the effect is the same as if the options were set or unset at the start of matching The following patterns all behave in exactly the same way i abc a i bc ab i c abc i In other words all four of the above patterns will match without regard to case Such top level settings apply to the whole pattern unless there are other changes inside subpatterns If there is more than one setting of the same option at the top level the right most setting is used If an option change occurs inside a subpattern the effect is different An option change inside a subpattern affects only that part of the subpattern that follows it so if the Case Sensitive checkbox is turned on Search for a i b c Will match abc or aBc and will not match anything else But if Case Sensitive is turned off the i in the above pattern is superfluous and has no effect By this means options can be made to have different settings in different parts of the pattern Any changes made in one alternative do carr
456. type utxt BBEdit will treat it as big endian Unicode If you know that a file you are trying to open is in Unicode but it displays as gibberish on your screen close its window without saving Then try reopening the file using the Open As pop up menu in the Open dialog to specify whether to treat the file as Unicode byte swapped little endian Unicode or UTF 8 When opening a malformed UTF 8 document BBEdit will present an alert to warn you When such a file is encountered during multi file searching a warning will be logged Chapter 5 Working with International Text CHAPTER Note Working with Windows This chapter describes the commands in the Window menu These commands allow you to arrange and access editing and browser windows quickly and also to access BBEdit s extensive set of tool palettes and floating windows In this chapter Window MeDU eate bc oe ae Ca fub eee P ao ate eo Rea ed 87 IVE IZ WV INOW d wea dictu v E Greene aci ET RO e Tx pr eb dare es 87 Ding dl toc Prol s Sn uL EU ho RR ete UR ro Ra horde bos dp RUE Rupee SUE 88 Pale id RM RE LC rcr TD 88 ASCII Table 88 Glossary 88 Plug In Tools 89 Scripts 89 e Stationery 89 e Windows 89 HTML Markup Tools 90 Perl Unix Tools Filters and Scripts 90 PRT UVC sence On daira eR E AULA e dco estan bibe cds tos seer ese mason T 91 Geb Info 2 45 teo ue ties ES HU EE es bx aeu ei deb RES Suit 92 Super
457. u 259 e Filters and Scripts 261 Filters 261 Scripts 262 Additional Notes 262 Working with C V9 oo node si etetieten das Sog Ua a ies 263 Get Revision 263 Update File 263 Update Folder 263 Commit File 264 Commit Folder 264 Commit Parent Folder 265 Find Lurkers 265 Compare Revisions 266 Compare Arbitrary Revisions 266 Get Revision History 266 Get CVS Status 266 Add 266 e Remove 266 Go to Previous Next Conflict 267 Export Project 267 Open Log File 267 Working with Metrowerks CodeWarrior sss 267 Using the CodeWarrior Menu 267 Working with Project Builder ssseleeeeeeeeeeesn 269 Table of Contents Chapter 15 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Working with Projector SourceServer 00e eens 269 Check In 270 Check Out 271 Get Revision 272 Cancel Check Out 272 Edit Task Comment 272 Compare Revisions 273 Get Revision History 273 New Project 273 Check In Folder 274 Check Out Folder 275 Find Lurkers 276 Make Obsolete 276 Remove Projector Info 276 e Open Log File 277 BBEdit Plug Ins 279 Usine BDDEGIEPIUP INS o uio pU PAIRE Ord ade ated 279 Installing Plug Ins 280 The Tools Menu and Floating Window 280 The Set Key Button 280 Supphed PIU TNS uctus omis tici oe detur wb Oh caelesteyas 281 Add Remove Line
458. u User name defined in the Sharing Setup or File Sharing control panel Result of running the specified OSA script Selected text WARNING Placeholder Replaced by SELSTART Mark a range within the inserted material to be selected and after the insertion SELEND TIME Current time formatted according to your Date amp Time control panel preferences UUID A 128 bit UUID universally unique identifier formed by combining a value unique to the computer on which it was generated usually the Ethernet hardware address with a value representing the number of 100 nanosecond intervals since October 15 1582 Placeholders are not case sensitive If you want to include a literal placeholder in a glossary item escape the first with a backslash as in DATE Suppose you have defined the following glossary item typedef struct select insertion Select select Ptr select Handle If the selected text in your editing window is MyStruct and you insert this glossary item BBEdit will insert the following in the editing window typedef struct MyStruct MyStruct MyStruct Ptr MyStruct Handle where the vertical bar marks the point at which the blinking insertion point will be placed Using OSA Scripts with the Glossary The placeholder script filename provides a powerful means to insert variable or conditional content by allowing access to any compiled OSA script from within a glos
459. u cannot edit text in a search results browser To edit a file double click the line that contains the match you want to edit and the specified file will open at the point of the associated match After you have opened a file you can use the Find Again Replace Replace AII and Replace amp Find Again commands in the Search menu to continue searching it as if you had chosen a File by File search See the next section for information on File by File searching Note You can use a search results window as the basis of another multi file search See Specifying the Search Set later in this chapter Multi File Search Results File by File If you did not select the Batch Find option BBEdit opens the first file that contains the search string At that point you can use the commands in the Search menu to further control the search This command Does this Find Again Finds the next occurrence of the search string within the same file To search backwards hold down the Shift key BBEdit beeps if it cannot find any more occurrences of the search string in the current file Use the Find in Next File command Replace Replaces the selection with the replace string Replace All Replaces all occurrences of the search string with the replace string within the current file Replace amp Find Again Replaces the selection with the replace string and looks for the search string again BBEdit beeps if it cannot find any more occurre
460. u read through this entire chapter to familiarize yourself with how BBEdit handles it In this chapter Ad International Text Prime aes as ee Cera e el aub c ire 81 How Script Sy Stems WORK d aped rece d mated Mid bem mes eoe 82 Ilem SCcHpUyStems 44 amb a au sia EINER CO MEE D S bns 83 Script Systems in BBEdit 84 UMCOde eae SOS aee d A bete Pd SE PI veiba ds be i 85 Saving Unicode Files 85 e Opening Unicode Files 86 An International Text Primer Starting with version 6 0 BBEdit became fully compatible with left to right non Roman script systems English and most other European languages use Roman characters the kind of letters you are reading now Inside your Macintosh text is stored as a series of numbers just like graphics sound and every other type of information A standard called ASCII the American Standard Code for Information Interchange defines what numbers are used for each of the letters punctuation marks and other symbols you can type on your computer As its name implies ASCII is intended for use with United States English it has a dollar sign instead of the pound sign you would use in Britain for instance and none of the accented letters you would use in Spanish or French However since ASCII defines only 128 codes and a byte can hold 256 different codes Apple uses the remaining values to store characters occurring in other European languages that use the same basic alphabet as English as
461. uirements BBEdit 7 0 4 will run on Mac OS 9 1 or later CarbonLib 1 5 or later required but Mac OS 9 2 2 or later with CarbonLib 1 5 or later is strongly recommended If you are using Mac OS X version 10 1 5 or later is required and version 10 2 3 or later is strongly recommended Installing BBEdit Depending on how you obtained BBEdit you will receive either a CD ROM or a disk image file a dmg file To install BBEdit 7 0 just drag the BBEdit 7 0 folder from the CD ROM or disk image to the Applications folder or other desired location on your hard drive Note IMPORTANT IMPORTANT Additionally you should verify that your Macintosh has the following software installed e If you are running Mac OS 9 1 or later check that you have version 1 5 or later of CarbonLib installed in your system Extensions folder or use Apple s Software Update control panel to obtain the latest version You will need to reboot your computer after installing the new version e If you are running Mac OS X 10 1 5 or later no updates to your system components are required The first time you run BBEdit 7 0 you will be prompted to enter the unique serial number that you received at the time of purchase either on your product CD ROM or with your email order invoice Once you have entered the serial number this dialog will no longer appear and you can use BBEdit freely If you have not yet purchased the product and thus do not have a serial
462. ults Options vi Replace Selection Selected Lines Only f 1 Go on Clipboard C Ignore Leading White Space _ Case Sensitive Populate New Window Numbers Sort by Value Reverse Sort Mi Sort Using Pattern Searching Pattern w t w t fs Sort Using _ Entire Search Pattern All Sub Patterns 11X2 AN f Specific Sub Patterns Cane ES By checking the Sort Using Pattern option you can specify a grep pattern to further filter the lines to be sorted If the pattern contains subpatterns you can use them to control the sort order based on the contents of the strings they match For example suppose you are sorting a list of cities together with their two letter state abbreviations separated by a tab character The pattern and subpatterns shown in the figure will sort the results first by city name and second by state abbreviation Changing the contents of the Specific Sub Patterns field from M12 to 2 1 will instead sort the results by state first and by city second Supplied Plug Ins 285 Important WARNING When you use a grep pattern with this plug in matches are not automatically anchored to line boundaries so ambiguous patterns may produce unpredictable results To avoid this problem you should use the line start and line end operators as necessary Un Comment The Un Comment plug in automates the task of commenting and uncommenting sections of code in various programming languages
463. ument into a stationery pad in the Finder by clicking the Stationery Pad checkbox in the document s Get Info window You can create new documents from a stationery pad in any of these ways e Open the pad the same way you would open any other document e Choose New With Stationery from the File menu and select the desired stationery pad from the contents of the Stationery folder inside the BBEdit Support folder FTP Browsers 35 36 e Use BBEdit s Stationery List which is available from the Window menu The Stationery List is a floating window that displays all the stationery pads you have placed inside the Stationery folder in the BBEdit Support folder You can create a new document from any of these pads by double clicking them in this list To assign a keyboard shortcut to a stationery pad select the pad in the Stationery List window then click the Set Key button type the desired key in the Set Key dialog and click OK Manually Sorting the Stationery By default items in the Stationery List are displayed in alphabetical order However you can force them to appear in any desired order by including any two characters followed by a right parenthesis at the beginning of their names For example 00 Web template would sort before 01 HTML Template For such files the first three characters are not displayed in BBEdit You can also insert a divider by including an empty folder whose name ends with the string Th
464. up Preferences panel allows you to control how the Close Current Tag command inserts the appropriate closing tag Context Sensitive places the closing tag according to various contextual clues such as whether the opening tag is a block element or an inline element and whether there are line breaks in a block element s contents if the tag is a block element This is the factory default and is consistent with previous versions of BBEdit with some improvements to the context sensitivity Before Insertion Point always places the closing tag immediately before the insertion point thus leaving the insertion point outside of the tag container After Insertion Point always places the closing tag immediately after the insertion point This leaves the insertion point inside the tag container 317 318 BBEdit 7 0 3 BBEdit 7 0 3 is a maintenance update released in March 2003 to resolve issues reported with previous releases It also incorporates an additional HTML placeholder ZSHORTUSERNAMESZ as well as a preference option to control character set handling in HTML and XHTML documents Link File s Encoding to HTML XHTML Character Set When this option in the Text Files Opening Preferences panel is selected BBEdit will use the character set specified in the appropriate HTML meta tag or XML declaration to determine a file s encoding when opening the file Also when this option is on changing an HTML or XML document s character
465. ups Before Saving 179 Text Prane Preferences veros ceste e tants SOC Te E 179 Default for Page Setup 179 Defaults for Printing 180 Default Font 180 Use Document s Font 180 Fractional Widths 180 e Print Backwards 180 Frame Printing Area 180 Print Page Headers 180 Print Full Pathname 180 Print Line Numbers 180 Print Two Up 180 1 Inch Gutter 180 Print Color Syntax 181 e Time Stamp 181 Text Search Preferences 0 00 cece nerne renren rrene 181 Report Single File Replace All Results 181 Remember Find Dialog s Start At Top Setting 181 Color Grep Patterns in Find Dialog 181 Multi File Search Replace 181 Grep Patterns 181 Tools Preferences nae a soy tee deed rd fur E oai ad an A 182 Script Editor 182 e Coding Tools 182 Mac OS API Reference 182 Default Shell 183 Install bbedit Tool 183 UnocScriptine Prelerences 44 4 ode x paren dee ah c pP 183 Widows Preferences 2 02 423 02 desee EVE Ra Rar ded esas 183 Window Zooming 183 Window Menu 184 Sort Windows By 184 Window Stacking 184 Leave Room for Palettes 184 Leave Room for Finder 184 BBEdit HTML Tools 185 Introduction to the HTML Tools esee 185 Recommended Books 186 Recommended Online Resources 186 SGML Resources 187 What You Need 187 Configuring the HTML Tools ssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1
466. using the checkboxes at the bottom of the dialog Image This command inserts an lt IMG gt tag to display an image As with the Anchor tag you can select the Source from the Recent URLs or Current Folder pop up menus by typing a URL or by clicking the File button If the Canto Cumulus image cataloging tool is running on your computer you can also click the Cumulus button to choose an image from Cumulus s catalog or you can use drag and drop Chapter 11 BBEdit HTML Tools After choosing an image file you can specify alternate text which will appear in browsers that do not support images or for users who are surfing with image loading turned off enter the Size of the image select the amount of horizontal and vertical Space for wrapping around the image and choose the thickness of the border and the image s alignment Image height and width should be specified whenever possible to speed layout of the page in the browser BBEdit will enter these values for you automatically when you choose an image file You can also mark the Is Map checkbox to use a server side image map or the Use Map checkbox to use a client side image map embedded in the HTML document Applet This command inserts the lt APPLET gt tag for specifying a Java applet You will need to specify the location the folder that contains your main Java class file the codebase as well as the name of the main class file If the file is in a ZIP or JAR archive you can spec
467. uttons To restore the contents of those menus to the factory defaults use the Restore Defaults button The Mac Roman and Unicode encodings present at the top of the list are always enabled and cannot be turned off To keep the length of the encoding menus manageable you should add only those encodings which you use frequently Text Files Opening Preferences The Text Files Opening preferences control BBEdit s behavior when it opens files Translate Line Breaks When this option is selected BBEdit translates DOS or Unix line breaks when opening a file Otherwise BBEdit leaves the original line breaks untranslated If a File s Type Is Unknown These settings tell BBEdit how to deal with files whose type and creator codes are not set Usually such files are created by Unix programs running on Mac OS X but they may also be downloaded from remote servers You can choose gnore It BBEdit will behave consistently with previous versions Since the file s type is not TEXT or any other type which is recognizable as a text file type BBEdit will ignore the file in situations where a text file is required Assume It s Text BBEdit will assume that the file should be treated as text This will give maximum exposure to such files at the expense of occasionally seeing a file that does not actually contain text like binary data or executable files on Mac OS X Map the File Name BBEdit will inspect the file s name to see if i
468. vileges may not be able to modify the contents of the BBEdit Support folder This means that in addition to being unable to add or modify scripts stationery and glossary items such users will not be able to modify the key equivalents for any existing items To avoid this a user with admin privileges should remove the BBEdit Support folder from the BBEdit application folder Then each individual user can create their own local BBEdit Support Folder Library Application Support BBEdit Support which they will be able to add or remove items from at will BBEdit Support Folder 11 Upgrading Upgrading IMPORTANT Glossary The Glossary folder holds text files whose contents can be inserted into an editing window with the click of a button or a keystroke Glossary files can also use special placeholders to insert varying or context sensitive information for example a date or the name of the current file Initially this folder contains several sample glossary sets for C source code HTML WML Mac OS X Property List files and plain text which you can use or modify as you like See Chapter 12 for more information on the Glossary If you are upgrading from a version of BBEdit prior to 6 5 you have two options for migrating your current custom Glossary items You can either move all of your custom files into the Universal folder within the Glossary folder or create new Glossary sets for your existing files Help B
469. w and Apply to Old buttons performs the same function You can also compare the current clipboard contents against any file Just choose Clipboard from either the New or the Old pop up menu in the Find Differences dialog when the Clipboard window is open Chapter 4 Editing Text with BBEdit Multi File Compare Options You can compare multiple files at once by selecting the Folders button in the Find Differences dialog BBEdit lists all the files and marks those that are different with a bullet You have the additional options described below List Identical Files Normally when you compare folders using the Find Differences command BBEdit presents you with three lists one list of the items that are in the first folder but not in the second folder another list of the items that are in the second folder but not in the first one and another list of the items that appear in both folders The list of items that appear in both folders generally displays a bullet next to items that are not identical For example if you have an archived mail folder that you are comparing against a current mail folder mailbox files that appear in both the old and new file will all be listed together however if there have been any changes to the contents of particular mailbox files the changed mailbox files will be listed with bullets next to them If you are comparing very large folders however the list of common items can be extremely long making the flagg
470. wanted to insert some text into a document emulating a user typing into the application s window is just about the least efficient way of accomplishing this imaginable with AppleScript you would just tell the application to insert the text directly If you wanted the application to save the frontmost document you would not mime choosing Save from the File menu but rather just tell the application to save document 1 Scriptable Applications and Apple Events Since OSA scripts must have direct access to an application s internal data structures any application that will be used in an OSA script must be designed to allow this access We say such applications are scriptable BBEdit is scriptable as are many many other programs However it is important to note that not every application is scriptable and OSA scripts are not the best solution for automating applications that are not What goes on in an application that is scriptable The foundation of OSA scripting is something called the Apple Event Macintosh applications are designed around an event loop they go around in circles waiting for you the esteemed user to do something choose a menu command press some keys and so on These actions are passed to the application by the operating system in the form of an event The application decodes the event to figure out what you did and then performs an appropriate operation After an event has been handled the application goes back to waitin
471. well as symbols frequently needed by American and European users The extended Macintosh character set includes the various accented characters used by languages such as Spanish French and German so only one character set is needed to represent text written in any of these languages This character set is often referred to as Macintosh ASCII technically a misnomer because ASCII explicitly leaves the extra codes undefined or MacRoman Although the Romans did not have all the letters used in these modern languages our letters evolved from theirs so the kind of alphabet used to write English and these other languages is referred to as Roman 81 82 Of course many languages do not use the Roman alphabet Russian is written using an alphabet called Cyrillic which has more in common with Greek than with anything else MacRoman does have Greek letters in it however so you can write Greek text on a Macintosh without switching alphabets Hebrew and Arabic both have alphabets of their own and to make things even more confusing text in these languages is written right to left rather than the Roman derived left to right Furthermore Asian languages such as Chinese and Japanese often have a different character for each word or concept This means first of all that you cannot fit all the different characters you need for a language in a single byte anymore A byte can only hold a single number with a value from 0 to 255 Plenty for
472. what effect a replace operation will have test it out on a few sample files or a copy of your data first If the Batch Find option is turned off when performing a multi file replace operation each file which contains a match will be opened and left open and you will not see the Find amp Replace All Matches options dialog Multi File Replacing 109 To do a multi file search and replace replacing all occurrences 1 Set up the find and replace strings in the Find amp Replace dialog as described in the section Multi File Search 2 Choose the files to be searched as described in Specifying the Search Set 3 Click Replace All in the Find amp Replace dialog or use its key equivalent of Command Option R BBEdit displays the Find amp Replace All Matches dialog box Find amp Replace All Matches Leave Open f Save to Disk P m am SY Confirm Saves Cancel MW Show Results f Proceed This is what each of the options does Replaces all occurrences of the search string This option with the replace string and Leave Open Leaves all the files open so that you can inspect the replacements If there are many files that contain the search string BBEdit may run out of memory Save to Disk Saves each file with the changes When the Confirm Saves setting is active you will have an opportunity to approve the changes before BBEdit saves them to disk You should not turn this off unless you are sure that
473. wn or the script will not compile The normal text tells you what kind of information goes after each keyword For example after save you must give a reference the italicized comment next to that line indicates that it is a reference to the window to be saved In other words some window object which in BBEdit would be window 1 for the frontmost window or window Text File if you want to specify a window by name we will show you how to figure all that out in a moment you have to look at the window class s dictionary entry Anything in square brackets is optional Most of the rest of the save event is optional in fact The basic event just saves the frontmost window to the same file from which it was opened However you can also optionally include the word to followed by a file reference You specify a file simply by using the word file followed by the path name of the file as in file Macintosh HD Desktop Folder My file If you specify a file to save the window to the text will be saved into that file instead of the file it came from like using Save As instead of Save The last three optional parts of the save event are denoted as boolean That means they take either a true or a false value In AppleScript there are a couple of different ways to specify boolean values You can write saving as stationery true to tell BBEdit to save the file as a stationery document Or you can write with saving as stationery You will notice that the
474. ws you to translate plain text to HTML or vice versa The dialog that appears gives you flexible options for translating Macintosh characters to HTML entities converting paragraphs to lt P gt tags and vice versa removing HTML tags entirely and so on You can choose to have the results displayed in a new document window and to convert only the selection rather than the whole document See HTML Translation later in this chapter for more information Remove Comments or Markup This command removes all HTML comments or HTML tags respectively from the selection Note that removing comments will not remove comment markers around client side scripts like JavaScript where they are required for proper functioning of the page on older browsers but will remove the comment markers used by placeholders and indexes making these items difficult to update in the future Comment Uncomment Commenting adds comment markers lt gt around the selected text so that it is ignored by the browser It also converts any previously existing comment markers in the selection range to use double square brackets in place of lt gt and in place of to prevent older browsers from misinterpreting the comment Uncommenting removes all comment tags from the selection and converts any double bracket comments back to real HTML comments Normalize Tag Case Make Tags Upper or Lower Case These commands convert all HTML tags in the document to the de
475. wser 1 Show All Available ki Directory BBEdit Support El f pen Abaut BBEdit Support T Dictionaries a Glossary T Help X femme Glossary C Source cp HTML Glossary html PropertuList Glossary plist Universal tems WML Glossary wml The file list pane displays all of the disks on the Finder desktop If you click a disk in the file list pane the text pane displays all the items on the disk that BBEdit can open You can also open a disk browser starting at any particular folder by dragging that folder onto BBEdit s icon in the Finder Using Disk Browsers The controls in the disk browser let you open files and folders limit the kinds of files to show in the list pane and navigate through your disks and folders Show Pop Up Menu The pop up menu on the upper left section of the list pane lets you specify the kinds of files you want BBEdit to list in the browser You can select All Readable Files meaning all types of files BBEdit recognizes that it can open or All Files which will display every file present in a folder regardless of type or kind You can also select from one of the more specific types listed below text files PICT files QuickTime movies QuickTime images BBEdit file groups MacPerl runtimes stand alone Perl applications and shell worksheets Directory Pop Up Menu This pop up menu always shows the currently selected folder When a disk browser is first opened this will
476. x ignore most white space and allow off inline comments in grep patterns i By default BBEdit obeys the Case Sensitive checkbox in the Find amp Replace dialog or the corresponding property of the search options when using the scripting interface The i option overrides this setting m By default BBEdit s grep engine will match the and metacharacters after and before returns respectively If you turn this option off with m will only match at the beginning of the document and will only match at the end of the document If that is what you want however you should consider using the new VA Z and z metacharacters instead of and s By default the magic dot metacharacter matches any character except return Ar If you turn this option on with s however dot will match any character Thus the pattern s will match an entire document x When turned on this option changes the meaning of most whitespace characters notably tabs and spaces and Literal whitespace characters are ignored and the character starts a comment that extends until a literal return or the Mr escape sequence is encountered Ostensibly this option intends to let you write more readable patterns Advanced Grep Topics 137 138 Perl programmers should already be familiar with these options as they correspond directly to the imsx options for Perl s m and s operators Unadorned these options
477. xt the standard for Unicode text files on the Mac UTF 8 files are given a type of TEXT for compatibility with other applications however BBEdit will also recognize such files with type UTF8 You can choose which encodings appear in the Encoding pop up menu in the Text Encodings panel of the Preferences window Creating and Saving Documents 25 26 Note Long File Names When running on Mac OS X and only on Mac OS X BBEdit supports the use of long and Unicode file names Such file names can be up to 255 characters long when stored on disks formatted as HFS Plus Mac OS 9 will accept and preserve files with long names but you cannot create names longer than 31 characters and longer names that are preserved will appear truncated in most applications including the Finder For example a file named This file has a name that is 47 characters long will appear in Mac OS 9 as This file has a name that 19958 When running on Mac OS 9 BBEdit can open files with long names and will preserve the full name when saving but it will display the truncated name in most places Saving with Authentication On Mac OS X BBEdit supports saving files that require Administrator privileges if you possess the necessary user and password information to enable this For example you can edit and save files that are owned by root Authenticated saving is particularly useful in conjunction with BBEdit s Open Hidden command wh
478. xtension in the previous section of this document non capturing parentheses The remainder are listed in the chart below and discussed in detail afterward Extension Meaning Cluster only parentheses no capturing Comment discard all text between the parens imsx imsx Enable disable pattern modifiers imsx imsx Cluster only parens with modifiers 25 Positive lookahead assertion Q Negative lookahead assertion lt Positive lookbehind assertion lt Negative lookbehind assertion CO Ls Match with if then else 20 Match with if then Chapter 8 Searching with Grep Extension Meaning Match non backtracking subpattern once only R Recursive pattern Comments The sequence marks the start of a comment which continues up to the next closing parenthesis Nested parentheses are not permitted The characters that make up a comment play no part in the pattern matching at all Search for foo Hello this is a comment bar Will match foobar Pattern Modifiers The settings for case sensitivity multi line matching whether the dot character can match returns and extended syntax can be turned on and off within a pattern by including sequences of letters between and Modifier Meaning Default i case insensitive according to Case Sensitive checkbox in Find amp Replace dialog m allow and to match at r on S allow to match r off
479. y on into subsequent branches within the same subpattern For example Search for a i b c matches ab aB c and C even though when matching C the first branch is abandoned before the option setting Chapter 8 Searching with Grep These options can also be set using the clustering non capturing parentheses syntax defined earlier by inserting the option letters between the and The scope of options set in this manner is limited to the subpattern contained therein Examples Search for i saturday sunday Will match SATURDAY or Saturday or SUNday and so on Search for i foo i bar Will match foobar or FOObar Will not match FOOBAR or fooBAR Positional Assertions Positional assertions anchor a pattern without actually matching any characters Simple assertions have already been described those which are invoked with the escape sequences Vb VB VA Z z and For example the pattern bfoo b will only match the string foo if it has word breaks on both sides but the b s do not themselves match any characters the entire text matched by this pattern are the three characters f o and o Lookahead and lookbehind assertions work in a similar manner but allow you to test for arbitrary patterns to anchor next to If you have ever said to yourself I would like to match foo but only when it is next to bar lookaround assertions fill that need Positive
480. ystem alert beep Tag Maker also works with CSS With the insertion point in a CSS selector or declaration Tag Maker will open a list of valid properties Option click while clicking the Insert button and Tag Maker will open a follow up dialog for editing the property for classes that BBEdit offers editing dialogs Invoking Tag Maker when the insertion point is not within a CSS selector will create a new skeleton rule set Tag Maker is also available through contextual menus Simply Control click at any point in your markup and BBEdit will open a contextual menu that includes all valid attributes or properties for the context of the insertion point HTML Tool Descriptions 193 194 Once you have used Tag Maker to enter a tag you can place the insertion point inside a tag and invoke Tag Maker again to show a list of available attributes for the tag Attributes that are already present in the tag are not shown in the list The list below for instance shows attributes of the lt BODY gt tag under HTML 4 0 Transitional Selecting an attribute from the list adds it to the tag and places the insertion point at the proper location for typing a value Insert Attribute alink background bgcolor class onclick ondblclick onkeydown onkeypress f Cancel j Edit Tag Another way to add or edit the attributes of a tag is to place the cursor inside the tag and choose Edit Tag from the Markup menu or the HTML Tool
481. zable true selection some text text text 1 of text window 1 of application BBEdit 7 0 titled true visible true zoomable true zoomed false display font ProFont display font size 9 style plain tab width 4 auto indent true auto balance true smart quotes false show invisibles false expand tabs false soft wrap text false soft wrap mode Philip bar soft wrap width 72 show spaces true show Status bar true show philip bar true show tab stops false show cursor position false show function position false show line numbers false color syntax true split proportion 0 Conversely to set one or more properties at once is very easy set properties of text window 1 to show invisibles true show Spaces true soft wrap text true Only the properties specified will be changed The rest will not be modified It is important to note that when setting properties in this fashion you can only set modifiable properties If you attempt to set any read only properties a scripting error will result set properties of text window 1 to show invisibles true modal false expand tabs true The above script command will turn on Show Invisibles and then report a scripting error since modal is a read only property Scripting Searches Scripting searches with BBEdit is now fundamentally different from pre 6 0 versions and significantly more powerful while being much easier to use Consider the scripting command below t

BBEdit User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents